@ENC

ISO Quality Management System Authentica

m Vo rA
User Manual
EN 500/600 series
I Ver 3.0

mr
( ENC m
•C
It

Address : 5-6F, Bldg.4, Minqi Technology Park ,

Lishan Rd ., Nanshan Area, Shenzhen 518055, China
Website : http://www.encvfd. com
E-mail : encvfd@encvfd.com encvfd@enc.net.cn
SHENZHEN ENCOM ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD .
Tel: +86-755-26984485 Fax: +86-755-26985120
 Print version: V3.0-A0

Foreword
Thank you for purchasing EN500/EN600 series inverter developed and produced
by Shenzhen Encom Electric Technologies CO., LTD.

EN500/EN600 series hi-performance flux vector inverter adopt advanced control

mode to achieve high torque, high precision and wide-range speed regulation
drive, and it also support speed sensorless torque control and PG control torque.
It can meet customer all kinds of requirement to universal inverter. EN500/EN600
inverter is a organic combination for customer’s universal and industrial control
purpose and provide practical main-auxiliary frequency provision, run channel
frequency binding, PID regulator, simple PLC, spinning traverse, programmable
input&output terminal control, pulse frequency provision and inbuilt Modbus,
Can bus, Profibus, 485 freedom protocol and other function and platform. It
provide high integration solution for most manufacturing and automation
customer and EN500/EN600 inbuilt input phase loss function, output phase loss
function, short circuit to earth grounding function and many other protective
function to improve effectively the system reliability and safety.

This brochure provide the installation and wiring, settings, fault check and
methods, maintenance and other relative issues to customer. To make inverter
assemble and operate rightly, and use its high performance to best, please read this
brochure carefully before installation usage and keep them well to the final users
of inverter.

Please contact our office or dealer anywhere at any moment when you have any
doubts or special demands in using these inverters, and you can also contact our
after service center in our Headquarters directly. We will serve you with all our
heart.

We reserve our right to notice you if we change contents of this manual.

 Content
1 Safety information and use notice points …………………………………1
1.1 Safety precautions……………………………………………………1
1.2 Application range ……………………………………………………3
1.3 Use notice points ……………………………………………………3
1.4 Scraping handling notice ……………………………………………4
2 Inverter type and specification ……………………………………………5
2.1 Incoming inverter inspect ……………………………………………5
2.2 Type explanation ……………………………………………………5
2.3 Nameplate explanation ………………………………………………5
2.4 Inverter type explanation ……………………………………………6
2.5 Appearance and parts name explanation ……………………………7
2.6 Outer size ……………………………………………………………8
2.7 EN500 optional base …………………………………………………10
2.8 Outer size of keypad and its fixing box………………………………12
2.9 Product technic index and spec ………………………………………13
3 Installation and wiring ……………………………………………………16
3.1 Installation ambient …………………………………………………16
3.1.1 The demands for installation ambient…………………………16
3.1.2 Installation direction and space ………………………………16
3.2 Parts disassembly and installation ……………………………………17
3.2.1 Keyboard disassembly and installation ………………………17
3.2.2 Cover disassembly and installation……………………………17
3.3 Wiring notice points …………………………………………………18
3.4 Main loop terminal wiring ……………………………………………19
3.4.1 Connection between inverter and fitting parts…………………21
3.4.2 Main loop terminal wiring ……………………………………22
3.5 Basic running wiring diagram…………………………………………25
3.6 Control loop collocation and wiring …………………………………25
3.6.1 Relative location and function for control
board terminal and slide switch ………………………………25
 3.6.2 Descriptions for control board terminal ………………………27
3.6.3 Analog input&output terminal wiring…………………………29
3.6.4 Digital input terminal wiring …………………………………30
3.6.5 Communication terminal wiring………………………………32
4 EMC（Electromagnetic compatibility）explanation ……………………34
4.1 Noise interference restraining…………………………………………34
4.1.1 Interference noise type …………………………………………34
4.1.2 Basic countermeasure for restrain interference ………………35
4.2 Field wiring and earth grounding ……………………………………36
4.3 Leak current and countermeasure ……………………………………36
4.4 Installation demand for electromagnetic on-off electronic device……37
4.5 Noise filter installation instructions …………………………………37
5 Run and operation explanation for inverter ………………………………38
5.1 Run of inverter ………………………………………………………38
5.1.1 Running order channels ………………………………………38
5.1.2 Frequency-provision channel …………………………………38
5.1.3 Work state ……………………………………………………39
5.1.4 Run mode ……………………………………………………40
5.2 Operation and use of key board ………………………………………42
5.2.1 Keypad layout …………………………………………………42
5.2.2 Keypad function description …………………………………42
5.2.3 LED and indicator light ………………………………………43
5.2.4 Key board display status ………………………………………43
5.2.5 User Management Parameters…………………………………46
5.2.6 Method for operating keypad …………………………………46
5.3 Inverter electrification ………………………………………………49
5.3.1 Check before electrification …………………………………49
5.3.2 First electrification……………………………………………49
6 Function parameter schedule graph ………………………………………50
6.1 Symbol description……………………………………………………50
6.2 Function parameter schedule graph …………………………………50
7 Detailed function specification ……………………………………………90
7.1 System Parameter Group: F00 ………………………………………90
7.2 Basic Run Function Parameter Group:F01……………………………99
7.3 Start, stop, forward/reverse,
brake function parameter group: F02…………………………………108
7.4 V/F control parameter group: F03 ……………………………………114
7.5 Auxiliary running parameter group: F04 ……………………………117
7.6 Communication control parameter group: F05 ………………………123
7.7 Setting curve parameter group: F06 …………………………………128
7.8 Analog quantity, Pulse input function parameter group: F07…………132
7.9 On-off input function parameter group: F08 …………………………135
7.10 Switch output function parameter group: F09 ………………………150
7.11 Simple PLC/Multi-speed function parameters Group:F10 …………162
7.12 Closed-Loop PID operation Parameters Group:F11…………………169
7.13 Constant pressure water supply function parameters Group: F12…………176
7.14 Traverse, Fixed-length control Function Parameters Group: F13……179
7.15 Vector Control parameters Group: F14 ………………………………183
7.16 Motor parameters Group: F15 ………………………………………188
7.17 Closed-loop encoder parameters Group: F16 ………………………191
7.18 Reserved parameters Group1:F17……………………………………195
7.19 Enhanced Control Functions Parameters Group: F18 ………………196
7.20 Protective Relevant Function Parameters Group:F19 ………………200
7.21 Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group: F20 …………211
7.22 Reserved parameter group 2:F21 ……………………………………214
7.23 Reserved parameter group 3:F22 ……………………………………214
7.24 Reserved parameter group 4:F23 ……………………………………214
7.25 Reserved parameter group 5:F24 ……………………………………214
7.26 User Definition Display Parameter Group: F25 ……………………215
7.27 Fault Record Function Parameter Group: F26 ………………………217
7.28 Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group: F27 ………219
8 Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………………220
 8.1 Failure and countermeasure …………………………………………220
8.2 Failure record lookup …………………………………………………225
8.3 Failure reset …………………………………………………………226
8.4 Alarm reset ……………………………………………………………226
9 Maintenance ………………………………………………………………227
9.1 Routine maintenance …………………………………………………227
9.2 Inspection and replacement of damageable parts ……………………227
9.3 Repair guarantee………………………………………………………228
9.4 Storage ………………………………………………………………229
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol ………………………………230
Appendix B Free-port communication protocol ……………………………244
Appendix C Keyboard ………………………………………………………256
C.1 Keyboard selection …………………………………………………256
C.2 LED double-display digital potentiometer keyboard ………………256
C.3 LCD keyboard ………………………………………………………257
C.4 LED single-display keyboard…………………………………………262
C.5 Communication Component …………………………………………263
Appendix D Communication extension card ………………………………264
D.1 Communication card selection ………………………………………264
D.2 PROFIBUS-DP communication card ………………………………264
D.3 CANopen communication card………………………………………267
D.4 CANlink communication card ………………………………………269
Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card ……………………………271
Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance ……………………………274
 1 Safety information and use notice points

1 Safety information and use notice points

To make ensure personal & equipment safety, this chapter must be read carefully
before the inverter come into use.
1.1 Safety precautions
There are three kinds of safety warnings in this manual as below:

Symbol Symbol description

It may cause human death, serious injury or heavy property loss

! with wrong operation.

It may result body or device damage with wrong and timeless

! precautions under operation.

d
Note
Should pay extra cautions when inverter in use under this
symbol

1
1 Safety information and use notice points

Forbid to cut off the power source directly when inverter under
running, acceleration or deceleration status. Power source could
! cut off when inverter completely in halt and standby status.
Otherwise user should be responsible for inverter and device
damage and human injury.

(1) Forbid to connect AC power source to output terminal U,V,W,

otherwise it could cause inverter completely damage.
(2) Not allow for short circuit between(-)and(+)，otherwise it could
cause inverter damage and power source short circuit.
(3) Forbid to install inverter on flammable objects, otherwise it
may cause fire.
(4) Do not install inverter in a environment with explosive gas, it
may cause explosion.
(5) Bare connection terminal should be insulation treatment after
main loop connection, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
! (6) Do not operate inverter with wet hands when inverter power
on, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
(7) Inverter earth terminal should be well grounding connection.
(8) Do not open the front cover for wiring when inverter power on.
Inverter wiring and check must handle after 10 minutes of
inverter power off.
(9) Wiring connection should handle by qualified person and not
allow to slip any conductive objects inside inverter, otherwise it
may cause a electric shock or inverter damage.
(10) when inverter stocked for more than 6 months, using voltage
regulator to boost voltage up and keep inverter in standy status
for 1 hour, otherwise it may cause electric shock and explosion.

(1) Forbid to connect control terminals except TA, TB, TC to AC

J
220V/380V signal, otherwise it may cause inverter completely
damage.
! (2) Do not install and run inverter when inverter damage or spare
part less, otherwise it may cause fire or human injury.
(3) inverter should install in a place where can accept itself weight,
otherwise it may cause inverter drop down or belongings damage.

2
 1 Safety information and use notice points

1.2 Application range

(1) This kind of inverter apply to 3 phase ac asynchronous motor only for general
industry.
(2) It should handle cautiously and consult with manufacturer when inverter apply
to high reliability required equipment which relevant to life, properties and safety
device.
(3) This kind of inverter is the general motor control device in industry. When
inverter apply to dangerous equipment, safeguard should be considerable in case
of inverter failure.
1.3 Use notice points
(1) EN500/EN600 series inverter belong to voltage type inverter, and it is normal
with up temperature, noise and vibration of motor increasing over power
frequency run slightly.
(2) It is required to match inverter with variable frequency motor running at low
speed with constant torque for long time. When match inverter with general
asynchronous motor running at low speed, it should take measures to make motor
heat dissipation or monitoring motor temperature in avoid of motor flash.
(3) It is necessary to take measures in advance for the damage caused for the bad
lubrication of the reduction box and wheel gear mechanical devices running at
low speed for long time.
(4) It is necessary to assure at first that the use speed range of motor bearings and
mechanical devices, also the increasing of motor vibration and noise should be
considered, when motor run over rated frequency.
(5) It is necessary to select the suitable brake assembly for hoisting device and big
inertia load to make sure the normal work when inverter stripping from power
grid for the overcurrent or overvoltage failure.
(6) Inverter start and stop control through terminal or other normal command
channel, otherwise it may cause inverter damage via connecting inverter input
terminal to big current switch just like contactor direct to start and stop inverter
frequently.
(7) It is necessary to make sure inverter cut off from operation without output,
when inverter and motor connect through switch components just like contactor
etc. Otherwise it will cause inverter damage.
(8) When inverter output frequency within some range, it may meet mechanical
resonance point of load device, through setting jump frequency to avoid it.
(9) Checking power supply voltage within allowed working range before usage,
otherwise, it need to change voltage or custom special voltage inverter.
3
1 Safety information and use notice points

(10)When inverter usage site altitude over1000 meters，inverter should derate

current to use, output current decrease about 10% of rated current per 1000 meters
increase.
(11)Motor should do insulation check before first usage or reusage after lay aside
for long time. Checking method show as graph 1-1 below with 500V voltage type
megohm meter , insulation resistance should not smaller than 5 MΩ，otherwise
inverter maybe damaged.
(12)Forbid inverter output side to assemble capacitor to improve power factor or
anti-thunder dependent resistor etc, otherwise it may cause inverter fault trip or
component damage show as graph 1-2.

TV EN500/EN600

After wiring finish, short-circuit U,V,W

to measure insulation resistance
U ::

U VW s-, .
motor EN500/EN600 V

W o
; •
M

x- '

Ground

Megohmmeter

Fig.1-1 motor insulation check Fig.1-2 capacitor at output side forbidden

1.4 Scraping handling notice:

Notices when handling with scrapped inverter and components:
(1) The unit: dispose the inverter as industrial waste.
(2) Electrolytic capacitor: It may cause explosion when electrolytic capacitor
under burning.
(3)Plastic: it may result in harmful and poisonous gas when plastic and rubber of
inverter burning, and safeguard preparations should be taken before burning.

4
 2 Inverter type and specification

2 Inverter type and specification

2.1 Incoming inverter inspect
(1) Check if there is damage during transportation and inverter itself has damage
or fall-off parts.
(2) Check if parts presented in packing list are all ready.
(3) Please confirm nameplate data of the inverter is in line with your order
requirement.
Our product is guaranteed by strict quality system during manufacturing, packing,
transportation etc., please contact our company or local agent rapidly
if some careless omission or mistake arise, we’ll deal with it as soon as
possible.
2.2 Type explanation
EN600 – 4T 0015G / 0022P B
Code Name Code accessories
EN500 Series No.
B Inbuilt brake unit
EN600 Series No.
Dedicated fan
Code Volt. grade &pump
Code
motor power
2S 1 phase 220V
(KW)
4T 3 phase 380V 0015P 1.5
Constant torque 0022P 2.2
general type
Code motor power … …
(KW)
6300P 630
0004 0.4
0007 0.75
… …
5600G 560
6300G 630 Fig.2-1 Type description
2.3 Nameplate explanation
Nameplate presented as figure 2-2 with type and rating data at the bottom of
inverter right side.
® EN600 INVERTER •« Series No.
TYPE: EN600-4T0550G/0750P Type
SOURCE: 3PH 380V 50/60Hz Rated input vol. And freq.
OUTPUT: 55/75KW 112/150A
C S.N,:
SHENZHEN ENCOM ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CoJJTD
MADE IN CHINA
.
<
.
^
Motor power and output current
Serial No.
Manufacturer and origin

Fig.2-2 Nameplate

5
2 Inverter type and specification

2.4 Inverter type explanation

Input Rated output Adaptable motor
Inverter type
Voltage Current(A) (KW)
EN600-2S0004 2.5 0.4
EN600-2S0007 4 0.75
1 phase
EN600-2S0015 7 1.5
220V
EN600-2S0022 10 2.2
EN600-2S0037 15 3.7
EN600-4T0007G/0015P 2.3/3.7 0.75/1.5
EN600-4T0015G/0022P 3.7/5 1.5/2.2
EN600-4T0022G/0037P 5/8.5 2.2/3.7
EN600-4T0037G 8.5 3.7
EN600-4T0055P 13 5.5
EN600-4T0055G/0075P 13/17 5.5/7.5
EN600-4T0075G/0110P 17/25 7.5/11
EN600-4T0110G/0150P 25/33 11/15
EN600-4T0150G/0185P 33/39 15/18.5
EN600-4T0185G/0220P 39/45 18.5/22
EN600-4T0220G/0300P 45/60 22/30
EN600-4T0300G/0370P 60/75 30/37
EN600-4T0370G/0450P 75/91 37/45
3 phase EN600-4T0450G/0550P 91/112 45/55
380V EN600-4T0550G/0750P 112/150 55/75
EN500-4T0750G/0900P 150/176 75/90
EN500-4T0900G/1100P 176/210 90/110
EN500-4T1100G/1320P 210/253 110/132
EN500-4T1320G/1600P 253/304 132/160
EN500-4T1600G/2000P 304/380 160/200
EN500-4T2000G/2200P 380/426 200/220
EN500-4T2200G/2500P 426/474 220/250
EN500-4T2500G/2800P 474/520 250/280
EN500-4T2800G/3150P 520/600 280/315
EN500-4T3150G/3550P 600/650 315/355
EN500-4T3550G/3750P 650/680 355/375
EN500-4T3750G/4000P 680/750 375/400
EN500-4T4000G/4500P 750/800 400/450

6
 2 Inverter type and specification

EN500-4T4500G/5000P 800/870 450/500

EN500-4T5000G/5600P 870/940 500/560
EN500-4T5600G/6300P 940/1100 560/630
EN500-4T6300G 1100 630

2.5 Appearance and parts name explanation

2.5.1 EN600 Appearance and parts name explanation

Upcover上面盖
plate digital tube
LED数码管 digital tube
LED数码管
/
A Upcover上面盖
plate
Operation
操作键盘 keyboard
n Operation
操作键盘 keyboard

Down cover下面盖
plate
Down cover下面盖
plate

Control cable inlet

控制电缆入口
Nameplate
变频器铭牌 Control cable
控制电缆入口
inlet Nameplate
变频器铭牌

Input & output

输入、输出电
Fan风扇孔
hole 源电缆线入口
power cable Fan通风孔
hole
inlet Input
输入、输出电& output
power
源电缆线入口cable inlet

Fig.2-3 EN600 Parts name sketch

2.5.2 EN500 Appearance and parts name explanation
Operation keyboard
Cover door

Upcover plate
as
•
<&* *&
rss
j
Operation keyboard

[ SB
H
t
. »
A * >HW
*

Input & output C

SS

power cable inlet Control cable inlet Input & output

power cable
Bottom installation inlet Control cable inlet
hole Bottom installation hole

Fig.2-4 EN500 Parts name sketch

7
2 Inverter type and specification

2.6 Outer size

O
(P
)
m

i
) i

••8
lazo «

-
» to
-

H
t. CvM

B
us
B
H

CD CDCD
CD CDCD
CD CDCD
CD CD CD
CD CD CD

m
I
I
m

e
I

o
5v
2/

T
A A
W D
W D
D1

r
Fig.a Fig.b

W
W D W1 A细节
A detail D
W1 A细节
detail Zl\
o

o
5=

'l
,t

>
-
?

IMI
C

:
•••
MB
I

H1
H
H1
H

S
'

j
u )
hill
Iff >
Hi

I i
-

W2
B细节
B detail
N1 B细节
detail N1 N2
1 M1
M
Mi
o

.
J

M1 M1
r

N2
p\

M
2
o

M2 A detail
A细节 B Bdetail
细节

A细节
A detail BBdetail
细节

Fig.c Fig.d

8
 2 Inverter type and specification

W D
& iL
• •
.
IJSS I

• •
H

• •
P l 1 1 1
W1
4 1
D1
M2

M1

Fig.e
Fig.2-5 Outer dimension
Table 2-1 EN600 mounting size
A B W H D D1 Fix Hole
Inverter type Fig. No.
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
EN600-2S0004
EN600-2S0007
104 186 115 200 151 - 5 Fig.a
EN600-2S0015
EN600-2S0022
EN600-2S0037 129 227 140 240 175 - 5 Fig.a
EN600-4T0007G/0015P
EN600-4T0015G/0022P
104 186 115 200 151 - 5 Fig.a
EN600-4T0022G/0037P
EN600-4T0037G
EN600-4T0055P
EN600-4T0055G/0075P 129 227 140 240 175 - 5 Fig.a
EN600-4T0075G/0110P
EN600-4T0110G/0150P
165 281 180 304 189 - 6 Fig.a
EN600-4T0150G/0185P
EN600-4T0185G/0220P
180 382 250 398 210 214 9 Fig.b
EN600-4T0220G/0300P
EN600-4T0300G/0370P
180 434 280 450 240 244 9 Fig.b
EN600-4T0370G/0450P

9
2 Inverter type and specification

EN600-4T0450G/0550P
190 504.5 290 530 250 254 9 Fig.b
EN600-4T0550G/0750P

Table 2-2 EN500 mounting size

H H1 W W1 W2 D D1 N1 N2 M1 M2 Fig.
Inverter type
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) No.
EN500-4T0750G/0900P
570 546 340 237 - 320 - - - Φ12 Φ18
EN500-4T0900G/1100P
EN500-4T1100G/1320P
650 628 400 297 - 340 - - - Φ12 Φ18
EN500-4T1320G/1600P Fig.c
EN500-4T1600G/2000P 980 953 480 370 - 400 - Φ38 Φ19 Φ9 Φ18
EN500-4T2000G/2200P
1030 1003 500 370 - 400 - Φ38 Φ19 Φ9 Φ18
EN500-4T2200G/2500P
EN500-4T2500G/2800P
EN500-4T2800G/3150P 1368 1322 700 500 440 430 - Φ52 Φ19 Φ12 Φ22
EN500-4T3150G/3550P
Fig.d
EN500-4T3550G/3750P
OB
EN500-4T3750G/4000P 1518 1483 700 500 500 430 - Φ19 Φ12 Φ22
77*47
EN500-4T4000G/4500P
EN500-4T4500G/5000P
1650 - 850 700 - 550 490 - - 40 Φ13
EN500-4T5000G/5600P
Fig.e
EN500-4T5600G/6300P
1700 - 900 750 - 550 490 - - 40 Φ13
EN500-4T6300G

2.7 EN500 optional base

2.7.1 EN500 inverter and base selection table
Base model
Type base with Input Base with base with DC
Standard base
reactor output reactor reactor
EN500-4T0750G/0900P SP-BS-0750-LI SP-BS-0900-LO SP-BS-0750-LD
SP-BS-0900
EN500-4T0900G/1100P SP-BS-0900-LI SP-BS-0900-LO -
EN500-4T1100G/1320P SP-BS-1100-LI SP-BS-1100-LO -
SP-BS-1320
EN500-4T1320G/1600P SP-BS-1320-LI SP-BS-1320-LO -
EN500-4T1600G/2000P SP-BS-1600 SP-BS-1600-LI SP-BS-1600-LO -
EN500-4T2000G/2200P SP-BS-2000-LI SP-BS-2000-LO -
SP-BS-2200
EN500-4T2200G/2500P SP-BS-2200-LI SP-BS-2200-LO -
EN500-4T2500G/2800P SP-BS-4000 SP-BS-2500-LI SP-BS-2500-LO -
EN500-4T2800G/3150P SP-BS-2800-LI SP-BS-2800-LO -
EN500-4T3150G/3550P SP-BS-3150-LI SP-BS-3150-LO -
EN500-4T3550G/3750P SP-BS-4000-LI SP-BS-4000-LO -

10
 2 Inverter type and specification

EN500-4T3750G/4000P SP-BS-4000-LI SP-BS-4000-LO -

EN500-4T4000G/4500P SP-BS-4000-LI SP-BS-4000-LO -

2.7.2 Base outer dimension

G2
®>

ß)
o
o
O
>

1111
Ho

Ho
W D1 W D1
i
m
f

ZI
Mil
MH
Mi

Fig.a Fig.b

Fig.2-6 base dimension

Table 2-3 base size

W D1 Ho
Base model Fig.
（mm） （mm） （mm）
SP-BS-0900 340 300 180 Fig.a
SP-BS-0750-LI
SP-BS-0750-LD
340 300 350
SP-BS-0900-LI
SP-BS-0900-LO
SP-BS-1320 400 320 180
SP-BS-1100-LI
SP-BS-1100-LO
400 320 380
SP-BS-1320-LI
SP-BS-1320-LO
SP-BS-1600 480 380 180
SP-BS-1600-LI 480 380 400

11
 2 Inverter type and specification

SP-BS-1600-LO
SP-BS-2200 500 380 200
SP-BS-2000-LI
SP-BS-2000-LO
500 380 400
SP-BS-2200-LI
SP-BS-2200-LO
SP-BS-4000 700 430 204
SP-BS-2500-LI
SP-BS-2500-LO
SP-BS-2800-LI
700 430 400
SP-BS-2800-LO Fig.b
SP-BS-3150-LI
SP-BS-3150-LO
SP-BS-4000-LI
700 430 450
SP-BS-4000-LO

2.8 Outer size of keypad and its fixing box(unit:mm)

88 17.9 82.8

67 16 64.5 A / _\
"

-v o
i i
A
o o
O
US
O
- -O
r v
O
i

Kr
O
PD
0
O
US
O
MS
0
A Hr FTC MV
[
Mil A ICV
140

134.5
109.5

107.5

® ® Co
® ® (o @ ® #
® ® ® © © #
\)
® © ® 3
1/
Fig.2-7 Mounting size of keypad Fig.2-8 Hole size of keypad

1. EN-LCD2 long-distance keypad outer lead, do not support

keypad holder installed, only keypad installed support, mounting

a
Note
size refer to Fig.2-7.
2. Except EN-LCD2 long-distance keypad, when other keypad
outer lead, user can adjust the hole size under actual situation on
keypad or keypad holder; thickness of install board between 1.0～
1.5mm is suggested.
3. When installed with keypad holder, it need to buy extra.

12
 2 Inverter type and specification

2.9 Product technic index and spec

Item Item description
1 phase 220V Grade：1 phase 220V, 50Hz/60Hz
Rating volt., frequency
Input

3 phase 380V Grade：3 phase 380V, 50Hz/60Hz

1 phase 220V Grade：200～260V
Allowed volt. range
3 phase 380V Grade：320～460V
Voltage 0～380V
Frequency 0～600Hz
Output

G type：150% of rated current for 1 minute;

Over loading capacity
P type：120% of rated current for 1 minute.
vector control, PG vector control, open-loop V/F control, torque
Control mode
control, PG torque control
±0.5% rated synchronous speed（vector control）；
Velocity control
±0.1% rated synchronous speed（PG vector control）；
precision
±1% rated synchronous speed（V/F control）；
1：2000（PG vector control）
Speed regulation range 1：100（vector control）；
1：50（V/F control）；
1.0Hz：150% rated torque（V/F control）；
Start-up torque 0.5Hz：150% rated torque (vector control)；
0Hz：180% rated torque（PG vector control）；
±0.3% rated synchronous speed（vector control）；
Speed fluctuation
±0.1% rated synchronous speed（PG vector control）；
Torque control ±10% rated torque（vector control，torque control）；
precision ±5% rated torque（PG vector control，PG torque control）.
Control Performance

≤20ms（vector control）；
Torque response
≤10ms（PG vector control）；
Digital setting：max. frequency×±0.01%；Analog setting：max.
Frequency precision
frequency×±0.5%
Analog
0.1% of max. frequency
setting
Digital
Freq.
setting 0.01Hz
resolution
precision
Exterior
0.1% of max. frequency
impulse
Torque boost Automatic torque boost；manual torque boost 0.1～12.0%
V/F curve(volt. Setting rated frequency at the range of 5～650Hz，by choosing
Frequency constant torque, degressive torque 1, degressive torque 2,
characteristic) degressive torque 3, self-defined V/F total 5 kinds of curve.
Two modes：straight line acceleration and deceleration; S curve
Acceleration acceleration and deceleration; 15 kinds of acceleration and
Deceleration curve deceleration time，time unit (0.01s, 0.1s, 1s) for option ，max. time
for 1000 minutes.

13
2 Inverter type and specification

EN600 3 phase 15KW & under power range with inbuilt brake
unit，only add brake resistor between（+）and PB.
Power
18.5KW & up power range is possible to add brake unit between
consumption
（+）and（-）outside; or extra connect brake unit with adding brake
brake brake
resistor between（+）and PB.
EN500 series can connect brake unit between（+）and（-）outside.
Start, stop action for option, action frequency 0～15Hz，action
DC brake
current 0～100% of rated current，action time 0～30.0s
Jog frequency range：0Hz～up limit frequency；jog acceleration
jog
and deceleration time 0.1～6000.0 seconds for setting.
Realized by inbuilt PLC or control terminal; with 15 section speed,
Multi-section speed
each section speed with separately acceleration and deceleration
run
time; with inbuilt PLC can achieve reserve when power down.
Inbuilt PID controller Convenient to make closed-loop control system
Automatic energy Optimize V/F curve automatically to achieve power saving run
saving run according to the load status.
Automatic voltage Automatically keep output voltage constant, when the power grid
regulate(AVR) voltage fluctuation
Automatic current Current limited automatically under run mode in avoid of inverter
limiting over-current frequently to trip.
Modulate carrier wave automatically according to the load
carrier modulation
characteristic.
Speed tracking restart Make rotating motor smoothly start without shocking

running command Keypad specified, control terminal specified, communication

specified channel specified can switch through various means.
Running function

Main & auxiliary specified to a realize one main adjusting and one
Running frequency fine control. Digital specified, analog specified, pulse specified,
specified channel pulse width specified, communication specified and others, which
can be switched by many means at any time.
Run command channel and frequency specified channel can bind
Binding function
together randomly and switch synchronously
Channel 8 for universal digital input, max. Frequency 1KHz,
Digital input channel channel 1 can be used as pulse input channel, max. Input 50KHz，
which can be expanded to channel 14 .
Input output characteristic

Channel 2 for analog input channel, AI1 can choose 4～20mA or

0～10V output，AI2 is differential input channel，4～20mA or
Analog input channel
-10～10V for option，which can be expanded to channel 4 analog
input.
0.1 ～ 20KHz pulse square signal output to achieve setting
Pulse output channel
frequency, output frequency and other physical quantity output.
Channel 2 for analog signal output, AO1 can choose 4～20mA or
0～10V，AO2 can choose 4～20mA or 0～10Vto achieve setting
Analog output channel
frequency, output frequency and other physical quantity output,
which can be expanded to channel 4 analog output.

14
 2 Inverter type and specification

Limit inverter over current to the greatest point, and make it run
Rapid current limit
more stably
Suitable for working site where need one button to control inverter
Unique function

Monopulse control start and stop, first press to start, then press to stop, and that cycle
repeats. Its very simple and reliable.
Fixed length control Realize fixed length control
Timing control Timing control function: setting time range 0.1Min ～ 6500.0Min
Five group virtual input & output IO can realize simply logical
Virtual terminal
control
The parameters as setting frequency, output frequency, output
Keypad display
keypad

voltage, output current can be displayed

Button Locked Lock all or part of the buttons
Motor power on Shot circuit test, input & output phase loss
protection, over-current protection, over voltage protection, under
Protection function voltage protection, over heat protection, overload protection, under
load protection, relay absorption protection, terminal protection
and no stop protection under power off.
Indoor, not bare to sunlight, no dust, no corrosive gas, no
Application site
flammable gas, no vapor, no water drop or salt etc.
Under 1000 meter.（above 1000 meter require to reduce volume to
Altitude use, output current reduce about 10% of rated currenvolt per 1000
Environment

meter high）
Environment -10℃～+40℃ ( environment temperature between 40℃～50℃,
temperature need to reduce volume or strengthen heat sink )
Environment humidity Smaller than 95%RH，no drop condenses
Vibration Smaller than 5.9 M/S²(0.6g)
Storage temperature -40℃～+70℃

Protection grade IP20

structure

Cooling mode Forced air cooling and natural

Installation mode Wall hanging and cabinet installation

To get a perfect usage performance of the inverter, Please check and

select right type according to this chapter before wiring.
Note

It is necessary to select right type, otherwise it may cause motor

! abnormal run or inverter damage.

15
 3 Installation and wiring

3 Installation and wiring

3.1 Installation ambient
3.1.1 The demands for installation ambient
(1) Installed in drafty indoor place，the ambient temperature should be within
-10ºC~40ºC，it needs external compulsory heat sink or reduce the volume if
temperature is over than 40ºC; when temperature under -10℃, please preheat
inverter first.
(2) Avoid installing in places with direct sunlight, much dust, floating fiber and
metal powder.
(3) Don’t install in place with corrosive, explosive gas.
(4) The humidity should be smaller than 95%RH，without condensation water.
(5) Installed in place of plane fixing vibration smaller than 5.9m/s²(0.6g).
(6) Keep away from electromagnetic disturbance source and other electronic
apparatus sensible to electromagnetic disturbance.
3.1.2 Installation direction and space
(1) Normally the inverter should be mounted vertically, horizontal mounting will
seriously affect heat dissipation and the inverter must be used in lower volume.
(2) Demand for minimum mounting space and distance，please see Fig.3-1.
(3) When installing multiple inverters up and down, leading divider must be
applied between them, see fig. 3-2.

风扇
Fan排气
exhaust 200mmabove
200mm 以上
风扇 / A A
Fan exhaust
排气 110mm above
110mm以上
A $
o o o o o o
m «1 K •m m
\
\
\
\ /
/
/
- AA-
iitlii
laaaHBi **
50mm
50mm
/ m ® co
® ® m
\
\
\
\
\ 50mm
50mm
100mm
以上 /
/
/
100mm /
# ® eo
® ® m
® e0
.
*
\ 100mm
\ 100mm
以上
以上
above a© \ 以上
\
\ above
above /
/ * above
/
A
A WARNING
\
\
\
\
\
\
/
/
/
/
A WARNING
°D* H( MBM(ACfOMrtooa«« mMaOVW
dwttb10start« rihrpovw«ff
\
\
*
A \
/ \
/
/
w 6
110mm
\
\

above
110mm以上
/
/
\
\
200mmabove
200mm 以上
"

a：15KW & down power b：18.5KW & up power

Fig.3-1 mounting space

16
 3 Installation and wiring

Cxo

1
Leading divider

Fig.3-2 mounting of multiple inverters

3.2 Parts disassembly and installation

3.2.1 Keyboard disassembly and installation
(1) Disassembly 000
Let the forefinger press finger inlet on the keypad，
depress fixing flexible plate on the top lightly, Assemble
Assemble
安装爪
hook
hook
draw it outward, then you can disassemble
the keypad.
(2) Assembly Assemble
钩口
hook mouth
First interface the fixed hook of on the bottom hook
安装爪
of keyboard with the keyboard installation claw
of inverter, then press the fixed shrapnel on the top
of keyboard to push it assemble well properly
(keyboard assemble well when sounding of crisp)，
show as Fig.3-3. Fig.3-3 Keypad assembly
3.2.2 Cover disassembly and installation /

c: o o
3.2.2.1 Cover disassembly and installation oo
r; a
(j

(1) Disassembly
Located the thumbs to the side bayonet,
the ring fingers on the joint of the up and - r
down cover, with thumbs press inside and
,

pull upside at the same time until the bayonet snap

卡扣
joint
open between cover and whole case, then pull
back cover to make it off the inverter.

Fig.3-4 metal cover disassemble and assembly

17
3 Installation and wiring

(2) Assembly
1) tilt cover at 5~10 degree；
2) interface installation claw with hook on the top of inverter, press down heavily till
cover bayonet enter into the holes of two side completely, show as Fig.3-4.
3.2.2.2 Metal cover disassembly and installation:
(1) Disassembly
First take off 2 screws at the side of the cover
and move it a bit outward horizontally, then tilt
it at 15 degree and draw it outward at the direction
shown in right figure, now you can take the cover off.
0
(2) Assembly
First put down the cover in parallel with unit body
and make it just locked at two sides of the inverter,
secondly force it ahead and make fixing part on its
top inserted into fixing slot of unit body, at last screw
the cover and finish assembly for the cover. Fig.3-5 metal cover disassemble
As shown in Fig.3-5 and assembly
3.3 Wiring notice points

r ⑴Assure power be cut off completely for above 10 minutes before

wiring, otherwise there is danger of getting electric shock.
⑵ Forbid connecting power wire to output U, V, W of the inverter.
A
⑶ If there is current leakage inside inverter, inverter and motor must be
earth grounding for safety assurance, please refer to clause 8 in Chapter
3.4.1 for grounding wiring.
⑷ Before shipment compression resistance test of the inverter is
Passed, so users should not conduct compression resistance test again.
⑸ Do not add absorbing capacitor or other resistance-capacitor
! absorbing device between inverter and motor; also do not add
electromagnetic contact. If contactor and other switch component
needed to add, please make sure inverter suspended without output,
show as Fig.3-6
⑹ To provide inverter over-current protection in output side and
convenient maintenance under power off, it should be connected to
power source through air switch and contactor.
⑺ Control signal wire should select multicore stranded wire or
shielding wire. One end of the shielding layer hang in the air, and the

v other end connect to inverter earth grounding terminal, connection wire

shorter than 20m.
y
18
 3 Installation and wiring

r⑴Before wiring, assure power supply is cut off completely for 10

minutes and all LED or LCD indicator light extinguished.
⑵ Before inverter internal wiring, confirm that DC volt. Between main
loop end P+ and P- fall down to below DC36V.
! ⑶ Wiring can only be done by professional person trained and qualified.
⑷ Before power on, check if voltage grade of the inverter is in line with
that of power supply volt., otherwise will cause personnel injured and
device damaged.
v
U0 \
<
I-,
x
inverter V M
W
4 i*

' '

Fig.3-6 Forbid to use contactor and absorbing capacitor

3.4 Main loop terminal wiring

Air switch
空气开关 contactor
breaker
（断路器） 接触器
-X 0R
EN500/ U
3三相 EN600
M
phase
V
交流
>k 0S W
AC
电源
power oT

Fig.3-7 main loop simple wiring

To keep user power grid safety, please choose proper air switch, breaker, wiring at
power input side，parameter recommended show as Table 3-1（Remark：wire
must choose PVC insulation copper conductor).

19
3 Installation and wiring

Table 3-1 parameter recommended for air switch（breaker), contactor and

wire selection
Air switch Contactor Input Output Control
Type or breaker （A） power wire motor cable signal wire
（A） mm2 mm2 mm2
EN600-2S0004 6 9 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-2S0007 10 12 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-2S0015 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-2S0022 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-2S0037 20 25 2.5 2.5 0.75
EN600-4T0007G/0015P 6 9 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-4T0015G/0022P 10 12 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-4T0022G/0037P 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-4T0037G 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-4T0055P 20 25 2.5 2.5 0.75
EN600-4T0055G/0075P 20 25 2.5 2.5 0.75
EN600-4T0075G/0110P 25 25 4.0 4.0 0.75
EN600-4T0110G/0150P 32 32 6.0 6.0 0.75
EN600-4T0150G/0185P 40 40 6.0 6.0 0.75
EN600-4T0185G/0220P 50 50 10 10 1.0
EN600-4T0220G/0300P 50 50 10 10 1.0
EN600-4T0300G/0370P 63 63 16 16 1.0
EN600-4T0370G/0450P 80 80 25 25 1.0
EN600-4T0450G/0550P 100 115 35 35 1.0
EN600-4T0550G/0750P 125 125 50 50 1.0
EN500-4T0750G/0900P 250 160 70 70 1.5
EN500-4T0900G/1100P 250 160 95 95 1.5
EN500-4T1100G/1320P 350 350 120 120 1.5
EN500-4T1320G/1600P 400 400 120 120 1.5
EN500-4T1600G/2000P 500 500 150 150 1.5
EN500-4T2000G/2200P 630 630 185 185 1.5
EN500-4T2200G/2500P 700 700 240 240 1.5
EN500-4T2500G/2800P 800 800 120*2 120*2 1.5
EN500-4T2800G/3150P 800 800 120*2 120*2 1.5
EN500-4T3150G/3550P 1000 1000 150*2 150*2 1.5
EN500-4T3550G/3750P 1000 1000 185*2 185*2 1.5
EN500-4T3750G/4000P 1250 1250 240*2 240*2 1.5
EN500-4T4000G/4500P 1250 1250 240*2 240*2 1.5
EN500-4T4500G/5000P 1250 1250 270*2 270*2 1.5
EN500-4T5000G/5600P 1600 1600 270*2 270*2 1.5
EN500-4T5600G/6300P 1600 1600 300*2 300*2 1.5
EN500-4T6300G 2000 2000 300*2 300*2 1.5

20
 3 Installation and wiring

3.4.1 Connection between inverter and fitting parts

(1) Breaking device like isolation R
S
Switch must assemble between power T
N
source and inverter to keep persona
safety under repairing and
inverter requirement for compulsory power off. 空气开关
Isolation switch
(2) There must be over-current
Protection breaker or fuse in inverter 断路器或熔断器
Breaker or fuse
power supply circuit to avoid failure
expanding because of the second device failure. Ac input reactor( In option)
交流输入电抗器(可选)
(3) AC input reactor
Contactor
接触器
When high harmonics between inverter
and power supply is strong which cannot Input EMI filter( In option)
输入EMI滤波器(可选)
meet system requirement or input side
power factor need to improve, ac input reactor
can be added. R S T
(4) Contactor is used to power supply only, EN500/EN600
(+) 制动单元(可选)
Brake unit( In option)
do not use it to control inverter start and stop. (-)
(5) Input side EMI filter 9U V W
hoosing optionally EMI filter to
restrain high frequency transduction Output EMI filter( In option)
输出EMI滤波器(可选)
interference and radio-frequency
interference from inverter power line. 交流输出电抗器(可选)
Ac output reactor( In option)
(6) Output side EMI filter
Choosing optionally EMI filter to M
restrain radio-frequency Interference
and wire leakage current from inverter Fig.3-8 connection of inverter and
output side.
fitting parts
(7) AC output reactor
Installing AC output reactor is suggested
to avoid motor insulation damage, oversize current leakage and inverter frequent
protection when connecting wire between inverter and motor exceeds 50m.
(8) Safety earth ground wire
Inverter and motor must be earth ground connection, connection wire should
select as shorter and thicker as above 3.5mm² multicore copper wire, and earth
grounding resistance smaller than10Ω.

21
 3 Installation and wiring

3.4.2 Main loop terminal wiring

（1）Main loop input output terminal show as table 3-2, 3-3.
Table 3-2 EN600 main loop input output terminal description
Terminal
Adapted type Main loop terminal Function description
name
1 phase AC input terminal,
L1、L2
connect power source
（+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN600-2S0004 ©> © © © © © © © © © External connect to brake
PB
～ resistor reverse terminal
LI L2 (+) PB U V W £W
D\
（-） DC volt. Negative terminal
EN600-2S0037 POWER - -
'a 1
V
MOTOR
3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
© Grounding terminal
3 phase AC input terminal,
R、S、T
connect power source
（+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN600-4T0007G/0015P External connect to brake
PB
～ R S T (+) PB (-) U V W resistor reverse terminal
©
EN600-4T0150G/0185P （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
© Grounding terminal
3 phase AC input terminal,
R、S、T
Terminal 1： connect power source

PPPPPPPPPPI©
R S T P (+) ( - ) U V W
P、（+）
（+）
External connect to DC reactor
DC volt. Positive terminal
External connect to brake
EN600-4T0185G/0220P PB
resistor reverse terminal
EN600-4T0220G/0300P Terminal 2： （-） DC volt. Negative terminal

pp]ippppp[©|i|
R S T (+) PB (-) U V W
（+）、（-）External connect brake unit

U、V、W
3 phase AC output terminal，
© connect to motor
©L Grounding terminal
3 phase AC input terminal,
R、S、T
Terminal 1： connect power source
P、（+） External connect to DC reactor
External connect to brake
PB
resistor reverse terminal
EN600-4T0300G/0370P R S T P (+) (-) U V W
（+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN600-4T0370G/0450P Terminal 2： （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
（+）、（-）External connect brake unit
3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
R S T PB (+) (-) U V W ©
© Grounding terminal

22
 3 Installation and wiring

3 phase AC input terminal,

Terminal 1： R、S、T
connect power source
P、（+） External connect to DC reactor
External connect to brake
PB
resistor reverse terminal
R S T P (+) (-) U V W
EN600-4T0450G/0550P （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN600-4T0550G/0750P
Terminal 2： （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
（+）、（-）External connect brake unit
3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
R S T PB (+) (-) U V W
Grounding terminal

Note：
① EN600-4T0185G/0220P～EN600-4T0550G/0750P there are two kinds
of sort order for main loop terminal, terminal 2 remove “P”，add “PB” terminal.
② EN600-4T0185G/0220P～EN600-4T0550G/0750P（terminal 1）short circuit
diagram of copper bar assembly on main loop terminal

edgefold assembly in up direction for short

circuit copper bar
短接铜排折边向上安装
Short circuit copper bar
短接铜排

edgefold
折边 in up
direction

Table 3-3 EN500 main loop input output terminal description

Terminal
Adapted type Main loop terminal Function description
name
3 phase AC input terminal,
R、S、T
connect power source
（+） DC volt. Positive terminal
（-） DC volt. Negative terminal
External connect to DC
EN500-4T0750G/0900P Ufllij Ut ) ÜIW1 fWIJWi P、（+）
reactor
R S T P （+）
（-） U V W
© （+）、（-）External connect brake unit
3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
©
Grounding terminal
3 phase AC input terminal,
R、S、T
connect power source
J Ä lfiJlÄ Q| © © ÜJ : Hl （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN500-4T0900G/1100P w( wl 11 ü{ wl ni （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
～
（+）、（-）External connect brake unit
EN500-4T1320G/1600P ©
R S T （+）（-）U V W 3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
©
Grounding terminal

23
 3 Installation and wiring

3 phase AC input terminal,

R、S、T
connect power source
（+） DC volt. Positive terminal
R S T (+) U V W
EN500-4T1600G/2000P （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
O O O I J o lo o
～
EN500-4T2200G/2500P （+）、（-）External connect brake unit
0
(-) 1$
U、V、W
3 phase AC output terminal，
connect to motor

© Grounding terminal
3 phase AC input terminal,
R、S、T
connect power source
R S T (+) U V W （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
o o o o o o o
EN500-4T2500G/2800P （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
～ （+）、（-）External connect brake unit
EN500-4T4000G/4500P
0
(-)

U、V、W
3 phase AC output terminal，
connect to motor

© Grounding terminal
3 phase AC input terminal,
R、S、T
connect power source
R S T (+) (-) © （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN500-4T4500G/5000P o o o o o o （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
～
（+）、（-）External connect brake unit
EN500-4T6300G
U V W 3 phase AC output terminal，
o o o U、V、W
connect to motor

© Grounding terminal

1. The wiring of main loop must connect right according to the

description above. Wrong wiring will cause device damage and personal
injury.
! 2. Short circuit copper bar assembly for 18.5KW and up power (terminal
1) for EN600 must be edgefold in up direction，or it will cause device
damage and personal injury in the reverse direction.

24
 3 Installation and wiring

3.5 Basic running wiring diagram

Brake resistance(External connect fitting part)

Brake unit(External connect fitting part)

P (+) PB (-) L
R (L1 220V AC) v M
AC380V
50/60Hz
S (L2 220V AC)
EN500/ EN600 w
T rh
multi-function input 1
r
' 6 X1 Y
r
—2 Ó X2
Mki
r internal optocoupler isolation input Y2
—3 0 X3 X terminal active, electric level

r
—4 0 X4 support high level and low level
Lower level valid---short circuit
Y3
Relay load

— — ——— --6-
5 6 X5
OjJ-g-j-
slice connect PW and +24V,
I o a *
external wiring show as solid line Y4/D0
6 X6 high level valid---short circuit slice
-—
s =^
o o 24V
h •

— ——— 8 0 X7 connect
7 PW and COM, external Do: Frequency meter
wiring show as dotted line COM
J - o o • 24V pulse
JUL Analog output type
? X8/DI(Used as hi-speed pulse input AO1 switch SW3 A01 'T' voltmeter
terminal DI) AO2 switch SW4
0 COM 0 10V
^ AO 'T' amperemeter
Short
circuit
slice
when external power source used,
PW remove the short circuit slice
+24V —
~
V:0 10V
A: 4 20raA
^ V
A

O
GNDQ
4 20mA

RLY1 output（F09.04）
TA Open TA-TC open
Ili
Close TB-TC close
0 +1 ovAnalog input type SW1 switch(AI1 valid) TC Com-mon
1,0 10V
0 All
Analog input type SW2 switch(AI2 valid)

4~20mA
©- 10V AI 1
:0 ì ov voltage input
PfV - °
485+ Q ^ A
Hf0000 <
-10V
— +

i AI2
GND
I _ilVA
AI2 {rV
4 20mA current input

—
-10V~+10V voltage input
lA:4 20mA current input
Must set parameter F00.20 when SW2 switch
485-
O]
Twisted-pair cable
485. communication port

Fig.3-9 basic wiring diagram

Note：When connect to external DC reactor, it need to remove the short-circuit
copper bar between P and（+）.
3.6 Control loop collocation and wiring
3.6.1 Relative location and function for control board terminal and slide
switch：
Control board terminal and slide switch location show as Fig 3-10.
The terminal CN1 and CN7 are used by the manufacturers，CN2 is extended
25
3 Installation and wiring

interface，CN5 is for keypad，The CN3,CN4 and CN6 for users can be seen in
table 3-4，The setting description and function of slide switch check table3-5.
Please read the following descriptions carefully before using inverter.

@ ( oì\
CN 7
r

CN 5

o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o o

o CNP o o

i
o.o
Ü N1
o o
o o ]o
o o O O
o oI o o
o o
°o °o l o o
o oI
o o
°o °o l o o
o oI
o o

<7
o o
ool
L° J °

©f in
>
</>

CN 6
Q
© I I
©© I'
CN 3 I
ì

o o o o o o o o o o o o -
O
o o o o o o o o o o o 3 8
+ 10 V All AI2 GND XI X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8/ D1
1485 +1485 -1 ADI | AD 2 ICDM I Y1 I Y 2 I Y 3 IY 4 / DDICDMI PV I +24 V] TA TB TC /

Fig.3-10 sketch map of CPU board

Table 3-4 function description of terminal provided for user
No. Function Description
Input and output control To use when inverter run under external terminal control ,
CN3 of external terminal refer to 3.6.2

TA-TC is normal open contact；TB-TC is normal closed

CN4 Signal output of RLY1
contact，refer to 3.6.2

26
 3 Installation and wiring

CrystalRS485communicat To use when inverter through 485 communication can

CN6
ion interface achieve cascade connection and other control, refer to 3.6.2

Table 3-5 Slide switch function description for users

No. Function Setting Default value

SW1
AI1 Analog input signal
[fj] V：F00.20 be XXX0
0～+10V voltage signal input F00.20 be 0000
selection / \ 0～+10V

\ _J
si I：F00.20 be XXX1
4～20mA current signal input
! \

!
\__ i V： F00.20 be XX0X，
AI2 Analog input signal
Z
-10V～+10V voltage signal input F00.20 be 0000
SW2 / \
selection -10V～+10V
EÌ I：F00.20 be XX1X，
4～20mA current signal input
-L
p-
AO1 Analog output signal
SW3 f! ' V：F00.21 be XX00
selection K_
0～+10V voltage signal output F00.21 be 0000
y— 0～+10V
AO2 Analog output signal
SW4
selection
EÌ I：F00.21 be XX11
4～20mA current signal output

SW5
EMI inhibition for selection
y~
j] ：earth grounding suspending
terminal
EJ ：suspending

r
(1) In the graphic of slide switch, black square means switch
slidable location.
3
Note
> (2) Only when heavy interfering exist on working site, it’s
suggested to put EMI dial switch to earth grounding location, and
© should connect to the earth.

3.6.2 Descriptions for control board terminal

⑴ CN3 and CN4 terminal layout as following
+10V All AI2 GND XI X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8/DI

CN4
CN3

-
485+ 485 A 01 A 02 COM Y 1 Y2 Y 3 Y4/DO COM PW +24V TA TB TC

27
3 Installation and wiring

⑵ CN3 and CN4 terminal function description show as Table 3-6

Table 3-6 function table for control board terminal
Type Symbol Description Terminal Function and specification
X1 Multifunction input 1
Multfunction input terminal

X2 Multifunction input 2 Input voltage range：15～30V；

X3 Multifunction input 3 Opto coupler isolation, Compatible with bipolar
X4 Multifunction input 4 input；
X5 Multifunction input 5 Input impedance：4.7KΩ
X6 Multifunction input 6 max input frequency：1KHz
X7 Multifunction input 7
Except for X1～X7 function，it can be used as
Multifunction input 8/
hi-speed pulse input.
X8/DI high-speed pulse
Input impedance：2.2KΩ
input
max input frequency：50KHz
Provide +24V power to external device（24±4V）
+24V +24V power source
Max output current：200mA
factory default connect to +24V；when use external
External power source signal to drive X terminal，it need to connect to
PW
Power source

input external power source and cut off with +24V

power terminal.
Provide +10Vpower to external device（10±0.5V）
+10V +10V power source
Max output current:50mA
Reference ground for digital signal and +24V
COM Common interface
power
Reference ground for analog signal and +10V
GND Common interface
power
Input range：DC 0V～10V/4～20mA，selected by
SW1 dial switch on control board.
AI1 Analog input 1 Input impedance：voltage input at 20KΩ； current
Analog input

input at 250Ω.
resolution：1/4000
Input range：DC-10V～10V/4～20mA，selected by
the second figure of F00.20 and SW2 dial switch
on control board.
AI2 Analog input 2
Input impedance：voltage input at 20KΩ；current
input at 250Ω.
resolution：1/2000
Voltage or current output is selected by SW3
AO1 Analog output 1
（AO1）and SW4（AO2） dial switch on control
Analog
board.
output
AO2 Analog output 2 Output voltage range：0～10V
Output current range：4～20mA
Multi- Open circuit collector
Y1
function output 1 Opto coupler isolation output ， unipolar Open
output Open circuit collector circuit collector output
Y2
terminal output 2 Max voltage output：30V
Open circuit collector Max current output：50mA
Y3
output 3

28
 3 Installation and wiring

Function code F00.22 to select terminal output

Open circuit collector mode
output 4/ When Open circuit collector output, with the same
Y4/DO
High-speed impulse spec as terminal Y.
output When High-speed impulse
output，the max frequency is 20KHz.
Normal closed
TB—TC Contact capacity：AC250V/2A（cosφ=1）
RLY1 terminal
AC250V/1A（cosφ=0.4）
output Normal open
TA—TC DC30V/1A
terminal
Communi 485+ 485 differential signal positive terminal
485 differential
cation
485- signal interface 485 differential signal negative terminal
interface
CN2 retain
Auxiliary StandardRS485
interface CN6 communication Twisted-pair cable or shield wire to connect
interface
⑶ RS485 crystal outlet CN6 layout as following

RS485 terminal CN6 layout

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2345 678 Name 485+ 485- - - - - - -

3.6.3 Analog input&output terminal wiring

(1) AI1 receive analog voltage or current signal single-ended input, switch
through SW1, wire as below：

AI1 voltage input

/ \
H SW1
+10V
EN500/ \ 7
0～+10V
+ 或4～20mA
i1 — ± AI1 EN600
0～10V
or
- Shield cable near-end earth
T\ T
GND AI1 current input
A
屏蔽线近端接地
© H \

grounding
SW1
\ V

4～20mA

Fig.3-11 AI1 terminal wiring diagram

29
3 Installation and wiring

(2) AI2 receive analog voltage or current signal single-ended input, switch through
SW2，and should match it with exact second figure of F00.20 setting, wire as
below：
AI2 voltage input
7 \

-10V～+10V
+10V
EN500/
EN600
H SW2

+aor或4～20mA
\
AI2
-10～10V

-a GND
AI2 current input
屏蔽线近端接地
Shield cable near-end 7 X
earth grounding
t \
B /
SW2

4～20mA
Fig.3-12 AI2 terminal wiring diagram

(3) AO1,AO2 terminal can connect to external analog meter, which can indicate
several physical quantity，it can select analog voltage or current signal output，and
switch through SW3 and SW4，wire as below：

AO1,AO2 voltage output

V X
模拟表
Analog meter

AO1iwft AT\
\
B
L
SW3,SW4

模拟表
Analog meter

EN600
EN500/EN600 AO2 A ¥ft AT\ 0～10V
AO1,AO2 current output
7 X
GND%i ¥

\
B L
SW3,SW4

4～20mA

Fig.3-13 AO1,AO2 terminal wiring diagram

(1) Under analog input mode, filter capacitor or common mode

choke can be installed between AI1 and GND or AI2 and GND.
(2) Analog input and output signal can be interfered easily by
Note ambient environment, it need use shield cable for connection and
earth grounding well as short as possible.

3.6.4 Digital input terminal wiring

⑴ To use inverter inbuilt +24V power supply, and NPN source type external
controller connection mode.

30
 3 Installation and wiring

COM
EN500/EN600
+24V
External controller I >
PW

外 Signal wire
信号线 X1
部
控 R
制
器 COM

Fig.3-14 inbuilt 24V source type connection mode

⑵ To use inverter inbuilt +24V power supply, and PNP drain type external
controller connection mode.

+24V

COM EN500/EN600
External controller

PW
外
部 VCC
控
制 X1
器 COM R

Fig.3-15 inbuilt 24V drain type connection mode

⑶ To use external DC 15～30V power supply，and NPN source type external
controller connection mode.（remove the short circuit slice between PW and
+24V）.

o COM
EN500/EN600
+24V
PW

+
External controller

-
外 Signal wire
信号线 X1
部
控 R
制
器 COM

Fig.3-16 external power supply source type connection mode

31
3 Installation and wiring

⑷ To use external DC 15～30V power supply，and PNP drain type external

controller connection mode.（remove the short circuit slice between PW and
+24V)

+24V

COM EN500/EN600
PW
External controller

外 I- ' —
VCC i
—T +
"

部
控 —
/
制 \ 1k
X1
1
1 1
1
器 COM R

Fig.3-17 External power supply drain type connection mode

3.6.5 Communication terminal wiring

EN500/EN600 inverter provide RS485 serial communication interface to user.
The following wire connection can make up of single-main single-sub control
system or single-main multi-sub control system. To use host computer softwar（PC
or PLC controller）can realize real time monitoring and operation to inverter，and
to achieve complicated run control like long-distance control, high degree
automation. It can also use a host inverter and the other slave inverter to make up
of the cascade or synchronous control inverter network.
⑴ Inverter RS485 interface and other device with RS485 interface wire connection
show as following

\
EN500/ A(485+) A(485+) Device with
RS485
EN600 B(485-) B(485-) or
RS485
= EN500/EN600

Fig.3-18 Communication terminal wiring

32
 3 Installation and wiring

⑵ Inverter RS485 interface and host computer (device with RS232 interface)
connection：

RS232/RS485 transverter Host computer

EN500/EN600 inverter name description Shield cable signal Pin No.

description name +5V •— è

( ) shell
B
Signal negative B TXD RXD 2

Signal positive A RXD TXD 3

A
GND GND 5
DTR 4
DSR 6
RI 9
CD 1
RTS 7
CTS 8

Fig.3-19 RS485 communication wiring

33
 4 EMC（Electromagnetic Compatibility）Explanation

4 EMC（Electromagnetic compatibility）explanation
Because of inverter working principal resulting in electromagnetic noise, and to
avoid or reduce inverter interference to ambient environment, this chapter
introduce installation means to restrain interference from aspect of interference
restrain, field wiring, system earth grounding, leakage current and power filter
usage. Inverter will have good electromagnetic compatibility under general
industrial environment, when user install the inverter according to this chapter.
4.1 Noise interference restraining
Inverter interference generating for run may have effect to nearby electronic
device and the effect depend on the inverter installation surrounding
electromagnetic environment and the restrain interference ability of the device.
4.1.1 Interference noise type
Becuase of inverter working principle, there are mainly 3 kinds of noise
interference source:：
⑴ circuit conduction interference；
⑵ space emission interference；
⑶ electromagnetic induction interference；

Interference Type

Circuit conduction Space emission Electromagnetic

interference interference induction interference

Leak current Power wire high Input wire

输入线 Inverter
变频器功率 power Output
输出线 wire
漏电流接 电源线高次
earth grounding harmonic current induction
感应 component
部件感应 induction
感应
地线回路 谐波电流传 induction
wire loop conduction
干扰
interference 导干扰
interference route
路径⑥ route
路径⑦ route
路径⑧
route
路径① route
路径②
Inverter main circuit
变频器的主回路 Motor
电机线 wire Power
电源线 wire
switch and switch U,V,W radio R,S,T
R、S、Tradio
开关与开关电源 U、V、W
power radio inteference interference
的射频干扰
interference 的射频干扰 的射频干扰

route
路径③ 路径④
route route
路径⑤

Fig.4-1 interference noise type

34
 4 EMC（Electromagnetic Compatibility）Explanation

4.1.2 Basic countermeasure for restrain interference

Table 4-1 interference restrain countermeasure
Noise
spread Countermeasure of weakening effect
road
Earth grounding cable of peripheral device and inverter wiring make
up of the closed-loop and leakage current of inverter earth grounding
①
cable will make device perform wrong action. It will decrease wrong
action when device not connect to earth grounding.
When the power of peripheral device and inverter power belong to the
same power source, high harmonic gererating from inverter will
transmit the voltage and current along with the power line which will
interfere other devices within the same power source system. Take
② some restraining measures as below：install electromagnetic noise
filter at inverter input end; use isolation transformer to isolate other
devices; connect power end of peripheral device to remote power
grid；add power ferrite filter magnetic ring to inverter R、S、T three
phase wire to restrain high harmonic current conduction
Keep other sensitive devices and signal wire installed away from
inverterr. it should use shield wire and make the shield layer single
end earth grounding. Besides keep distance from inverter and its
input & output wire as possible as. When signal wire need to
intersect with strong current cable, it should make them orthogonal
crossing not parallel.
Install high frequency noise filter (ferrite common code choke,
also called magnetic ring) at the bottom end of the inverter input &
③④⑤
output to restrain radio frequency interference of dynamic wire
effectively.
Motor cable should be placed in protective object with large
thickness, such as placed in larger thickness(over 2mm) pipeline or
buried in cemented tank. Putting dynamic wire in metal tube and
connect to earth grounding with shield wire (motor cable use 4-core
cable, one side is earthed through the inverter, the other side
connected to motor casing).
To prevent wire parallel or bundled of strong and weak current, it
should keep away from inverter assemble device, and wiring should
away from inverter R,S,T,U,V,W equipower line. Devices with
⑥⑥⑥
highfield and high magnetic field should notice the corresponding
installation position of inverter and keep distance and orthogonal
crossing.

35
4 EMC（Electromagnetic Compatibility）Explanation

4.2 Field wiring and earth grounding

⑴ inverter terminal motor connection wire （U,V,W terminal output wire）and
inverter terminal power connection wire（R,S,T terminal input wire）should keep
distance enough as possible as can.
⑵ U,V,W terminal 3 motor wires should be placed in metal tube or metal wiring
tank as possible as.
⑶ Generally control signal wire should use shield cable, when shield layer
connect to inverter@ terminal, it should be the single end earth grounding which
closed to inverter side.
⑷ Inverter 0 terminal earth grounding cable must directly connect to floor, it cannot
connect to earth grounding through other device, and the location of earth grounding
should close to inverter as possible as.
⑸ strong current cable(R,S,T,U,V,W) cannot parallel wiring closely with control
signal wire, and bundled together is prohibited. It should keep distance from over
20～60 cm（relative to strong current size). When it’s necessary to intersect, it
should be orthogonal crossing, show as Fig.4-2.

电源线或电动机线
Power wire or motor cable

控制信号线
Control signal wire

Fig.4-2 system wiring demand

⑹earth grounding wire for strong current should separately connect to earth
grounding with control signal and sensor earth grounding wire for weak current.
⑺ Forbid to connect inverter input terminal(R,S,T) to other devices.

4.3 Leak current and countermeasure

The leak current flows through inverter input and output terminal for wire
capacitance and motor capacitance, and its size decided by the distributed
capacitance and carrier frequency. There are two kinds of leak current: leak
current to earth and wire-to-wire. Restraining methods as below:
⑴ diminish the cable length between inverter and motor.
⑵ install ferrite magnetic ring or output reactor at the inverter output terminal.

36
 4 EMC（Electromagnetic Compatibility）Explanation

When reactor installed with rated voltage drop more 5% and long
wiring to U, V, W terminal ， it would reduce motor’s voltage
! apparently. When motor run at full load, it is possible to flash
motor, and it should be used by derating or boosting input and
output voltage.

⑶ as carrier frequency low, the motor noise would increase accordingly.

4.4 Installation demand for electromagnetic on-off electronic device
It should pay attention that surge absorber must be installed when electromagnetic
on-off electronic device like relay, electromagnetic contactor and electromagnetic
iron generating noise easily and largely installed near to inverter or in the same
control cabinet, show as Fig. 4-3.
diode
二极管

o+
24VDC _
压敏电阻器
o
varistor
Inverter or /
other devices
变频器或其
它电气设备
-o～
-s-
220VAC
-o～
filter
RC-滤波器

-o～
220VAC
o～
-

Fig.4-3 install demand for electromagnetic on-off device

4.5 Noise filter installation instructions
⑴ To use strictly as per the rated value；filter metal casing grounding must
connect reliably to assemble cabinet metal grounding in large scale and it required
good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it may cause electric shock and influence
the EMC effect seriously.
⑵ Filter grounding terminal and inverter © terminal must connect to the same
common earth grounding, otherwise it will influence the EMC effect seriously.
⑶ Filter installed as close as possible to inverter power input terminal.

37
5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

5.1 Run of inverter
5.1.1 Running order channels
There are 3 kinds of order channel for controlling run action of the inverter such as
run, stop, jog etc.
0：keypad
Control by key ( WN) , g) , (§) on keypad (factory default).
(
1：Control terminal
Use control terminal FWD,REV,COM to make of double-line control， or use
one terminal of X1～X8 and FWD or REV to make of three-line control.
2：Communication port
Control run and stop of the inverter through upper machine or other device which
can communicate with the inverter.
Choose order channel by setting function code F01.15；and also can choose by
multi-function input terminal (F08.18~F08.25 choose function 49,50,51,52,53).
Also can reach switch the command channel through multi-function key
(Only parts of optional keyboards are equipped with multi-functional key).
Please make switching debugging in advance when switch the order
! channel to check if it can fulfill system requirement， otherwise have
danger of damaging device and injuring personal.

5.1.2 Frequency-provision channel

EN500/EN600 includes main frequency provision and assist frequency provision：
Main frequency provision：
0: keypad analog potentiometer provision；
1: AI1 analog setting；
2: AI2 analog setting；
3: terminal UP/DOWN adjustment provision；
4: communication provision(Modbus and external bus share a main frequency
memory);
5: EAI1 analog setting(extend effective)；
6: EAI2 analog setting(extend effective)；
7: high speed pulse provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding function)；
8: terminal pulse width provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding
function)；
9: terminal encoder provision(X1,X2 terminal connect to the encoder orthogonal
input)
38
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

10～14：Reserved

Assist frequency provision：

0: keypad analog potentiometer provision；
1: AI1 analog setting；
2: AI2 analog setting；
3: terminal UP/DOWN adjustment provision；
4: communication provision(Modbus and external bus share a main frequency
memory);
5: EAI1 analog setting(extend effective)；
6: EAI2 analog setting(extend effective)；
7: high speed pulse provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding function)；
8: terminal pulse width provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding
function)；
9: terminal encoder provision(X1,X2 terminal connect to the encoder orthogonal
input)
10～20：Reserved

5.1.3 Work state

Work state of EN500/EN600 includes of Waiting state, Running state and
Parameter setting state.
Waiting state :
If there is no running command after the inverter electrified or after stop command
during running state, the inverter enters into waiting state.

Running state:
The inverter enters into running state after receiving run command.
Parameter setting state:
After receiving the parameter identification command, enter the parameter setting
state, after turning into the shutdown state.

39
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

5.1.4 Run mode

EN500/EN600 inverter have 6 kinds of run mode, following is in turn according
to their priority, jog run →closed-loop run →PLC run →multi-section speed run→
swing frequency run →common run. Shown as Fig.5-1.

Electrification

Waiting
state

li Y
High priority Any jog command？ > Jog run >
li
N
N
Run command effective？

Y
t
Y
Closed-loop effective？
I
Closed-loop invalidation N
N * Y - terminal closed？
Closed-loop
run
}
’ Y
PLC effective？
i N
Y PLC invalidation
N <- terminal closed？ PLC run

< >
Multi-section terminal effective?

N
Y
- Multi-section
run

V
low priority
< Traverse run?

N i
> Y

Y
Traverse
run
->

Common
Common run? -> run
N

Fig.5-1 Run mode

0：Jog run
Upon receiving jog run command (for instance, press the ( ) key on keypad) ¥
during waiting state, the inverter run at jog frequency (see function code
F01.25~F01.29).
1：Closed-loop run
The inverter will come into closed-loop run mode when closed –loop run control
40
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

effective parameter is set(F11.00=1or F12.00≥1). Namely carry on PID adjustment

to specified value and feedback value(proportion integral differential calculation,
see F11 group function code) and PID adjuster output is inverter output frequency.
Can make closed-loop run mode ineffective and switch to lower level run mode by
multi-function terminal (function 31).
2：PLC run
The inverter will enter into PLC run mode and run according to run mode preset(see
F10 group function code description) through setting PLC function effective
parameter(F10.00 last bit≠0). Can make PLC run mode ineffective and switch to
lower level run mode by multi-function terminal (function 36).
3：multi-section speed run
By nonzero combination of multi-function terminal(5,6,7,8,function)，choose
multi-section frequency 1~15(F10.31~F10.45) to run at multi-section speed.
4：swing frequency run
The inverter will enter into swing frequency run mode when swing frequency
function effective parameter(F13.00=1)is set. Set relevant swing frequency run
special parameter according to textile swing frequency craft to realize swing
frequency run.
5：common run
Common open loop run mode of general inverter.
In above 6 kinds of run mode except “jog run” the inverter can run according to
kinds of frequency setting method.

41
5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

5.2 Operation and use of key board

5.2.1 Keypad layout
The operating keyboard is the main unit of frequency inverter to accept commands,
display parameters. Keyboard outline diagram shown in Figure 5-2.

显示电压指示单位（V）
Voltage indicator light
显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light 显示频率指示单位（Hz）
Frequency indicator light
变频器故障报警指示灯
Failure alarm indicator light 变频器正转指示灯
Forward run indicator light
- -
I V I
模式指示灯
Mode indicator light o o -o o- O a 变频器反转指示灯
Reverse run indicator light
MOO ALM A Hz FWD REV

o
_ OO ._. . .
_/ o/”/
_u /O
/ (/ / !

Increase
递增键 key
编程/退出键
Exit/Program key ESC
MENU A 数字电位器
Digital potentiometer

移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision key » (V NTER
DATA 确认/数据键
Confirm/Data key
递减键
Decrease key
Reverse/Jog
反转/点动键 key REV
JOG
STOP
RESET 停止/复位键
Stop/Reset key
正转运行键
Forward run key

Fig.5-2 keypad layout sketch

5.2.2 Keypad function description
There are 9 key-presses on inverter keypad， and function definition of each key is
as shown in table 5-1.
Table 5-1 keypad function table
Key Name Function description
Program/Exit
(§) key
Enter into or exit programming state

Shift/Supervisi Can choose modification digit of set data under editor state；
@ on key can switch display status supervision parameter under other state
/ BTRA\ Function/Data
\ DATAy' Enter into or exit programming state
key
Under keypad mode: to press this key can set reverse run or Jog run
IS) Rev/Jog key
according to the 1st bit of parameter F00.15

( RUN) Run key Enter into forward run under keypad mode

42
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

In common run status the inverter will be stopped according to set mode
© \
VRESEiy
TOP
Stop/reset key
after pressing this key if run command channel is set as keypad stop
effective mode. The inverter will be reset and resume normal stop status
after pressing this key when the inverter is in malfunction status.
Digital It is the same as the function of increase and decrease key，rotate to the
(0 potentiometer left means decrease，rotate to the right means increase.
Increasing To increase data or function code (to press it continuously can
@ button improve increasing speed)

Decreasing To decrease data or function code (to press it continuously can

© button improve decreasing speed)

5.2.3 LED and indicator light

4 status indicator light: they are MOD(mode):ALM(alarm):FWD(forward run):
REV(reverse run)from left to right on the LED: their respective indicating meaning
is as shown in table 5-2.
Table 5-2 status indicator light description
Item Function description

Digital display Display current run status parameter and set parameter
Unit for relevant current digital displayed physical parameter(for
A, Hz, V
current is A:for voltage is V:for frequency is Hz)
This indicator light is lit in non-supervision status and extinguished
MOD
if no key pressed for a minute: then come back to supervision status
Display function

Status indicator light

Alarm indicator light: indicate that the inverter is in over current or over
ALM
voltage suppressing status or failure alarm status currently
Forward run indicator light, indicate
that the inverter output forward phase
FWD
order and the connected motor rotate in The inverter work in DC
forward direction brake status if FWD,REV
Reverse run indicator light: indicate that indicator light is lit at the
the inverter output reverse phase order same time
REV
and the connected motor rotate in
reverse direction

5.2.4 Key board display status

EN500/EN600 keypad display status is classified as Waiting status parameter display;
Function code parameter editing status display; Malfunction alarm status display; Run
status parameter display; Alarm state display in total 5 kinds of status. LED indicator
light will all be lit after the inverter electrified. Then enter into set frequency display. As
shown in Fig.5-3 a

43
5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

(1) Waiting parameter display status

The inverter is in waiting status and waiting status supervision parameter is
displayed on keyboard: normally parameter F00.13 decide which status supervision
parameter to be displayed. As shown in Fig.5-3 b， the indicator light shows the unit of
the parameter. ©
To press key, it can display different waiting status supervision parameter
circularly: for detail please see C-00 to C-05 group supervision parameter details
decide by F00.07~F00.12.
(2) Run parameter display status
The inverter enters into run status when receiving effective run command and
normally parameter F00.13 decide which status supervision parameter to be displayed
on the keypad. As shown in Fig.5-3 c， the indicator light shows the unit of the
parameter. ©
To press key can display run status supervision parameter circularly. For
detail please see C-00 To C-05 group supervision parameter details decide by
F00.01～F00.06 .

•- -*
A
O O
•«- -
A I
O O o O O
•* •— — *
O
1 A
O
mv aon v ZH am ASM mv aon V ZH am A3H ra ira v *H U Q A3H

OU U U u / / / / u ul7 5
/ /
_
•owcro n r/V/ __
Set frequency Output frequency
O) ® © O) ® Ä O) ® É
® © @ ® (A) g
) ( ® (A) m
g © (§) ) ( @ @ (§) (§) © @

Fig.a Electrification， Fig.b waiting status, display Fig.c run status: display run
display 8.8.8.8.8. waiting status parameter status parameter

Fig.5-3 inverter electrification: waiting: run status display

(3) Failure alarm display status
The inverter enters into failure alarm display O
• O O O O
mv aaw a«y
status upon detecting failure signal and display
v ZH A3H

failure code sparklingly(as shown in Fig.5-4);

© -
i i
To press key can look over relative n _ zi/
_ I
/
parameter after stopping running；
over current in accelerating
Can press key to enter into program status
/" nN3w \

to see about F26 group parameter if want to search Fig.5-4

44
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

failure information.
Can carry on failure restoration by key: control terminal or
/ j3S3« \

communication command on the keypad after troubleshooting. Keep displaying

failure code if failure exist continuously.

!
For some serious failure, such as The earthing short circuit, Inverter
modules protect, over current, over voltage etc., must not carry on
failure reset forcibly to make the inverter run again without failure
elimination confirmed. Otherwise have danger of damaging the
(
inverter！

(4) Function code editing status

Under waiting, run or failure alarm status, press key, can enter into editing
status(If user password is set, can enter into editing status after inputting the
password, see also F27.00 description and Fig.5-10)，and editing status is
displayed according to three classes menu mode, as shown in Fig. 5-5. To press
\aaiN3 /
key can enter into one class by one class. Under function parameter display
/ vivoN

status, to press key to carry on parameter storage operation; To press

key can only come back to upper class menu without storing modified parameter.

ESC/MENU First class menu ENTER/DATA Second-class menu

t t
*l- A-0l • --
l A l • --
l A l
electrificati

0 0 0 O O O O O o o o o o
v rrw aon ZH atu mv con v ZH a au M «
Hl V ZH (HU Gd

ijlju u u u uO
n nrv n n bWtftf
Output freq.switch display Para. group Display control

ESC/MENU
ESC/MENU
Waiting status parameter Display
or run status parameter display
or failure alarm display
Fig.5-5 keypad display status switching
(5) Alarm state display
When under running and standby situation: AJ
9
It means enter failure alarm display status upon um » •

detecting failure signal and display failure

code sparklingly (Fig5-6）Inverter keeping
OO - U U
/ C LI "

running state But this alarm display can not

be reset button eliminated: After only find Same main/assist frequency channel

the cause of the alarm: in order to eliminate

Fig.5-6
45
5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

this factor Normal.

5.2.5 User Management Parameters
In order to facilitate the user parameter management: EN500/EN600 component
model parameter menu for display management. The parameters do not need to be
displayed can be shielded.
⑴ Method parameter setting mode display.
By setting F00.00 = 0,1,2,3 respectively parameter mode is set: Basic menu mode:
menu mode Intermediate: Advanced menu mode and user menu mode.

Basic menu F00,F01,F02,F03,F26

F00,F01,F02,F03,F04,F05,F06,F07,F08,F09,F10,F11,F12,F13,F14,
Middle menu
F15,F16,F18,F19,F26
Advance F00,F01,F02,F03,F04,F05,F06,F07,F08,F09,F10,F11,F12,F13,F14,
menu F15,F16,F17,F18,F19,F20,F21,F22,F23,F24,F25,F26,F27
User custom F00.00 and F25 parameters group

5.2.6 Method for operating keypad

Can carry on various operation to the inverter through keypad， for example:
(1) Status parameter display switching：
After pressing key ，display C group status supervision parameter; after
displaying one supervision parameter code for 1 second will display this parameter
value automatically. Press key /\ ENTERN
D A T A / will go back to supervision interface.

1s 1s
LED displayed content 0.00 C-01 Para. C-02 > Para.

Key-press operation - -

order
1s 1s
C-00 Para. 4- C-05 Para. 4- C-03

t 4 ∫…∫M-

Fig.5-7 waiting status parameter display operating example

46
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

(2) Function code parameter setting

Take function code F01.01 modified from 5.00Hz to 6.00Hz as example.
Boldface in Fig.5-8 shows flickering digit.
LED displayed
content
0.00 F00.00 F01.00 F01.00 F01.01
Key-press
peration order » -
MENU ( » … Move to the A )
Choose
ENTER
DATA
Enter into Choose
editing Status F01 group position to function
Exit editing
display first-class function code be adjusted code F01.01
status
menu

\ MENUJ
\
F01.02 006.00 005.00 005.00

ENTER
4 …
Store modified DATA
Parameter Parameter Function code
value: back to modification, modification, confirmation,
first -class menu Choose Enter into
5→6
Display next parameter digit second-class
function code
Fig.5-8 example for parameter setting and modification
Description: under second -class menu: if the parameter has no blinking digit, this
function code can’t be modified, possible reasons are as follows:
1> This function code shouldn’t be modified: for example actual detected status
parameter: run record parameter etc.;
2> This function code can’t be modified under run status and can be changed
after stopping running;
3> Parameter protected. All the function code can’t be modified when function
code F00.14=1 or 2，in order to avoid wrong operation. Need to set the
function code F00.14 to 0 if you want to edit function code parameter.
(3) Specified frequency adjustment for common run
Take example modifying specified frequency from 50.00Hz to 40.00Hz at
F01.06=1，F01.03=0 during running for explanation.

LED displayed content 50.00 49.99 45.00 40.00

Key-press » … -
operation order Stop pressing after set
Press decreasing Adjust frequency value reached: go back
button for one based on to normal display status
time requirement after 1s
Fig.5-9 set frequency adjustment operation example
(4) Jog run operation
For example: keypad as current run command channel: jog run frequency 5Hz:
waiting status.

47
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

LED displayed
0.00 0.01 5.00 0.01 0.00
content
Press Release
Key-press Waiting Keep
REV / REV \ REV
operation order
> JOG
- … \ J O Gi / ‘ -
JOG
- Waiting
Display Display run Output frequency
Output frequency
set frequency output frequency Fall down to 0Hz
Increased by 5Hz
Stop running

Fig.5-10 Jog run operating example

(5) Operation for entering to function code editing status after setting user
password
For example :“User password” F27 is set to“12345”. Boldfaced digit in Fig.5-11
shows blinking bit.
LED displayed
content 0.00 00000 10000 10000 12000
Key-press £
»
operation order None-editing Move cursor Increase
User password At first last
position to to“2”
status effective: go into Digit flash,
forth digit
password validation Increase to“1”
status

12340 12340 12300 12300 12000

Move to
«
Increase Move to Increase
the unit Move to third
to“4” second digit to“3”

12345
ENTER
DATA * F27.00
Increase to“5” Press confirmation
Key: pass validation,
Go into editing status

Fig.5-11 Inputting password to go into function code operation

(6) See about failure parameter under failure status：
If press key under failure status the user can quickly locate to the F26 group
function code parameter. Press can quickly switch value between F26.04 ~
F26.10 parameters and fault alarm, easy to view the fault records.
(7) Keypad key-press locking operation
Under monitoring situation, To press ENTER DATA for 2s,the keyboard will display
‘LOCH1’，now the buttons on the keyboard are under locked. The detailed locked
situation is decided by the value of hundred unit of F00.14.
(8) Keypad key-press unlocking operation
j£ )
Under keypad-locked situation, press (\ MENUy key for more than 2s to unlock the

48
 5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

keypad.
5.3 Inverter electrification
5.3.1 Check before electrification
Please carry on wiring based on operation requirement provided in “inverter
wiring” of this Service manual.
5.3.2 First electrification
Close input side AC power supply switch after correct wiring and power supply
confirmed: electrify the inverter and keypad LED display “8.8.8.8.8”,
contactor closed normally: LED displayed set frequency shows that electrification
is finished. First electrification operation process is shown as Fig.5-12：
Start

Wiring based on 3.5 section

N
Wiring correct?

N
Input voltage correct?

Y
Electrify

Y
N
Display 8.8.8.8.8.？

Y
N
Hear contactor closed sound？

Y
N
Display 0.00Hz？

Y
Failure
Success

Cut off power

check reason

Fig.5-12 first electrification operation flow

49
6 Function parameter schedule graph

6 Function parameter schedule graph

6.1 Symbol description
× ---- parameter can’t be changed in process of running
○ ---- parameter can be changed in process of running
* ---- read-only parameter, unmodifiable
6.2 Function parameter schedule graph
F00－System Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi

Name Set range
code unit Default -cation
F00.00 Parameter group 0: Basic list mode(only displayF00~F03 basic control 1 0 ○
display control parameter group and F26 fault record parameter
group.)
1: Middle list mode. Display all parameter except for
extension: virtual and reserve parameter group.
2: Senior list mode. All parameter display.
3: User list mode. Display parameter defined by user:
and monitor parameter: F00.00 display all the time.
F00.01 C-00 display 0: main setup frequency（0.01Hz） 1 51 ○
parameter selection 1: auxiliary setup frequency（0.01Hz）
when operation 2: setup frequency（0.01Hz）
3: output frequency（0.01Hz）
4: output current(0.1A)
5: output voltage(1V)
6: DC busbar voltage(0.1V)
7: motor speed(1 circle/min)
8: motor line velocity(1 circle/min)
9: inverter temperature(1℃)
10: run time already this time(0.1min)
11: current accumulate run time(1h)
12: current accumulate power-on time(1h)
13: inverter status
14: input terminal status
15: output terminal status
16: extension output terminal status
17: extension input terminal status
18: communication virtual input terminal status
19: internal virtual input node status
20: analog input AI1(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
21: analog input AI2(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
22: extension analog input EAI1(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
23: extension analog input EAI2(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
24: analog AO1 output(after checkout)
(0.01V /0.01mA)
25: analog AO2 output(after checkout)
(0.01V /0.01mA)
26: extension analog EAO1 output
(0.01V /0.01mA)

50
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

27: extension analog EAO2 output(0.01V /0.01mA)

28: external pulse input frequency(before checkout)
(1Hz)
29: Reserved
30: process PID provide(0.01V)
31: process PID feedback(0.01V)
32: process PID deviation（0.01V）
33: process PID output（0.01Hz）
34: simple PLC current segment No.
35: external multi-speed current segment No.
36: constant pressure water supply provide pressure
(0.001Mpa)
37: constant pressure water supply feedback pressure
(0.001Mpa)
38: constant pressure water supply relay status
39: current length(1M)
40: accumulate length(1M)
41: current internal count value
42: current internal time value(0.1s)
43: run command setup channel(0：keyboard
1: terminal 2: communication)
44: main frequency provide channel
45: auxiliary frequency provide channel
46: rated current(0.1A)
47: rated voltage(1V)
48: rated power(0.1KW)
49: Reserved
50: Reserved
51: frequency after Acce/Dece(0.01Hz)
52: motor rotor frequency(0.01Hz)
53: current given torque（percentage relative to rated
torque, with direction）
54: current output torque(percentage relative to rated
torque, with direction)
55: torque current at present(0.1A)
56: flux current at present(0.1A)
57: Setting motor rotate speed（r/min）
58: Output power（active power）（0.1KW）
59～65: Reserved
F00.02 C-01 display Same as above 1 2 ○
parameter selection
when operation
F00.03 C-02 display Same as above 1 4 ○
parameter selection
when operation
F00.04 C-03 display Same as above 1 5 ○
parameter selection
when operation
F00.05 C-04 display Same as above 1 6 ○
parameter selection
when operation
F00.06 C-05 display Same as above 1 9 ○
parameter selection
when operation
F00.07 C-00 display Same as above 1 2 ○
parameter selection
when stop

51
6 Function parameter schedule graph

F00.08 C-01 display Same as above 1 6 ○

parameter selection
when stop
F00.09 C-02 display Same as above 1 48 ○
parameter selection
when stop
F00.10 C-03 display Same as above 1 14 ○
parameter selection
when stop
F00.11 C-04 display Same as above 1 20 ○
parameter selection
when
stop
F00.12 C-05 display Same as above 1 9 ○
parameter selection
when stop
F00.13 Power-on fault 0～5 1 0 ○
monitor parameter
selection
F00.14 Parameter Units digit: Parameter modification operations 1 000 ×
operation control 0: All parameters are allowed to be modified
1: Except current parameter, all other parameters are
not allowed to modify the
2: ExceptF01.01,F01.04and current parameter， all
other parameters are not allowed to be modified
Tens digit: Reset to factory defaults
0: No action.
1: All parameters return to default.(not include fault
record parameter group(F26 group) parameter).
2: Except for motor parameter: all parameters return
to default.(not include F15 and F26 group parameter).
3: Extension parameter return to default.(only
F21~F24 group parameter return to default).
4: Virtual parameter return to default.(only F20 group
parameter return to default).
5: Fault record return to default.(only fault record
parameter group(F26 group)parameter return to
default)
Hundreds digit: Key operation
0: All locked
1: Except(
2: Except
® .
button: the others locked
， button: the others locked
3: Except ( g)，(g)button: the others locked
4: Except(§)， button: the others locked

52
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

@
F00.15 Button function Units digit: panel button selection 1 0001 ○
selection
0: Reversal command action button
1: Jog action button

(?)
Tens digit: multi-function button function
selection
0: Invalid.
1: Jog run.
2: For/rev switching.
3: Free stop.
4: Switching to run command provide mode as the
setup order of F00.16.
5: Forward/Reverse Torque Switching
6～9: Reserved
Hundreds digit: terminal run command control
0: Keyboard ®i> button invalid
1: Keyboard button valid
Thousands digit: communication run command control
(§X§)

0: Keyboard button invalid

1: Keyboard button valid

F00.16 Multi-function key 0: Keyboard control→ terminal control→ 1 0 ○

run command communication control
channel switching 1: Keyboard control←→terminal control
order selection 2: Keyboard control←→communication control
3: Terminal control←→communication control
F00.17 Motor speed 0.1～999.9% 0.1% 100.0% ○
display coefficient
F00.18 Line velocity 0.1～999.9% 0.1% 1.0% ○
display coefficient
F00.19 Extended Port Parts 0: Invalid 1 0 ×
set 1: Reserved
2: Multi pump water supply card
3: Incremental PG encoder
4～10: Reserved
F00.20 Analog input Units digit:AI1 configuration 1 0000 ×
terminal 0: 0~10V input
configuration 1: 4~20mA input
Tens digit: AI2 configuration
0: -10~10V input
1: 4~20mA input
Hundreds digit: EAI1 configuration
0: 0~10V input
1: -10~10V input
2: 4~20mA input
Thousands digit: EAI2 configuration
0: 0~10V input
1: -10~10V input
2: 4~20mA input
F00.21 Analog output Units digit: AO1 configuration 1 0000 ×
terminal 0: 0~10V output
configuration 1: 4~20mA output
Tens digit: AO2 configuration
0: 0~10V output
1: 4~20mA output
Hundreds digit: EAO1 configuration

53
6 Function parameter schedule graph

0: 0~10V output
1: 4~20mA output
Thousands digit: EAO2 configuration
0: 0~10V output
1: 4~20mA output
F00.22 Y output Units digit~ Hundreds digit: reserved 1 0000 ×
terminal Thousands digit: Y4 output configuration
configuration 0: Open collector output
1: DO output
F00.23 G/P type setup 0: G type. 1 0 ×
1: P type.
Note: P type is only for V/F control
F00.24 Motor control mode 0: V/F control（object to torque control） 1 0 ×
1: speed less sensor vector control 1（compare to
speed less sensor vector control 2，this control mode
is more suitable for asynchronous motor≤160KW，
support speed and vector control）
2: speed sensor vector control（support asynchronous
motor speed and torque control）
3:speed less sensor vector control 2（only support
asynchronous motor speed control，this control mode
is more suitable for motor ≥185KW）
F00.25 Monitor parameter The same as parameter F00.01 1 2 ○
2 selection
F00.26 Busbar voltage 0.900～1.100 1 1.000 ○
adjustment
coefficient
F00.27 Parameters copying Units digit：Language(only valid for LCD keypad) 1 00 ×
and Language 0: Chinese
selection 1: English
2: Reserved
Tens digit：parameter upload and download (valid for
LCD and digital potentiometer keypad)
0: Inaction
1: parameter upload
2: parameter download

F01－Basic Run Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi

Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F01.00 Main frequency 0: Operation keyboard digital setup 1 0 ○
input channel 1: AI1 analog setup
selection 2: AI2 analog setup
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup
4:Communication provide( Communication address:
1E01).
5:EAI1 analog setup.
6:EAI2 analog setup
7:High speed pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
8:Terminal pulse setup(X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
9:Terminal encoder setup(X1:X2 connect the encoder
punctuation input)
10～14: Reserved

54
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F01.01 Main frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○

digital setup
F01.02 Main frequency Only when parameter F01.00=0:3:4 valid. 1 00 ○
digital control Units digit: power down reserve setup
0:Main frequency power down reserve.
1:Main frequency power down no reserve.
Tens digit: halt reserve setup
0:Halt main frequency hold
1:Halt main frequency recovery F01.01
Hundreds digit: Set of communication presetting
frequency dimension
0:Preset of absolute frequency mode(preset 5000
represent 50.00Hz).
1:Preset 10000 represent upper limit frequency
(F01.11).
F01.03 Auxiliary 0: Operation keyboard digital setup 1 20 ○
frequency input 1: AI1 analog setup
channel select 2: AI2 analog setup
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup
4:Communication provide( Communication address:
1E01).
5:EAI1 analog setup.
6:EAI2 analog setup
7:High speed pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
8:Terminal pulse setup(X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
9:Terminal encoder setup(X1:X2 connect the encoder
punctuation input)
10～20: Reserved
F01.04 Auxiliary 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency digital
setup
F01.05 Auxiliary Units digit: power down reserve setup 1 11 ○
frequency digital 0:Auxiliary frequency power down reserve.
control 1:Auxiliary frequency power down no reserve.
Tens digit: halt reserve setup
0:Halt auxiliary frequency hold.
1:Halt auxiliary frequency recovery parameter F01.04
F01.06 Main and 0:Main frequency (complex frequency of current is 1 0 ○
auxiliary provide main frequency).
calculating setup 1: Auxiliary frequency(complex frequency of current
is auxiliary frequency.)
2: Plus(polarity oppose of complex and main
frequency，complex frequency is zero).
3:Minus(polarity oppose of complex and auxiliary
frequency，complex frequency is zero).
4:Multiplication(polarity opposed of main and
auxiliary frequency: complex frequency is zero).
5:Max(the max frequency of main and auxiliary
absolute value).
6:Min(the min frequency of main and auxiliary
absolute value).
7:Selection no-zero value(auxiliary is not negative，
main frequency prior；auxiliary is negative，complex
frequency is zero).
F01.07 Auxiliary 0.00～10.00 0.01 1.00 ○

55
6 Function parameter schedule graph

frequency provide
coefficient
F01.08 Coefficient after 0.00～10.00 0.01 1.00 ○
complex of main
and auxiliary
frequency
F01.09 Auxiliary 0:Relative upper limit frequency. 1 0 ○
frequency range 1:Relative main frequency.
selection
F01.10 Auxiliary 0.00～1.00 0.01 1.00 ○
frequency source
scope
F01.11 upper limit Low limit frequency～600.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ×
frequency
F01.12 Low limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.40Hz ×
frequency
F01.13 Low limit 0:As low limit frequency run. 1 2 ×
frequency run 1:As setting frequency run.
mode 2:As zero frequency run.
3:Sleep: PWM clocked at sleep mode.
F01.14 Sleep run hysteresis 0.01Hz～upper limit frequency（This function can be 0.01Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency used to finish the sleep mode function, realizing
energy-saving operation process, and the hysteresis
width can avoid inverter starting frequently in
threshold）
F01.15 Run command 0:Operation keyboard run control. 1 0 ○
channel selection 1:Terminal run command control
2:Communication run command control.
F01.16 Run direction Units digit: Keyboard command for/rev setup(only 1 00 ○
setup valid to keyboard inching command)
0:Forward
1:Reverse
Tens digit: for/rev forbid(suitable for all command
channel，not include inching function)
0:For/rev available.
1:Reverse not available( imposing on reverse，stop as
the halt mode).
2:Forward not available( imposing on
forward，stop as the halt mode)
F01.17 Acceleration time 1 1~60000(Acceleration time is interval accelerate from Base on
zero frequency to upper limit frequency) 1 motor ○
type
F01.18 Deceleration time 1 1～60000(deceleration time is the interval decelerate Base on
from upper limit frequency to zero frequency.) 1 motor ○
type
F01.19 Acc/Dece time unit 0：0.01s 1 1 ×
1：0.1s
2：1s
F01.20 Acc/Dece mode 0:Line acc/Dece mode. 1 0 ×
selection 1:S curve acc/Dece mode.
F01.21 S curve 10.0%～50.0%（(Acceleration/deceleration time) 0.1% 20.0% ○
acceleration S curve deceleration start time+ S curve deceleration
initiation segment raise time ≤90% )
time
F01.22 S curve 10.0%～70.0%(Acceleration/deceleration time) 0.1% 60.0% ○
acceleration up S curve acceleration start time+ S curve acceleration
segment time raise time ≤90% )

56
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F01.23 S curve 10.0%～50.0%(Acceleration/deceleration time) 0.1% 20.0% ○

deceleration S curve acceleration start time+ S curve acceleration
initiation segment raise time ≤90% )
time
F01.24 S curve 10.0%～70.0%(Acceleration/deceleration time) 0.1% 60.0% ○
deceleration up S curve acceleration start time+ S curve acceleration
segment time raise time ≤90% )
F01.25 Keyboard jog run 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
frequency
F01.26 Terminal jog run 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
frequency
F01.27 Jog interval time 0.0～100.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
F01.28 Jog acceleration 0.1～6000.0s 0.1s 20.0s ○
time
F01.29 Jog deceleration 0.1～6000.0s 0.1s 20.0s ○
time

F02－Start, stop, forward/reverse, brake function parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F02.00 Start running 0: Start from starting frequency 1 0 ×
mode 1: First brake and then start from starting
frequency
2: Start by revolving speed tracking
F02.01 Starting delay 0.0～60.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
time
F02.02 Starting frequency 0.0～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F02.03 Starting frequency 0.0～60.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
duration time
F02.04 DC braking 0.0～100.0%（G type inverter rated current） 0.1% 30.0% ×
current when
starting
F02.05 DC braking 0.0～30.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
time when
starting
F02.06 Speed track 0: Current setting frequency. 1 2 ×
starting frequency 1: Running frequency before power down.
selection 2:Speed track auxiliary starting frequency.
F02.07 Speed track 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ×
auxiliary starting
frequency
F02.08 Speed track 0.00～10.00s 0.01s 0.10s ×
starting waiting
time
F02.09 Speed track current 1～20 1 2 ×
control coefficient
F02.10 Speed track 0.1～30.0（V/F control unit is 1 second；SVC 0.1 4.0 ×
searching speed control unit is 0.1 second）
time
F02.11 Stop mode 0: Deceleration stop. 1 0 ○
1: Free stop
2: Deceleration + DC braking stop.
F02.12 Deceleration stop 0.00～upper limit frequency（This parameter is 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
holding frequency only valid for stop mode 0.）
F02.13 Deceleration stop 0.00～10.00s 0.01s 0.00s ×

57
6 Function parameter schedule graph

holding time
F02.14 Stop DC braking starting 0.00～15.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.50Hz ×
frequency
F02.15 stop DC braking waiting 0.00～30.00s 0.01s 0.00s ×
time
F02.16 Stop DC braking current 0.0～100.0%（G type inverter rated current） 0.1% 0.0% ×
F02.17 Stop DC braking time 0.0～30.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
F02.18 Stop auxiliary braking 0.0～100.0%（G type inverter rated current） 0.1% 0.0% ×
current
F02.19 Stop auxiliary braking 0.0～100.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
time
F02.20 Forward/reverse dead 0.0～3600.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
zone time
F02.21 Forward/reverse switching 0: Over zero switchover 1 0 ×
mode 1: Over starting frequency switchover
F02.22 Energy consumption 0:No energy consumption braking 1 0 ○
braking selection 1:Energy consumption braking 1(No braking
while halting).
2: Energy consumption braking 2(Braking while
halting).
F02.23 Energy consumption 100.0～145.0%（rated busbar voltage） 0.1% 125.0% ○
braking voltage
F02.24 Energy consumption 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
braking use rate
F02.25 Encryption time 0～65535h 1 0 ○
F02.26 Reserved

F03－V/F control parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F03.00 V/F curve set 0: Constant torque curve 1 0 ×
1: Degression torque curve 1 (2.0 power)
2: Degression torque curve 1 (1.7 power)
3: Degression torque curve 3 (1.2 power)
4: User self-defined setting V/F curve
(Confirmed by F03.04~F03.11)
F03.01 Torque boost mode 0：Manual boost. 1 0 ○
1：Auto torque boost
F03.02 Torque boost 0.0～12.0% 0.1% Base on ○
motor
type
F03.03 Torque boost cut-off 0.0～100.0%（motor rated frequency） 0.1% 100.0% ○
frequency
F03.04 V/F frequency value 0 0.00～V/F frequency value 1 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ×
F03.05 V/F voltage value 0 0.00～V/F voltage value 1 0.01% 20.00% ×
F03.06 V/F frequency value 1 V/F frequency value 0～V/F frequency value 2 0.01Hz 20.00Hz ×
F03.07 V/F voltage value 1 V/F voltage value 0～V/F voltage value 2 0.01% 40.00% ×
F03.08 V/F frequency value 2 V/F frequency value 1～V/F frequency value 3 0.01Hz 25.00Hz ×
F03.09 V/F voltage value 2 V/F voltage value 1～V/F voltage value 3 0.01% 50.00% ×
F03.10 V/F frequency value 3 V/F frequency value 2～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 40.00Hz ×
F03.11 V/F voltage value 3 V/F voltage value 2 ～ 100.00%( motor rated 0.01% 80.00% ×
voltage)
F03.12 V/F oscillation 0～255 1 10 ○
suppression factor

58
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F04－Auxiliary running parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F04.00 Jump freq. 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.01 Jump freq. 1 range 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.02 Jump freq. 2 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.03 Jump freq. 2 range 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.04 Jump freq. 3 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.05 Jump freq. 3 range 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.06 Slip freq. gain 0.0～300.0% 0.1% 0.0% ×
Slip compensation 0.0～250.0%
F04.07 0.1% 100.0% ×
limit
Slip compensation 0.1～25.0s
F04.08 0.1s 2.0s ×
time constant
F04.09 Carrier freq. 0.5～16.0K 0.1K Based ○
on motor
type
F04.10 PWM optimized Units digit: Carrier freq. is adjusted 1 0010 ×
adjustment automatically according to temperature
0: Banned.
1: Allowed.
Tens digit: low speed carrier freq. limit mode
0: No limit.
1: Limit.
Hundreds digit: carrier wave modulation system
0: 3 phase modulation.
1: 2 phase and 3 phase modulation.
Thousands digit: Asynchronous modulation:
synchronization mode (valid under V/F control)
0:Asynchronous modulation.
1:Synchronous modulation (under 85Hz:
Asynchronous modulation).
F04.11 AVR function 0: No action 1 2 ×
1: Action all the time
2: No action only during deceleration
F04.12 Reserved
F04.13 Automatic energy-saving 0: No action 1 0 ×
operation 1: Action
F04.14 Acceleration time 2 and 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
switchover frequency
F04.15 Deceleration time 2 and 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
switchover frequency
F04.16 Acceleration time 2 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.17 Deceleration time 2 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.18 Acceleration time 3 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.19 Deceleration time 3 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.20 Acceleration time 4 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.21 Deceleration time 4 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.22 Acceleration time 5 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.23 Deceleration time 5 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.24 Acceleration time 6 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.25 Deceleration time 6 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.26 Acceleration time 7 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.27 Deceleration time 7 1～60000 1 200 ○

59
6 Function parameter schedule graph

F04.28 Acceleration time 8 1～60000 1 200 ○

F04.29 Deceleration time 8 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.30 Acceleration time 9 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.31 Deceleration time 9 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.32 Acceleration time 10 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.33 Deceleration time 10 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.34 Acceleration time 11 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.35 Deceleration time 11 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.36 Acceleration time 12 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.37 Deceleration time 12 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.38 Acceleration time 13 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.39 Deceleration time 13 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.40 Acceleration time 14 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.41 Deceleration time 14 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.42 Acceleration time 15 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.43 Deceleration time 15 1～60000 1 200 ○

F05－Terminal correlative function parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F05.00 protocol selection 0: Modbus protocol . 1 0 ×
1: Reserved
2: Profibus protocol .（Extend effective）
3: CANlink protocol .（Extend effective）
4: CANopen protocol .（Extend effective）
5: Free protocol 1.（Can realize all the function
parameter modification of EN500/EN600）
6: Free protocol 2.（Can realize part of the
function parameter modification of
EN500/EN600）
F05.01 Baud rate configuration Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus Baud rate 1 005 ×
selection
0: 300BPS
1: 600BPS
2: 1200BPS
3: 2400BPS
4: 4800BPS
5: 9600BPS
6: 19200BPS
7: 38400BPS
8: 57600BPS
Tens digit: Profibus-DP Baud rate selection
0: 115200BPS
1: 208300BPS
2: 256000BPS
3: 512000BPS
Hundreds digit: CanLink and CANopen Baud
rate selection
0: 20K
1: 50K
2: 100K
3: 125K
4: 250K
5: 500K
6: 1M

60
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F05.02 Data format Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus protocol 1 000 ×
data format 0：1-8-1 format，no parity，RTU
1: 1-8-1 format，even parity，RTU
2: 1-8-1 format，odd parity，RTU
3: 1-7-1 format，no parity，ASCII
4: 1-7-1 format，even parity，ASCII
5: 1-7-1 format，odd parity，ASCII
Tens digit: Profibus_DP protocol data format
0: PPO1 communication format
1: PPO2 communication format
2: PPO3 communication format
3: PPO5 communication format
Hundreds digit: Modbus agreement or free
protocol response selection
0:respond mainframe demand, and respond data
package
1:respond mainframe demand and without
response
F05.03 Local address 0～247， 1 1 ×
this function code is used to identify inverter’s
address: among which 0 is broadcast address.
When setting broadcast address: it can only
receive and execute upper computer broadcast
command: while cannot respond to upper
computer.
F05.04 Communication overtime 0.0～1000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
checkout
time
F05.05 Communication error 0.0～1000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
checkout time
F05.06 Local response delay time 0～200ms（Modbus effective） 1ms 5ms ○
F05.07 Main & sub inverter 0～500% 1% 100% ○
communication frequency
setting percentage
F05.08 communication virtual 00～FFH 1 00H ○
input terminal enabled Bit0 : CX1 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1 : enabled
Bit1: CX2 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
Bit2: CX3 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
Bit3: CX4 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
Bit4: CX5 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
Bit5: CX6 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
Bit6: CX7 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
Bit7: CX8 virtual input terminal enabled

61
6 Function parameter schedule graph

0: forbidden
1: enabled
F05.09 Communication virtual 0: Independent node. 1 0 ○
input terminal joining 1: Terminal node.
node
F05.10 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX1 function
F05.11 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX2 function
F05.12 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX3 function
F05.13 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX4 function
F05.14 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX5 function
F05.15 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX6 function
F05.16 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX7 function
F05.17 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
terminal CX8 function
F05.18 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 1
F05.19 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 2
F05.20 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 3
F05.21 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 4
F05.22 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 5
F05.23 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 6
F05.24 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 7
F05.25 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 8
F05.26 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 9
F05.27 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 10
F05.28 Reserved
F05.29 Reserved
F05.30 Reserved
F05.31 Reserved
F05.32 Reserved
F05.33 Reserved
F05.34 Reserved
F05.35 Reserved
F05.36 Reserved
F05.37 Reserved
F05.38 Reserved
F05.39 Reserved

62
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F06－Setting curve parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F06.00 Setting curve Units digit: AI1 curve selection 1 0000 ○
selection 0: curve 1
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
Tens digit: AI2 curve selection: The same as
Units digit
Hundred digit: rapid pulse curve selection: The
same as Units digit
Thousands digit: pulse width setting curve
selection: The same as Units digit
F06.01 Curve 1 min. setting 0.0%～curve 1 inflexion setting 0.1% 0.0% ○
F06.02 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
quantity of curve 1 min.
setting
F06.03 Curve 1 inflexion setting Curve 1 min. setting ~ curve 1 Max. setting 0.1% 50.0% ○
F06.04 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 50.0% ○
quantity of curve 1
inflexion setting
F06.05 Curve 1 Max. setting Curve 1 inflexion setting ~ 100.0%, 100.0% is 0.1% 100.0% ○
corresponding to 5V Input AD terminal
F06.06 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
quantity of curve 1 Max.
setting
F06.07 Curve 2 min. setting 0.0%～curve 2 inflexion setting 0.1% 0.0% ○
F06.08 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
quantity of curve 2 min.
setting
F06.09 Curve 2 inflexion setting Curve 2 min. setting ~ curve 2 Max. setting 0.1% 50.0% ○
F06.10 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 50.0% ○
quantity of curve 2
inflexion setting
F06.11 Curve 2 Max. setting Curve 2 inflexion setting～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
F06.12 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
quantity of curve 2 Max.
setting
F06.13 Curve 3 min. setting 0.0%～curve 3 inflexion 1 setting 0.1% 0.0% ○
F06.14 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
quantity of curve 3 min.
setting
F06.15 Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting Curve 3 min. setting ~ curve 3 inflexion 2 0.1% 30.0% ○
setting
F06.16 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 30.0% ○
quantity of curve 3
inflexion 1 setting
F06.17 Curve 3 inflexion 2 setting Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting ~ curve 3 Max. 0.1% 60.0% ○
setting
F06.18 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 60.0% ○
quantity of curve 3
inflexion 2 setting
F06.19 Curve 3 Max. setting Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
F06.20 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○

63
6 Function parameter schedule graph

quantity of curve 3 Max.

setting
F06.21 Curve lower than min. Units digit: curve 1 setting 1 11111 ○
input corresponding 0: Corresponds to min. setting
selection corresponding physical quantity.
1: 0.0% of the corresponding physical
quantity.
Tens digit: curve 2 setting
Same as units digit.
Hundreds digit: curve 3 setting
Same as units digit.
Thousands digit: extended curve 1
Same as units digit.
Ten thousands digit: extended curve 2
Same as units digit.

F07－Analog , Pulse input function parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F07.00 AI1 input filter time 0.000～9.999s 0.001s 0.050s ×
F07.01 AI1 setting gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.006 ○
F07.02 AI1 setting bias 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.5% ○
F07.03 AI2 input filter time 0.000～9.999s 0.001 0.050s ×
F07.04 AI2 setting gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.003 ○
F07.05 AI2 setting bias 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.1% ○
F07.06 Analog setting bias Units digit: AI1 setting bias polarity 1 01 ○
polarity 0: Positive polarity.
1: Negative polarity.
Tens digit: AI2 setting bias polarity
0: Positive polarity.
1: Negative polarity.
F07.07 Pulse input filter time 0.000～9.999s 0.001 0.000s ×
F07.08 Pulse input gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.000 ○
F07.09 Pulse input Max. 0.01～50.00KHz 0.01KHz 10.00KHz ○
frequency
F07.10 Pulse width input filter 0.000～9.999s 0.001s 0.000s ×
time
F07.11 Pulse width input gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.000 ○
F07.12 Pulse width input logic 0:positive logic 1 0 ○
setting. 1:negative logic
F07.13 Max pulse input width 0.1～999.9ms 0.1ms 100.0ms ○
F07.14 Reserved
F07.15 Reserved
F07.16 Reserved
F07.17 Reserved

F08－On-off input function parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
Input terminal positive 0000～FFFF（include extend input terminal） 1 0000 ○
F08.00 and negative logic
setting
Input terminal filter 0.000～1.000s（suitable for extend input 0.001s 0.010s ○
F08.01
time terminal）

64
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

X1 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○

F08.02
closed time
X1 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.03
opened time
X2 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.04
closed time
X2 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.05
opened time
X3 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.06
closed time
X3 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.07
opened time
X4 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.08
closed time
X4 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.09
opened time
X5 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.10
closed time
X5 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.11
opened time
X6 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.12
closed time
X6 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.13
opened time
X7 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.14
closed time
X7 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.15
opened time
X8 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.16
closed time
X8 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.17
opened time
F08.18 Input terminal X1 0: Leave control terminal unused 1 1 ×
function selection 1: Forward running FWD terminal
2: Reverse running REV terminal
3: External forward jogging control
4: External reverse jogging control
5: Multi-step speed control terminal 1
6: Multi-step speed control terminal 2
7: Multi-step speed control terminal 3
8: Multi-step speed control terminal 4
9: Acceleration/deceleration time selection
terminal 1
10: Acceleration/deceleration time selection
terminal 2
11: Acceleration/deceleration time selection
terminal 3
12: Acceleration/deceleration time selection
terminal 4
13: Main and auxiliary frequency operational
rule selection terminal 1
14: Main and auxiliary frequency operational
rule selection terminal 2
15: Main and auxiliary frequency operational
rule selection terminal 3
16: Frequency ascending command（UP）
17: Frequency descending command（DOWN）

65
6 Function parameter schedule graph

18: Frequency ascending/descending frequency

resetting
19: Multi-step closed loop terminal 1
20: Multi-step closed loop terminal 2
21: Multi-step closed loop terminal 3
22: External equipment failure input
23: External interruption input
24:External resetting input
25: Free stop input
26: External stop instruction—Stop according to
the stop mode
27: stop DC braking input command DB
28: inverter running prohibited—Stop according
to the stop mode
29:Acceleration/deceleration prohibited
command
30: Three-wire running control
31: Process PID invalid
32: Process PID stop
33: Process PID integral holding
34: Process PID integral resetting
35: Process PID function negation(Closed loop
adjustment feature negation)
36: simple PLC invalid
37: simple PLC halted
38: simple PLC stop state resetting
39: main frequency switchover to digit (keypad)
40: main frequency switchover to AI1
41: main frequency switchover to AI2
42: main frequency switchover to EAI1
43: main frequency switchover to EAI2
44: main frequency setting channel selection
terminal 1
45: main frequency setting channel selection
terminal 2
46: main frequency setting channel selection
terminal 3
47: main frequency setting channel selection
terminal 4
48: Auxiliary frequency reset
49: Command switchover to panel
50: Command switchover to terminal
51: Command switchover to communication
52:Running command Channel selection
terminal 1
53:Running command Channel selection
terminal 2
54:Forward prohibited command(Stop according
to the stop mode: invalid for jogging command)
55:Reverse prohibited command (Stop according
to the stop mode: invalid for jogging command)
56:Swinging frequency input
57:Resetting state of swinging frequency
58:Interior counter reset end
59:Interior counter input end
60:Internal timer resetting
61:Internal timer triggering
62:Length count input

66
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

63:Length reset
64:Reset this operation time
65: speed/torque control switching
66: Point positioning enabled terminal(F00.24=2
valid).
67: Zero-speed servo enabled terminal(F00.24=2
valid).
68: Motor position reset terminal(F00.24=2
valid).
69: Recovery point positioning terminal
(F00.24=2 valid).
70～90: Reserved
91: Pulse frequency input (X8 VALID)
92: Pulse width PWM INPUT (X8 VALID)
93～96: Reserved
F08.19 Input terminal X2 Same as above 1 2 ×
function selection
F08.20 Input terminal X3 Same as above 1 0 ×
function selection
F08.21 Input terminal X4 Same as above 1 0 ×
function selection
F08.22 Input terminal X5 Same as above 1 0 ×
function selection
F08.23 Input terminal X6 Same as above 1 0 ×
function selection
F08.24 Input terminal X7 Same as above 1 0 ×
function selection
F08.25 Input terminal X8 Same as above 1 0 ×
function selection
F08.26 FWD/REV operating 0: Two-wire control mode 1 1 0 ×
mode selection 1: Two-wire control mode 2
2: Two-wire control mode 3（monopulse control
mode）
3: Three-wire control mode 1
4: Three-wire control mode 2
F08.27 Set internal count value 0～65535 1 0 ○
to setting
F08.28 Specify internal count 0～65535 1 0 ○
to setting
F08.29 Internal timer timing 0.1～6000.0s 0.1s 60.0s ○
setting
F08.30 Terminal pulse encoder 0.01～10.00Hz（only be effective by given 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○
frequency rate X1:X2 encoder）
F08.31 Reserved

F09－On-off ,analog output function parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F09.00 Open collector output 0:terminal unused 1 0 ×
terminal Y1 output 1:operation(RUN)
setup 2:CW run
3:CCW run
4:DC brake
5:run prepare finish(busbar voltage normal, fault free,
no run forbid，receival of run command’s status)

67
6 Function parameter schedule graph

6:stop command indication

7:no current arrived
8:overcurrent arrived
9:current1 arrived
10:current2 arrived
11:no frequency output
12:frequency arrival signal(FAR)
13:frequency level detect signal 1(FDT1)
14:frequency level detect signal 2(FDT2)
15:output frequency arrival upper limit(FHL)
16:output frequency arrival low limit(FLL)
17:frequency 1 arrival output
18:frequency 2 arrival output
19:overload pre-alarm signal(OL)
20:undervoltage lockout stop (LU)
21:external fault stop(EXT)
22:fault
23:alarm
24: simple PLC operation
25:simple PLC section operation finish
26:simple PLC circle operation finish
27:simple PLC operation stop
28:traverse frequency high and low limit
29:setup length arrival
30:internal counter final value arrival
31:internal counter designated value arrival
32:internal timer arrival---output 0.5s valid signal
on arrival
33:operation stop time finish
34:operation arrival time finish
35:setup run time arrival
36:setup power on time arrival
37:1st pump variable frequency
38:1st pump power frequency
39:2nd pump variable frequency
40:2nd pump power frequency
41:communication provision
42: torque control speed limiting
43: Torque arriving output
44: Positioning completion
45~60: Reserved
F09.01 Open collector output Same as above 1 0 ×
terminal Y2 output
setup
F09.02 Open collector output Same as above 1 0 ×
terminal Y3 output
setup
F09.03 Open collector output Same as above 1 0 ×
terminal Y4 output
setup
F09.04 Programmable relay Same as above 1 22 ×
output setting
Detection amplitude of 0.00～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F09.05
Frequency arrival(FAR)
FDT1(frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ○
F09.06
level)level
F09.07 FDT1 lag 0.00～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○

68
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F09.08 FDT2(frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ○

level)level
F09.09 FDT2 lag 0.00～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○
F09.10 Zero frequency signal 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency ○
0.01Hz 0.00Hz
detection value
F09.11 Zero frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency ○
0.01Hz 0.00Hz
backlash
F09.12 Zero-current detection 0.0～50.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
amplitude
F09.13 Zero-current detection 0.00～60.00s 0.01s 0.1s ○
time
F09.14 Over-current detection 0.0～250.0% 0.1% 160.0% ○
value
F09.15 Over-current detection 0.00～60.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
time
F09.16 Current 1 arrival 0.0～250.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
detection value
F09.17 Current 1 width 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
F09.18 Current 2 arriving the 0.0～250.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
detection value
F09.19 Current 2 width 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
F09.20 Frequency 1 arriving 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
the detection value
F09.21 Frequency 1 arriving 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
the detection width
F09.22 Frequency 2 arriving 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
the detection value
F09.23 Frequency 2 arriving 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
the detection width
F09.24 positive and negative 0000～FFFF（extension valid） 1 0000 ○
logic setup of Output
terminal
F09.25 Y1 output closed delay 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
time
F09.26 Y1 output disconnected 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
delay time
F09.27 Y2 output closed delay 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
time
F09.28 Y2 output disconnected 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
delay time
F09.29 Y3 output closed delay 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
time
F09.30 Y3 output disconnected 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
delay time
F09.31 Y4 output closed delay 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
time
F09.32 Y4 output disconnected 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
delay time
F09.33 Relay output closed 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
delay time
F09.34 Relay output 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
disconnected delay
time
F09.35 Analog output(AO1) 0:output frequency before slip compensation 1 0 ○
selection (0.00Hz~upper limit frequency)
1:output frequency after slip Compensation

69
6 Function parameter schedule graph

(0.00Hz~upper limit frequency)

2:Setup frequency(0.00Hz~upper limit
frequency)
3:main setting frequency(0.00Hz~upper limit
frequency)
4:auxiliary setting frequency(0.00Hz~upper limit
frequency)
5:output current 1(0~2×inverter rated current)
6:output current 2(0~3×motor rated current)
7:output voltage(0~1.2×load motor rated voltage)
8:busbar voltage(0~1.5×rated busbar voltage)
9:motor speed(0~3 rated speed)
10:PID provision(0.00~10.00V)
11:PID feedback(0.00~10.00V)
12:AI1(0.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
13:AI2(-10.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
14:communication provision
15: motor rotor revolving speed（0.00Hz～upper
limit frequency）
16: present setting torque（0～2 times rated
torque）
17: present output torque（0～2 times rated
torque）
18: present torque current（0～2 times motor
rated current）
19: present flux current（0～1 times motor rated
flux current）
20～25: Reserved
F09.36 Analog output(AO2) Same as above 1 0 ○
selection
F09.37 DO function Same as above
1 0 ○
selection(with Y4 reuse)
F09.38 Reserved
F09.39 Analog output(AO1) 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
filter time
F09.40 Analog output(AO1) 0.00～2.00 0.01 1.00 ○
gain
F09.41 Analog output(AO1) 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
bias
F09.42 Analog output(AO2) 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
filter time
F09.43 Analog output(AO2) 0.00～2.00 0.01 1.00 ○
gain
F09.44 Analog output(AO2) 0.0～100.0%（AO2 output terminal with Y3 0.1% 0.0% ○
bias reuse）
F09.45 DO filter time 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
F09.46 DO output gain 0.00～2.00 0.01 1.00 ○
F09.47 DO maximum pulse 0.1～20.0KHz 0.1KHz 10.0KHz ○
output frequency
F09.48 Torque reaches to the 0.02～200.00s 0.01s 1.00s ○
detection time
F09.49 Reserved
F09.50 Reserved

70
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F10－Simple PLC/Multi-speed Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F10.00 Simple PLC operate Units digit: run mode selection 1 0000 ×
setting 0:inaction
1:stop after single cycle
2:final value keep after single cycle
3:continuous cycle
Tens digit: interrupt run restart mode
selection
0:restart from first phase
1:continuous run from phase frequency at
interruption
2:continuous run from run frequency at
interruption
Hundreds digit: PLC run time unit
0:second
1:minute
Thousands digit: power-down memory selection
0:no memory
1:phase of reserve power down, frequency power
down recording PLC run status: contain power
down phase, run frequency, time have run.
F10.01 Step 1 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
Units digit: frequency setup
0: Multi-section frequency i (i=1～15)
1:frequency determined by complex frequency of
main and auxiliary
2: Reserved
Tens digit: The selection of running direction for
PLC and multi-speed.
0:forward
1:reversal
2:determine by run command
Hundreds digit：ACC/DEC time selection
0: ACC/DEC time 1
1: ACC/DEC time 2
2: ACC/DEC time 3
3: ACC/DEC time 4
4: ACC/DEC time 5
5: ACC/DEC time 6
6: ACC/DEC time 7
7: ACC/DEC time 8
8: ACC/DEC time 9
9: ACC/DEC time 10
A: ACC/DEC time 11
B: ACC/DEC time 12
C: ACC/DEC time 13
D: ACC/DEC time 14
E: ACC/DEC time 15
F10.02 Step 2 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.03 Step 3 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.04 Step 4 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.05 Step 5 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.06 Step 6 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.07 Step 7 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○

71
6 Function parameter schedule graph

F10.08 Step 8 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○

F10.09 Step 9 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.10 Step 10 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.11 Step 11 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.12 Step 12 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.13 Step 13 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.14 Step 14 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.15 Step 15 setting 000H～E22H 1 000 ○
F10.16 Step 1 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.17 Step 2 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.18 Step 3 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.19 Step 4 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.20 Step 5 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.21 Step 6 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.22 Step 7 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.23 Step 8 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.24 Step 9 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.25 Step 10 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.26 Step 11 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.27 Step 12 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.28 Step 13 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.29 Step 14 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.30 Step 15 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
F10.31 Multi- frequency 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F10.32 Multi- frequency 2 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ○
F10.33 Multi- frequency 3 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 20.00Hz ○
F10.34 Multi- frequency 4 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ○
F10.35 Multi- frequency 5 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 40.00Hz ○
F10.36 Multi- frequency 6 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 45.00Hz ○
F10.37 Multi- frequency 7 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
F10.38 Multi- frequency 8 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F10.39 Multi- frequency 9 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ○
F10.40 Multi- frequency 10 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 20.00Hz ○
F10.41 Multi- frequency 11 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ○
F10.42 Multi- frequency 12 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 40.00Hz ○
F10.43 Multi- frequency 13 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 45.00Hz ○
F10.44 Multi- frequency 14 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
F10.45 Multi- frequency 15 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○

F11－Close loop PID run function parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F11.00 Closed-loop running control 0:PID close loop run control invalid 1 0 ×
selection 1:PID close loop run control valid
F11.01 Provision channel selection 0:Digital provision 1 0 ○
1:AI1 analog provision
2:AI2 analog provision
3:EAI1 analog provision
4:EAI2 analog provision
5: Pulse provision
6: Communication provision(Communication
address：1D00).
7: Reserved
F11.02 Feedback channel 0: AI1 analog input 1 0 ○

72
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

selection 1: AI2 analog input

2: EAI1 analog input（Extend effective）
3: EAI2 analog input（Extend effective）
4: AI1+AI2
5: AI1-AI2
6: Min｛AI1，AI2｝
7: Max｛AI1，AI2｝
8: Pulse input
F11.03 Provision channel 0.01～50.00s 0.01s 0.20s ×
filtering time
F11.04 Feedback channel 0.01～50.00s 0.01s 0.10s ×
filtering time
F11.05 PID output filtering 0.00～50.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
time
F11.06 Provision digital setting 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 1.00V ○
F11.07 Proportion gain Kp 0.000～9.999 0.001 0.100 ○
F11.08 Integral gain Ki 0.000～9.999 0.001 0.100 ○
F11.09 Differential gain Kd 0.000～9.999 0.001 0.000 ○
F11.10 Sample cycle T 0.01～1.00s 0.01s 0.10s ○
Deviation limit 0.0 ～ 20.0% correspond to provide value 0.1% 2.0% ○
F11.11
percentage
PID differential amplitude 0.00～100.00% 0.01% 0.10% ○
F11.12
limit
F11.13 Closed-loop regulation 0:action 1 0 ○
characteristic 1:reaction
F11.14 Feedback channel 0:positive characteristic 1 0 ○
Positive-Negative 1:negative characteristic
characteristic
F11.15 PID regulation upper limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
frequency
F11.16 PID regulation lower limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency
F11.17 Integral regulation 0:when integral arrival separate PID threshold 1 0 ○
selection value，stop integral adjusting
1:when integral arrival separate PID threshold
value，continue threshold value adjusting
F11.18 PID threshold of the 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
integral separation
F11.19 Preset closed-loop 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency
F11.20 Holding time of preset 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
closed-loop frequency
F11.21 Closed-loop output 0:close-loop output minus，low limit 1 2 ○
reversion selection frequency run.
1:close-loop output minus，reverse run
(effect by run direction setting )
2:determined by running demand
Closed-loop output 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
F11.22 Reversion frequency upper
limit
F11.23 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
provision 1
F11.24 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
provision 2
F11.25 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
provision 3

73
6 Function parameter schedule graph

F11.26 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○

provision 4
F11.27 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
provision 5
F11.28 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
provision 6
F11.29 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
provision 7

F12－Constant Pressure Water Supply Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set range
code unit Default -cation
F12.00 Constant pressure water 0: no constant pressure water supply 1 0 ×
supply mode selection 1: select inverter to achieve one drive two
mode
2: select extend board to achieve one
drive two mode
3: select extend board to achieve one
drive three mode
4: select extend board to achieve one
drive four mode
5: Select inverterY1,Y2 as the double pump
timing alternate constant pressure water
supply mode
F12.01 Target pressure setting 0.000～long-distance pressure gage
0.001Mpa 0.200Mpa ○
range
F12.02 Sleep frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ○
threshold
F12.03 Awake pressure 0.000～long-distance pressure gage range 0.001Mpa 0.150Mpa ○
threshold
F12.04 Sleep delay time 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
F12.05 Revival delay time 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
F12.06 The range of long-distance 0.001～9.999Mpa 0.001Mpa 1.000Mpa ○
manometer
F12.07 allowed deviation of upper 0.1～100.0% 0.1% 1.0% ○
limit frequency and lower
limit frequency when add
or reduce pump
F12.08 Pump switch 0.0～999.9s 0.1s 5.0s ○
judging time
F12.09 Electromagnetism 0.1～10.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○
contactor switching delay
time
F12.10 Automatic switching time 0000～65535 minute 1 0 ×
interval
F12.11 Revival mode selection 0: Awake by the value of F12.03 1 0 ○
1: Awake by the value of F12.12*F12.01
F12.12 Revival pressure 0.01～0.99 0.01 0.75 ○
coefficient
F12.13 Reserved
F12.14 Reserved

74
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F13－Traverse/ Fixed Length Control Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F13.00 Traverse function 0:traverse invalid 1 0 ×
selection 1:traverse valid
F13.01 Traverse operating Units digit: enter mode 1 0000 ×
mode 0:automatically enter
1:terminal enter manually
Tens digit:
0:variable swing
1:fixed swing
Hundreds digit: traverse halt start mode selection
0:restart
1:start as previous halt record
Thousands digit: traverse status reserve selection
0:no reserve
1:reserve
Traverse frequency 0.0～50.0% 0.1% 10.0% ○
F13.02
swing value
Sudden-Jump 0.0～50.0% 0.1% 2.0% ○
F13.03
frequency
F13.04 Traverse cycle 0.1～999.9s 0.1s 10.0s ○
F13.05 Triangular wave rising 0.0～98.0% (traverse cycle) 0.1% 50.0% ○
time
preset frequency of 0.00～400.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
F13.06
Traverse
F13.07 Traverse preset 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
frequency waiting
time
F13.08 Setting length 0～65535m 1m 0m ○
F13.09 Number of pulses for 1～10000 1 1 ○
axis per circle
F13.10 Axis perimeter 0.01～100.00cm 0.01cm 10.00cm ○
F13.11 Reserved
F13.12 Length correction 0.001～1.000 0.001 1.000 ○
coefficient
F13.13 After length arrival: 0:automatically reset 0 1 ○
record length manage 1:no change
F13.14 Process of length 0:automatically reset 0 1 ○
record when stop 1:no change

F14－Vector Control Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F14.00 Speed/torque control 0: speed control 1 0 ○
selection 1: torque control（This parameter is valid when
F00.24=1 or 2）
Speed loop high speed 0.1 ～ 40.0 （ This parameter is valid when 0.1 20.0 ○
F14.01
proportional gain F00.24=1 or 2）
Speed loop high speed 0.001～10.000s（This parameter is valid when 0.001s 0.040s ○
F14.02
integral time F00.24=1 or 2）
Speed loop low speed 0.1 ～ 80.0 （ This parameter is valid when 0.1 20.0 ○
F14.03
proportional gain F00.24=1 or 2）
F14.04 Speed loop low speed 0.001～10.000s（This parameter is valid when 0.001s 0.020s ○

75
6 Function parameter schedule graph

integral time F00.24=1 or 2）

Speed loop parameter 0.00Hz～20.00Hz（This parameter is valid when 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F14.05
switching frequency F00.24=1 or 2）
Low frequency power 0 ～ 50 （ This parameter is valid when 1 16 ○
F14.06 generation stability F00.24=1 ）
coefficient
Current loop 1～500（This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 1 70 ○
F14.07
proportional gain or 2）
Current loop integral 0.1～100.0ms（This parameter is valid when 0.1ms 4.0ms ○
F14.08
time F00.24=1 or 2）
Motor-driven torque 50.0～250.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 160.0% ○
F14.09
current limit value F00.24=1 or 2 or 3）
Braking torque current 50.0～250.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 160.0% ○
F14.10
limit value F00.24=1 or 2）
Asynchronous motor 20.0～100.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 80.0% ○
F14.11 flux-weakening control F00.24=1 or 2）
coefficient
Asynchronous motor 10.0～80.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 10.0% ○
F14.12
Min. flux coefficient F00.24= 2）
F14.13 Torque provision 0: Digital setting 1 0 ×
channel selection 1: AI1 Analog setting
2: AI2 Analog setting
3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjustment setting
4: communication provision(Communication
address：1D01)
5: EAI1 Analog setting（expansion effective）
6: EAI2 Analog setting（expansion effective）
7: rapid pulse setting（X8 terminal needs to
choose the corresponding function）
8: terminal pulse width setting（X8 terminal
needs to choose the corresponding function）
Note：This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2.
F14.14 Torque polarity setting 00～11 1 00 ○
Units digit：torque setting polarity
0: positive
1: negative
2:defined by running command
Tens digit: torque compensation polarity
0: The same as setting direction of torque
1: opposite the setting direction of torque
Note: This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2.
Torque digital setting 0.0～200.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 0.0% ○
F14.15
value F00.24=1 or 2）
F14.16 Forward speed limit 0: Digital setting 1 0 ×
channel selection in 1: AI1 Analog setting
Torque control mode 2: AI2 Analog setting
3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjustment setting
4:Communication provision(Communication
address: 1D0A).
5: EAI1 Analog setting（expansion effective）
6: EAI2 Analog setting（expansion effective）
7: rapid pulse setting（X8 terminal needs to
choose the corresponding function）
8: terminal pulse width setting（X8 terminal
needs to choose the corresponding function）

76
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

Note：This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or

2.
F14.17 Reverse speed limit 0: Digital setting 1 0 ×
channel selection in 1: AI1 Analog setting
Torque control mode 2: AI2 Analog setting
3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjustment setting
4: Communication provision(Communication
address: 1D0B).
5: EAI1 Analog setting（expansion effective）
6: EAI2 Analog setting（expansion effective）
7:Rapid pulse setting（X8 terminal needs to
choose the corresponding function）
8: Terminal pulse width setting（X8 terminal
needs to choose the corresponding function）
Note：This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2.
F14.18 Forward speed limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency（This parameter 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
value in Torque control is valid when F00.24=1 or 2.）
mode
F14.19 Reverse speed limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency（This parameter 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
value in Torque control is valid when F00.24=1 or 2.）
mode
F14.20 Torque 0.000～60.000s（This parameter is valid when 0.001s 0.100s ○
Accelerate/Decelerate F00.24=1 or 2.）
time setting
F14.21 Torque compensation 0.0～100.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 0.0% ○
F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.22 Positive torque gain 50.0～150.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 100.0% ○
regulation coefficient F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.23 Negative torque gain 50.0～150.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 100.0% ○
regulation coefficient F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.24 Flux braking coefficient 0.0～300.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 0.0% ○
F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.25 Pre-excitation start-up 0.1 ～ 3.0 （ This parameter is valid when 0.1 0.5 ×
time constant F00.24=1）
F14.26 Speed loop proportional 0.010～6.000（This parameter is valid when 0.001 0.500 ○
gain F00.24=3）
F14.27 Speed loop integral 0.010～9.999（This parameter is valid when 0.001 0.360 ○
time constant F00.24=3）
F14.28 Motor stabilization 10 ～ 300 （ This parameter is valid when 1 100 ○
coefficient F00.24=3）
F14.29 Compensation gain of 100.0～130.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 100.0% ○
vibration restrain F00.24=3）
F14.30 Torque compensation 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency（This parameter 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
limit frequency is valid when F00.24=1 or 2.）

F15－Asynchronous Motor Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F15.00 Reserved
F15.01 Asynchronous motor rated 0.1～6553.5KW 0.1KW Base on ×
power motor
type
F15.02 Asynchronous motor rated 1～690V 1V Base on ×
voltage motor

77
6 Function parameter schedule graph

type
F15.03 Asynchronous motor rated 0.1～6553.5A 0.1A Base on ×
current motor
type
F15.04 Asynchronous motor rated 0.00～600.00Hz 0.01Hz Base on ×
frequency motor
type
F15.05 Asynchronous motor rated 0～60000r/min 1r/min Base on ×
rotational speed motor
type
F15.06 Asynchronous motor poles 1～7 1 2 ×
No.
F15.07 Asynchronous motor stator 0.001～65.535Ω (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.001Ω Base on ×
resistance motor
0.0001～6.5535Ω(inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.0001Ω
type
F15.08 Asynchronous motor rotor 0.001～65.535Ω (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.001Ω Base on ×
resistance motor
0.0001～6.5535Ω(inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.0001Ω
type
F15.09 Asynchronous motor 0.01～655.35mH (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.01mH Base on ×
leakage inductance motor
0.001～65.535mH (inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.001mH
type
F15.10 Asynchronous motor 0.1～6553.5mH (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.1mH Base on ×
mutual inductance motor
0.01～655.35mH (inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.01mH
type
F15.11 Asynchronous motor no 0.01～655.35A 0.01A Base on ×
load current motor
type
F15.12 Reserved
F15.13 Reserved
F15.14 Reserved
F15.15 Reserved
F15.16 Reserved
F15.17 Reserved
F15.18 Reserved
F15.19 Motor parameter 0: Inaction 1 0 ×
self-tuning selection 1: asynchronous motor stop to self-adjusting
2: asynchronous motor rotate no-load to
self-adjusting
3: Reserved
Note：
① Before adjustment ， The nameplate data
should be setting directly.
② Motor parameter group can have special
default values, or can be modified by users, or
can be self-adjusted.
③ when parameter F15.01 is modified， the
other parameters of the motor will turn into
default values automatically.
F15.20 Reserved
F15.21 Reserved
F15.22 Reserved

78
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F16－Closed loop encoder parameter group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F16.00 Zero-speed servo 0：Zero-speed servo is invalid. 1 0 ○
enabled 1：Zero-speed servo is valid.
F16.01 Encoder line number 1～10000 1 1024 ○
F16.02 Direction of encoder Units digit：AB phase sequence 1 00 ×
0: Forward direction
1:Reverse direction
Tens digit: Set of point positioning and seeking
position direction.
0: Seeking position according to command
direction.
1: Seeking position according to forward
direction.
2: Seeking position according to reverse
direction.
3: Seeking position according to random
direction.
F16.03 Encoder fractional 0.001～60.000 0.001 1.000 ○
frequency coefficient
F16.04 Encoder filtering 5～100 1 15 ○
coefficient
F16.05 Position control mode 0:Position control is invalid。 1 0 ×
1:Point positioning mode。
2:Recovery point positioning mode
3～4:Reserved
Remarks:
1, This parameter is valid while F00.24=2
2, While F16.05=1, need to cooperate with
multi-function input terminal function of No.66.
3,While F16.05=2, need to cooperate with
multi-function input terminal function of No.69.
F16.06 Position control 0.01～100.00Hz 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ×
maximum frequency
F16.07 Position control 0.01～5.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz ×
minimum frequency
F16.08 Creeping afterpulse 0～60000 1 30 ○
count before finishing
the position
F16.09 Positioning reaches to 1～255 1 2 ○
the pulse range
F16.10 Position control gain 1～5000 1 200 ○
F16.11 PSG alteration point 0.01～30.00Hz 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F16.12 Point positioning 0.00～360.00 degree 0.01 0.00 ○
relative to Z-axis angle
F16.13 Positioning control 1～60000 1 200 ○
acceleration-deceleratio
n time

79
6 Function parameter schedule graph

F17－Reserved Parameter Group 1

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F17.00 Reserved
～
F17.20

F18－Enhance Control Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F18.00 Operation panel control 0:no binding 1 0 ○
frequency binding 1:operation keyboard digital setup
2:AI1 analog setup
3:AI2 analog setup
4:terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup
5:communication provide(Modbus and
external bus use the same main
frequency storage)
6:EAI1 analog setup(extension valid)
7:EAI2 analog setup(extension valid)
8:high speed pulse setup( X8 terminal
need choose the relative function)
9:terminal pulse width setup(X8 terminal
need choose the relative function)
10:terminal encoder provide(decide by
X1，X2)
11～15：Reserved
F18.01 Terminal control Same as above 1 0 ○
frequency binding
F18.02 Communication Same as above 1 0 ○
control frequency
binding
F18.03 Digital frequency Units digit: keyboard UP/DW integral control 1 00 ○
integral function 0:integral function
selection 1:no integral function
Tens digit: terminal UP/DW integral control
0:integral function
1:no integral function
F18.04 Keyboard UP/DOWN 0.01～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.10Hz ○
integral rate
F18.05 Keyboard no integral 0.01～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz ○
single step’s size setup
F18.06 Terminal UP/DOWN 0.01～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.20Hz ○
integral rate
F18.07 Terminal no integral 0.01～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.10Hz ○
single step’s size setup
F18.08 Droop control decline 0.00～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency
F18.09 Setup accumulate power 0～65535 hours
1 0 ○
on time
F18.10 Setup accumulate run 0～65535 hours
1 0 ○
time
F18.11 Timing run function 0:invalid
1 0 ○
enable 1:valid

80
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F18.12 Timing run stop time 0.1～6500.0Min 0.1Min 2.0Min ○

F18.13 Currently run arrival 0.0～6500.0Min
0.1Min 1.0Min ○
time
F18.14 Keyboard UP/DOWN 0:keyboard frequency provide value adjusting 1 0 ○
selection under monitor 1:PID digital provide value adjusting
mode 2～6：Reserved
F18.15 V/F vibration restrain 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
end frequency
F18.16 Torque closed loop 0：Torque open-loop control 1 1 ○
control selection 1：Torque closed-loop control
Note：This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2
F18.17 cooling fan control Units digit: Fan control mode 1 00 ○
selection 0:Smart fan
1:Inverter is running all the time after power on
2:No running for fan, but it starts automatically
when the temperature is higher than 75 degree.
Tens digit: Speed regulation fan control mode.
0:Smart PWM Speed regulation
1:Running at highest speed.
F18.18 Reserved
F18.19 Reserved
F18.20 Reserved
F18.21 Reserved
F18.22 Reserved
F18.23 Reserved
F18.24 Reserved

F19－Protective Relevant Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F19.00 Power off restart waiting 0.0～20.0s（0 means no start function） 0.1s 0.0s ×
time
F19.01 Fault self-recovery times 0～10（0 means no automatic reset function） 1 0 ×
F19.02 Fault self-recovery 0.5～20.0s 0.1s 5.0s ×
interval time
F19.03 Motor overload 0:alarm: continuous run 1 2 ×
protection action 1:alarm，stop run as halt mode
selection 2:fault，free halt
F19.04 Motor overload 10.0～800.0%（motor rated current） 0.1% 100.0% ×
protection coefficient
F19.05 Inverter overload 0:detection all the time 1 0 ×
pre-alarm detection 1:detection as constant velocity
selection
F19.06 Inverter overload 20～180%（inverter rated current） 1% 130% ○
pre-alarm detection
level
F19.07 Inverter overload 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 5.0s ○
pre-alarm delay time
F19.08 Motor underload 0.0～120.0%（motor rated current） 0.1% 50.0% ○
alarm detection level
F19.09 Motor underload 0.1～60.0s 0.1s 2.0s ○
alarm detection time
F19.10 Motor underload Units digit: detection selection 1 00 ○
alarm detection action 0:no detection

81
6 Function parameter schedule graph

1:detection all the time when run

2:detection only when constant velocity
Tens digit: action selection
0:alarm，continuous run
1:alarm，stop run as halt mode
2:fault，free halt
F19.11 Input& output phase Units digit: input phase loss 1 1111 ○
loss, short circuit 0:no detection
detection action 1:fault，free halt
Tens digit: output phase loss
0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
Hundreds digit: power-on on earth short circuit
protect detection enable
0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
Thousands digit: operation on earth short circuit
protect detection enable
0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
F19.12 Over voltage stall 0:forbid 1 1 ×
selection 1:allowed
F19.13 Over voltage stall 100～150%（rated busbar voltage） 1% 125% ×
protection voltage
F19.14 Automatic current limit 50～230%（G type rated current） 1% 170% ×
level
F19.15 Frequency decline rate 0.00～99.99Hz/s 0.01Hz/s 10.00Hz/s ×
of automatic current
limit
F19.16 Automatic current limit 0:constant velocity invalid 1 0 ×
action selection 1:constant velocity valid
F19.17 Rapid current-limiting 150%～250%（G type rated current） 1% 230% ×
coefficient
F19.18 Motor run section 0:forbid 1 0 ×
selection when instant 1:allowed
power off
F19.19 Frequency droop rate 0.00～99.99Hz/s 0.01Hz/s 10.00Hz/s ×
when instant power off
F19.20 Voltage rebound 0.00～10.00s 0.01s 0.10s ×
estimate time when
instant power off
F19.21 Action estimate voltage 60～100%(rated busbar voltage) 1% 80% ×
when instant power off
F19.22 Allowed the longest off 0.30～5.00s 0.01s 2.00s ×
time when instant power
off
F19.23 Terminal external device 0:alarm，continuous run 1 2 ×
fault action selection 1:alarm，stop run as halt mode
2:fault，free halt
F19.24 Power on terminal 0:invalid 1 0 ×
protection selection 1:valid
F19.25 Provide lost detection 0～100% 1% 0% ○
value
F19.26 Provide lost detection 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○
time
F19.27 Feedback lost detection 0～100% 1% 12% ○
value

82
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F19.28 Feedback lost 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○

detection time
F19.29 Deviation magnitude 0～100% 1% 50% ○
abnormal detection
value
F19.30 Deviation magnitude 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○
abnormal detection time
F19.31 Protection action Units digit: PID provide loss detection act 1 000 ○
selection 1 0:no detection
1:alarm, continue run
2:alarm, stop run as halt mode
3:fault, free halt
Tens digit: PID feedback loss detection act
0:no detection
1:alarm, continue run
2:alarm, stop run as halt mode
3:fault，free halt
Hundreds digit: PID error value abnormal detect
action
0:no detection
1:alarm, continue run
2:alarm, stop run as halt mode
3:fault, free halt
F19.32 Protection action Units digit: communication abnormal 1 1200 ×
selection 2 action: include communication time out
and error
0:alarm, continue run
1:alarm, stop run as halt mode
2:fault, free halt
Tens digit: E2PROM abnormal action
selection
0:alarm, continue run
1:alarm, stop run as halt mode
2:fault, free halt
Hundreds digit: contactor abnormal action
0:alarm，continue run
1:alarm，stop run as halt mode
2:fault，free halt
Thousands digit: running lack-Voltage fault
display action selection.
0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
F19.33 Reserved
F19.34 Reserved
F19.35 Fault indication and Units digit: fault indication selection during the 1 00 ×
clock during the period period of fault reset automatically
of recovery 0:action
1:no action
Tens digit: fault clock function selection: to
achieve fault display before power down: etc.
0:forbid
1:open
F19.36 Continuous run Match up with protect action 1 0 ×
frequency selection 0:run at the frequency setup by now
when alarm 1:run at the frequency of upper limit
2:run at the frequency of low limit
3:run at the frequency of abnormal for standby

83
6 Function parameter schedule graph

F19.37 Abnormal standby 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ×

frequency
F19.38 Encoder disconnection 0.0～8.0s(No detection when value is 0) 0.1s 0.0s ○
detection time
F19.39 Over speed （OS） 0.0～120.0%(equals upper limit frequency) 0.1% 120.0% ○
detection time
F19.40 Over speed （OS） 0.00～20.00s（No detection when value is 0） 0.01s 0.00s ○
detection time
F19.41 Detection value when 0.0～50.0%(equals upper limit frequency) 0.1% 10.0% ○
speed deviation is too
large
F19.42 Detection time when 0.00～20.00s（No detection when value is 0） 0.01s 0.00s ○
speed deviation is too
large
F19.43 Overvoltage suppression 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 90.0% ○
coefficient
F19.44 Reserved

F20－Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F20.00 Virtual input VDI1 function 0～90 1 0 ○
selection
F20.01 Virtual input VDI2 function 0～90 1 0 ○
selection
F20.02 Virtual input VDI3 function 0～90 1 0 ○
selection
F20.03 Virtual input VDI4 function 0～90 1 0 ○
selection
F20.04 Virtual input VDI5 function 0～90 1 0 ○
selection
F20.05 Virtual output VDO1 function 0～60 1 0 ○
selection
F20.06 Virtual output VDO2 function 0～60 1 0 ○
selection
F20.07 Virtual output VDO3 function 0～60 1 0 ○
selection
F20.08 Virtual output VDO4 function 0～60 1 0 ○
selection
F20.09 Virtual output VDO5 function 0～60 1 0 ○
selection
F20.10 Virtual output VDO1 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
open delay time
F20.11 Virtual output VDO2 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
open delay time
F20.12 Virtual output VDO3 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
open delay time
F20.13 Virtual output VDO4 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
open delay time
F20.14 Virtual output VDO4 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
open delay time
F20.15 Virtual output VDO1 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
close delay time
F20.16 Virtual output VDO2 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
close delay time

84
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F20.17 Virtual output VDO3 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○

close delay time
F20.18 Virtual output VDO4 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
close delay time
F20.19 Virtual output VDO5 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
close delay time
F20.20 Virtual input VDI enable 00～FF 1 00 ○
control
F20.21 Virtual input VDI status 00～FF 1 00 ○
digital setup
F20.22 Virtual input/output 00~FF 1 00 ○
connection Bit0:VDI1 and VDO1 connection
0:positive logic
1:negative logic
Bit1:VDI2 and VDO2 connection
0:positive logic
1:negative logic
Bit2:VDI3 and VDO3 connection
0:positive logic
1:negative logic
Bit3:VDI4 and VDO4 connection
0:positive logic
1:negative logic
Bit4:VDI5 and VDO5 connection
0:positive logic
1:negative logic

F21－Reserved Parameter Group 2

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F21.00～ Reserved
F21.21

F22－Reserved Parameter Group 3

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F22.00～ Reserved
F22.17

F23－Reserved Parameter Group 4

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F23.00～ Reserved
F23.17

F24－Reserved Parameter Group 5

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F24.00～ Reserved
F24.13

85
6 Function parameter schedule graph

F25－User Definition Display Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F25.00 User Function Code 1 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.01 User Function Code 2 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.02 User Function Code 3 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.03 User Function Code 4 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.04 User Function Code 5 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.05 User Function Code 6 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.06 User Function Code 7 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.07 User Function Code 8 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.08 User Function Code 9 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.09 User Function Code 10 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.10 User Function Code 11 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.11 User Function Code 12 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.12 User Function Code 13 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.13 User Function Code 14 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.14 User Function Code 15 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.15 User Function Code 16 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.16 User Function Code 17 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.17 User Function Code 18 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.18 User Function Code 19 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.19 User Function Code 20 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.20 User Function Code 21 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.21 User Function Code 22 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.22 User Function Code 23 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.23 User Function Code 24 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.24 User Function Code 25 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.25 User Function Code 26 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.26 User Function Code 27 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.27 User Function Code 28 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.28 User Function Code 29 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
F25.29 User Function Code 30 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○

F26－Fault Record Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F26.00 The last fault record 0:no fault 1 0 *
1:overcurrent at acceleration
2:overcurrent at deceleration
3:overcurrent at constant speed
4:overvoltage at acceleration
5:overvoltage at deceleration
6:overvoltage at constant speed
7:overvoltage at motor halt
8:undervoltage at run
9:drive overload protection
10:motor overload protection
11:motor underload protection

86
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

12:input phase loss

13:output phase loss
14:inverter module protection
15:short circuit to earth at run
16:short circuit to earth when power on
17:drive overheat
18:external device fault
19:current detect circuit fault
20:external interference
21:internal interference—main clock etc
22:PID provide lost
23:PID feedback lost
24:PID error value abnormal
25:terminal protection activate
26:communication fault
27~29:reserve
30:EEROM read-write error
31:temperature detection disconnection
32:auto-tunning fault
33:contactor abnormal
34:factory fault 1
35:factory fault 2
36:capacitor overheat(few mode with overheat
protection)
37:encoder disconnection
38:over-speed protection
39:protection when speed deviation is too large
40: Fault of Z pulse loses
41～50：Reserved
F26.01 The last two fault Same as above 1 0 *
records
F26.02 The last three fault Same as above 1 0 *
records
F26.03 The last four fault Same as above 1 0 *
records
F26.04 Setup frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last one fault
F26.05 Output frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last one fault
F26.06 Output current at the last 0.0～6553.5A 0.1A 0.0A *
one fault
F26.07 DC busbar voltage at the 0.0～6553.5V 0.1V 0.0V *
last one fault
F26.08 Module temperature at 0～125℃ 1℃ 0℃ *
the last one fault
F26.09 Input terminal status at 0 *
the last one fault
F26.10 Accumulated run time at 0～65535min 1min 0min *
the last one fault
F26.11 Setup frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last two fault
F26.12 Output frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last two fault
F26.13 Output current at the last 0.0～6553.5A 0.1A 0.0A *
two fault
F26.14 DC busbar voltage at the 0.0～6553.5V 0.1V 0.0V *
last two fault

87
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

F26.15 Module temperature at the 0～125℃ 1℃ 0℃ *

last two fault
F26.16 Input terminal status at 0 *
the last two fault
F26.17 Accumulated run time at 0～65535min 1min 0min *
the last two fault

F27－Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F27.00 User password 00000～65535 1 00000 ○
F27.01 Manufacturer password 00000～65535 1 00000 ○

C－Monitor Function Parameter Group

Function Min. Factory Modifi
Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
Display the parameter of
C-00
F00.01，F00.07 definition
Display the parameter of
C-01
F00.02，F00.08 definition
Display the parameter of
C-02
F00.03，F00.09 definition
Display the parameter of
C-03
F00.04，F00.10 definition
Display the parameter of
C-04
F00.05，F00.11 definition
Display the parameter of
C-05
F00.06，F00.12 definition
⑴corresponding relationship of input terminal status as below:

Reserved
Reserved
Ql I I 11 11 I
LUJ Q I IJ / .. .
X1 terminal status
X2 terminal status
：terminal input invalid
：terminal input valid

X8 terminal status
X3 terminal status
X7 terminal status
X4 terminal status
X6 terminal status
X5 terminal status

88
 6 Function parameter schedule graph

⑵Corresponding relationship of standard output terminal status as below:

1111l i n n
Tni rrrrn ：terminal input invalid

Reserved Y1 terminal status ：terminal input valid

Reserved Y2 terminal status
Reserved
Y3 terminal status
Reserved
Y4 terminal status
Reserved
RLY terminal status

⑶Corresponding relationship of communication virtual input terminal status as below:

1111011 o ：terminal input invalid
r/*t 7 rrr/Ti / ：terminal input valid

Reserved CX1 terminal status

~

Reserved CX2 terminal status

CX8 terminal status
CX3 terminal status
CX7 terminal status
CX4 terminal status
CX6 terminal status
CX5 terminal status

⑷Drive status:
BIT0:1=busbar voltage setup
BIT1:1=common run command valid
BIT2:1=jog run command valid
BIT3:1=drive run period
BIT4:1=current run direction to reverse
BIT5:1=run command direction to reverse
BIT6:1=deceleration brake period
BIT7:1=motor acceleration period
BIT8:1=motor deceleration period
BIT9：1= drive alarm
BIT10：1= drive fault
BIT11：1= current limited period
BIT12：1= fault self-recovery period
BIT13：1= self-adjusting period
BIT14：1= free halt status
BIT15：1= speed tracking start

89
7 Detailed function specification

7 Detailed function specification

The parameter function code of this chapter listed content as below:
Code Factory
Description Setup Range/Explanation
No. Default

7.1 System Parameter Group: F00

F00.00 Parameter group display control Range: 0～3 0

0: Basic list mode. Display only F00, F01, F02, F03 basic control parameter
group and F26 fault record parameter group.
1: Middle list mode. Display all parameter except for extension: virtual and
reserve parameter group.
2: Senior list mode. All parameter groups can be displayed.
3: User list mode. Display parameter defined by user: and monitor
parameter: F00.00 display all the time.

F00.00 display all the time. Under intermediate menu mode:

©
Note
irrelevant parameter group can be covered according to different
control mode.

C-00 display parameter

F00.01 Range: 0～65 51
selection when operation
C-01 display parameter
F00.02 Range: 0～65 2
selection when operation
C-02 display parameter
F00.03 Range: 0～65 4
selection when operation
C-03 display parameter
F00.04 Range: 0～65 5
selection when operation
C-04 display parameter
F00.05 Range: 0～65 6
selection when operation
C-05 display parameter
F00.06 Range: 0～65 9
selection when operation
The above parameter display when inverter run by C-00~C-05 parameter groups,
pressing to switch between these parameters.
Pressing ENTER
DATA and then return to C-00 parameter monitor.
For example: pressing parameter switch from C-00 to C-01: continuous
pressing the same button: parameter switch from C-01 to C-02: then pressing /\" ENTER
DATA /
\

return to C-00 parameter monitor.

90
 7 Detailed function specification

0: Main setup frequency (0.01Hz)

1: Auxiliary setup frequency (0.01Hz)
2: Setup frequency (0.01Hz)
3: Output frequency (0.01Hz)
4: Output current(0.1A)（display 0.01A below 11KW）
5: Output voltage (1V)
6: DC busbar voltage (0.1V)
7: Motor speed (1 circle/min)
8: Motor line velocity (1 circle/min)
9: Inverter temperature (1℃)
10: Run time already this time (0.1min)
11: Current accumulate run time (1h)
12: Current accumulate power-on time (1h)
13:Inverter status (displays the working state of inverter, show it with
decimalism, after change it into binary, the definition is on the parameter
details.)
14: Input terminal status
15: Output terminal status
16: Extension output terminal status
17: Extension input terminal status
18: Communication virtual input terminal status
19: Internal virtual input node status
20: Analog input AI1 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)
21: Analog input AI2 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)
22: Extension analog input EAI1 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)
23: Extension analog input EAI2 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)
24: Analog AO1 output (after checkout) (0.01V /0.01mA)
25: Analog AO2 output（after checkout）（0.01V or 0.01mA）
26: Extension analog EAO1 output (0.01V /0.01mA)
27: Extension analog EAO2 output (0.01V /0.01mA)
28: External pulse input frequency (1Hz)
29: Reserved
30: Process PID provide (0.01V)
31: Process PID feedback (0.01V)
32: Process PID deviation (0.01V)
33: Process PID output (0.01Hz)
34: Simple PLC current segment No.
35: External multi-speed current segment No.

91
7 Detailed function specification

36: Constant pressure water supply provide pressure (0.001Mpa)

37: Constant pressure water supply feedback pressure (0.001Mpa)
38: Constant pressure water supplies relay status
39: Current length (1M)
40: Accumulate length (1M)
41: Current internal count value
42: Current internal time value (0.1s)
43: Run command setup channel (0: keyboard 1: terminal
2: communication)
44: Main frequency provide channel
45: Auxiliary frequency provide channel
46: Rated current (0.1A)
47: Rated voltage (1V)
48: Rated power (0.1KW)
49, 50: Reserved
51: The frequency after deceleration（0.01Hz）
52: Motor rotator frequency（0.01Hz）（the frequency estimate on the
open-loop ,actual measurement for close-loop）
53 :Present provide torque（relative to rated torque, it has direction）
54: Present output torque（relative to rated torque, it has direction）
55: Present torque current (0.1A）
56: The present flux current （0.1A）
57: Setting motor rotate speed（r/min）
58: Output power（active power）（0.1KW）
59～65: Reserved

C-00 display parameter

F00.07 Range: 0～65 2
selection when stop
C-01 display parameter
F00.08 Range: 0～65 6
selection when stop
C-02 display parameter
F00.09 Range: 0～65 48
selection when stop
C-03 display parameter
F00.10 Range: 0～65 14
selection when stop
C-04 display parameter
F00.11 Range: 0～65 20
selection when stop
C-05 display parameter
F00.12 Range: 0～65 9
selection when stop
The above parameter display when inverter stop by C-00~C-05 parameter group,
pressing to switch between these parameters. Pressing ENTER
'
DATA
'and then

92
 7 Detailed function specification

return to C-00 parameter monitor. For example: pressing

© parameter switch
from C-00 to C-01, continuous pressing the same button: parameter switch from

^
C-01 to C-02: then pressing /\ JPATAy
TTERN return to C-00 parameter monitor. Monitor

contents various as different monitor parameter: refer to parameter F00.01.

Monitor parameter group C-00~C-05 have run and stop modes.

For example C-00 display different physical value under run and
Note stop two modes.

Power-on fault monitor

F00.13 Range: 0～5 0
parameter selection
When the parameter power on first time: C monitor parameter group display
under drive run or stop status, For example F00.13=1, power on or stop to monitor,
display parameter setup by C-01;when F00.02=3, F00.08=6, power on, inverter
stops, busbar voltage display; inverter runs, output frequency and keypad display.
Pressing /\ ENTÌRN monitor C-00 for the setting motor value.
PATAy

Range: units digit: 0~2

Parameter operation
F00.14 tens digit: 0~5 000
control
hundreds digit: 0~4
Units digit: To define which parameters will be allowed to modify.
0: All parameters are allowed to modification.
1: Excerpt this parameter, the other parameter is not allowed to
modification.
2: Except F01.01, F01.04 and this parameter, the others parameter are
not allowed to modification.
Tens digit: To define which parameters will be resumed factory default value
0: No action.
1: All parameters return to default.(not include fault record parameter
group(F26 group) parameter).
2: Except for motor parameter: all parameters return to default. (not
include F15 and F26 group parameter).
3: Extension parameter return to default.(only F21~F24 group parameter
return to default).
4: Virtual parameter return to default.(only F20 group parameter return to
default).
5: Fault record return to default. (Only fault record parameter group (F26
group) restores factory default).
Hundreds digit: Locked key that definite the keypad when locking function is
valid.
0: All locked.

93
7 Detailed function specification

1: Except RESET, button: the others locked.

2: Except X
)( V , button: the others locked
S
3: Except (W) , ( ) button: the others locked
4: Except ^y> , button: the others locked
'
STOP '

r 1. In factory status, the unit of this function code parameter is 0,

and it is default and allowed to change all the other function code
parameters: when user finish: and want to change the function
code setup: this function code parameter should set up 0 first.
When all changes finish and need to do parameter protect: this
function code setup into the IP grade you need.
Note 2. The decade recovers to 0 automatically after record remove or
factory default operation.
3. When the third of parameter F00.14 finish setup: button
pressing lasting for 2 seconds to lock keyboard and relevant
keyboard key: when need to unlock the keyboard: press the MENU
ESC

button for 2 seconds.

V
Range: units digit: 0,1
tens digit: 0~9
F00.15 Button function selection 0001
hundreds digit: 0,1
thousands digit: 0,1
Units digit: panel REV
JOG button selection
0: Reversal command action button
1: Jog action button
Tens digit: multi-function M button function selection
0: Invalid.
1: Jog run. Multi-function button as jog run button: run direction decided by
unit bit of F01.16. After setting V JOG ) function, the jog run function on the
keypad is invalid.
2: For/rev switching. Press this button to change the run direction when run:
then press the same button change to another direction. This function key is not
used as start key, only for signal switch
3: Free stop. Setup free stop function and stop mode F02.11 the same
function with 1 Jog run.
4: Switching to run command provide mode as the setup order of
F00.16.

94
 7 Detailed function specification

5: For/rev torque switching. After this function is valid, it can realize the
direction switching after torque model.
6～9: Reserved
Hundredth: terminal run command control
0: keypad VRESETy is invalid.
1: keypad (
'
§) is valid.
Thousandth: communication run command control
0: keypad fg; is invalid.
1: keypad VRESETy
is valid.

Multi-function key run command

F00.16 Range: 0～3 0
channel switching order selection
0: Keyboard control→terminal control→communication control
1: Keyboard control←→terminal control
2: Keyboard control←→communication control
3: Terminal control←→communication control
These parameters cooperate with multi-function key to run command channel
switching function: with special switch to command channel switching order.

1.Command channel priority terminal switch to(terminal function

code 49,50,51)→terminal run command channel selection(terminal
function code 52,53)→multi-function key switch→F01.15,when
switching to terminal control, be sure the terminal command
C%
Note
invalid. Terminal switch to and terminal run command channel
selection refer to F08 group parameter about the detailed
description of terminal function.
2. We suggest alter the mode at the stop state.

Motor speed display

F00.17 Range: 0.1～999.9% 100.0%
coefficient
This function code is used to check speed scale display error, there is no effect to
motor actual speed.
Line velocity display
F00.18 Range: 0.1～999.9% 1.0%
coefficient
This function code is used to check speed scale display error, there is no effect to
motor actual speed.
F00.19 Extended Port parts set Range: 0～10 0
0: Expansion card invalid
95
7 Detailed function specification

1: Reserved
2: Multi pump water supply card
3: Incremental PG encoder
4～10: Reserved
This function is for extended port expansion card parameter, after setting
expansion card, F00.19 will choose the expansion card number accordingly, then
we can use the expansion card normally. For example, when Extended Port add
PG expansion card, F00.19 should be set to 3.
Range: units digit: 0,1
Analog input terminal tens digit: 0,1
F00.20 0000
configuration hundreds digit: 0~2
thousands digit: 0~2
This parameter can configurate analog input AI1, AI2, EAI1, EAI2 to be current
input type or voltage input type.
Units digit: AI1 configuration
0:0~10V input
1:4~20mA input
Tens digit: AI2 configuration
0:-10~10V input
1:4~20mA input
Hundreds digit: EAI1 configuration
0:0~10V input
1:-10~10V input
2:4~20mA input
Thousands digit: EAI2 configuration
0:0~10V input
1:-10~10V input
2:4~20mA input

a
Note
Dial switching(SW1,SW2)under the left corner of CPU to the
corresponding position: when AI1,AI2 configuration.

Range: units digit: 0,1

Analog output terminal tens digit: 0,1
F00.21 0000
configuration hundreds digit: 0,1
thousands digit: 0,1
This parameter can configurate AO1, AO2, EAO1, EAO2 analog signal output to
be voltage type or current type.
Units digit: AO1 configuration
0:0~10V output
96
 7 Detailed function specification

1:4~20mA output
Tens digit: AO2 configuration
0:0~10V output
1:4~20mA output
Hundreds digit: EAO1 configuration
0:0~10V output
1:4~20mA output
Thousands digit: EAO2 configuration
0:0~10V output
1:4~20mA output

a
Note
Dial switching(SW1,SW2)under the left corner of CPU to the
corresponding position: when AI1,AI2 configuration.

Range: units digit: Reserved

Y output terminal tens digit: Reserved
F00.22 0000
configuration hundreds digit: Reserved
thousands digit: 0,1
Units digit ~ hundreds digit: Reserved
Thousands digit: Y4 output configuration
0: Open collector output
1: DO output
The thousands digit decide the Y4 output terminal type, when 0 means open
collector output, when 1 means high speed pulse DO output. .
F00.23 G/P type setup Range: 0, 1 0
0:G type. Adapt to constant torque load type.
1:P type. Adapt to fan & pump load type.
EN500/EN600 integrates G/P type design in full power range. F15 group motor
relative parameter will change automatically according to the G or P type.

a
Note
P type machine only can support V/F control .

F00.24 Motor control model Range: 0～2 0

0: V/F control
If we need to start the fan and water pump application , or the inverter should
drive one more AC motors, please choose the V/F control mode, when drive parts
of the synchronous machines, we also can choose V/F control.
1: Speedless Vector Control 1 (Comparing with the speed vector control 2,
the mode is more suitable to control the induction motor below 160KW,

97
7 Detailed function specification

supporting the speed and torque control)

Speedless sensor vector control run mode, mainly used to velocity control, torque
control in the application site which require high control performance. To get
better control performance, we need to set up motor parameter group F15
according to the motor nameplate details, and doing the self-learning to motor
parameter. One VFD can only drive one motor in vector control mode, and VFD
power need match up with motor, normally one class less or more of the VFD
power than motor is allowed.
2: with speed sensor vector control (support the speed and torque control)
When choose the closed-loop vector control mode, the AC motor should be
installed with an encoder, and the inverter should be installed with the same type
of the encoder. It can be used on the high-accuracy speed control & torque control
application. One inverter only can drive one AC motor, like Paper-make machine,
cranes, and elevator.
When using the closed-loop control, including setting motor parameter (F15
group), we should also set the encoder parameter group (F16),and the Extended
Port (F00.19) parameter.
F00.25 Monitor parameter 2 selection Range : 0～65 2
When user choose EN-LED4-D keypad , under monitoring mode we can use
F00.25 parameter to modify monitoring content of keypad digital display (LED2).
When user choose EN-LCD1 or EN-LCD2 keypad, under monitoring mode we
can use F00.25 parameter to change monitoring content of below LED.
For monitoring content of F00.25 parameter, please refer to description of F00.01
F00.26 Busbar voltage adjustment Range : 0.900～1.100 1.000
We can use this parameter to adjust the busbar voltage; to make the inverter bus
voltage is accordingly to the exact figures.
Parameter copying and Range: units digit: 0~2
F00.27 00
language selection tens digit: 0~2
Units digit: language selection. (Only valid for LCD keypad)
0: Chinese
1: English
2: Reserve
Tens digit: parameter upload and download (valid for LCD and digital
potentiometer keypad)
0: No action
1: Parameter upload
2: Parameter download

98
 7 Detailed function specification

7.2 Basic Run Function Parameter Group:F01

Main frequency input
F01.00 Range: 0～14 0
channel selection
Total 15 types input channel for selection to chose inverter input channel of the
main provide frequency,among 11~14 are reserve channel,currently there is no
corresponding function.
0:Operation keyboard digital setup. When main frequency setup initial
value to F01.01: modify F01.01 parameter to change main setting frequency with
operation keyboard: or with © © , button to modify the value of F01.01
1:AI1 analog setup. Main frequency setup confirmed by AI1 analog
voltage/ current, input range: 0~10V (AI1 jumper wire selection V side)or
4~20mA(AI1 jumper wire selection A side).
2:AI2 analog setup. Main frequency setup confirmed by AI2 analog
voltage/current, input range: -10~10V (AI2 jumper wire selection V side)or
4~20mA(AI2 jumper wire selection A side).
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup. When main frequency initial
value is parameter F01.01, through terminal UP/DOWN function to adjust the
main setting frequency. Terminal function setup into 16(frequency increase
progressively (UP))or 17(frequency decrease progressively control(DOWN)).
4:Communication provide(Communication address:1E01). Main
frequency provide by selection communication mode.
5:EAI1 analog setup. When extension analog input EAI1 is valid,main
frequency confirmed by EAI1 analog voltage/current,input range:-10~10V(EAI1
jumper wire selection V side)or 4~ 20mA(EAI1 jumper wire selection Aside).
Relevant extension card selection needed to use this setup function.
6:EAI2 analog setup. when extension analog input EAI2 valid,main
frequency setup by EAI2 analog voltage / current,input range:-10~10V(EAI2
jumper wire selection V side) or 4~ 20mA(EAI2 jumper wire selection A side).
Relevant extension card selection needed to use this setup function.
7:High speed pulse setup. main frequency setup by frequency signal of
terminal pulse(only X8 input),input pulse specification:voltage range 15~30V;
frequency range 0.00~50.00KHz.
8:Terminal pulse setup. main frequency setup by pulse width signal of
terminal pulse(only X8 input),input pulse specification:voltage range 15~30V;
pulse width range 0.1~999.9ms.
9:Terminal encoder setup.main frequency setup by terminal encoder
pulse(only combination input by X1 and X2) and frequency velocity set by
parameter F08.30.
99
7 Detailed function specification

10～14: Reserved

Analog provide is positive and negative polarity control,its prior to

command direction control: when main frequency provide is
AI2,EAI1,EAI2: and setup provide to be -10~10V,run direction
= confirmed by analog provide signal polarity completely,when PID
Note
run is valid, run direction confirmed by PID error polarity and
parameter F11.21 completely.

Excerpt terminal encoder provide (F01.00=9), main and auxiliary

provide channel cannot be set into the same frequency source: if
! they are the same: then panel would be light (ALM) and display
A-51.

Main frequency digital Range:0.00Hz~upper

F01.01 50.00Hz
setup limit frequency
When F01.00=0,3 or 4,F01.01 is the initial value of main frequency.
Main frequency digital
F01.02 Range: 00～11 00
control
Units digit: power down reserve setup
0:Main frequency power down reserve. When main frequency channel
provide is valid, power down in run status, current main frequency of run
frequency is recorded in parameter F01.01.
1: Main frequency power down no reserve.
Tens digit: halt reserve setup
0:Halt main frequency hold. When main frequency channel provide is
valid, current run frequency only recorded after halt.
1:Halt main frequency recovery F01.01. main setting frequency recorded
in software is recovery to value of parameter F01.01 after halt.
Hundreds digit: Set of communication presetting frequency dimension.( It is
valid for both main and salve frequency communication presetting)
0:Preset of absolute frequency mode(preset 5000 represent 50.00Hz).
1:Preset 10000 represent upper limit frequency (F01.11).

s.
Note
Only when parameter F01.00=0, 3, 4, it can be valid, after
power-fail or Stop storage function both are valid,stop the machine
first, it also can serve.

100
 7 Detailed function specification

Auxiliary frequency input

F01.03 Range : 0～20 20
channel select
VFD auxiliary provides frequency input channel has 21 input channels for
selection, for them 11~20 are Reserved channels, and currently there is no
relevant function:
0:Keyboard operation digital setup. When auxiliary frequency setup
initial value is parameter F01.04, modify parameter F01.04 to change auxiliary
setting frequency: or with
F01.04
© © , button modify the value of parameter

1:AI1 analog setup. Auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by AI1 analog

voltage /current, input range: 0~10V (AI1 jumper wire selection V side)or
4~20mA(AI1 jumper wire A side).
2:AI2 analog setup. Auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by AI2 analog
voltage/current, input range: -10~10V (AI2 jumper wire selection V side) or
4~20mA (AI2 jumper wire selection A side).
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup. Auxiliary frequency initial value
is parameter F01.04, through terminal UP/DOWN function to adjust auxiliary
setting frequency.
4:communication setting( Communication address:1E01). The initial
value of auxiliary frequency is for F01.04, it will determine by F05.00 of the
communication setting.
5:EAI1 analog setup. When extension analog input EAI1 is valid, auxiliary
frequency setup confirmed by EAI1 analog voltage/current, input range: -10~10V
(EAI1 jumper wire selection V side)or 4~20mA(EAI1 jumper wire selection A
side).
6:EAI2 analog setup. When extension analog input EAI2 is valid, auxiliary
frequency setup confirmed by EAI2 analog voltage/current, input range: -10~10V
(EAI2 jumper wire selection V side) or 4~20mA (EAI2 jumper wire selection A
side).
7:High speed pulse setup. Auxiliary frequency setup by frequency signal of
terminal pulse (only X8 input), input pulse specification: voltage range 5~30V;
frequency range 0.00~50.00 KHz.
8:Terminal pulse width setup. Auxiliary frequency setup by pulse width
signal of terminal pulse (only X8 input), input pulse specification: voltage range
15~30V; pulse width range 0.1~999.9ms.
9:Terminal encoder provide. Auxiliary frequency setup by terminal
encoder pulse (only X3 or X4 input), 0.01Hz is a fixed adjusting precision.
10～20: Reserved.

101
7 Detailed function specification

Analog provide is positive and negative polarity control,its prior to k

command direction control: when auxiliary frequency provide is

Note AI2,EAI1,EAI2 ,and setup provide is to be -10~10V,run direction
confirmed by analog provide signal polarity completely.

Except terminal encoder provide( F01.03=9),main and auxiliary

A! provide channel cannot setup to the same frequency source,when
they are the same,then panel light(ALM),and A-51 display.

Auxiliary frequency digital Range:0.00Hz~upper

F01.04 0.00Hz
setup limit frequency
When F01.03=0, 3 or 4, F01.04 is the initial frequency value of auxiliary
frequency.
Auxiliary frequency digital
F01.05 Range: 00～11 11
control
Units digit: power down reserve setup
0:Auxiliary frequency power down reserve. When auxiliary frequency
channel provide is valid and power down at run mode, the current auxiliary setting
frequency reserve in parameter F01.04.
1:Auxiliary frequency power down no reserve.
tens digit: halt reserve setup
0:Halt auxiliary frequency hold. When auxiliary frequency channel
provide is valid, recording current run frequency only after halt.
1:Halt auxiliary frequency recovery parameter F01.04 .auxiliary setting
frequency in software recording is recovered the value of parameter F01.04 after
halt.

s= r
Note
Only when F01.03=0,3,4 is valid.

Main and auxiliary provide

F01.06 Range: 0～7 0
calculating setup
This parameter is to select frequency provide channel: and through the complex of
main frequency source and auxiliary frequency source to achieve frequency
provide.
0:Main frequency. Complex frequency of current is main frequency.
1: Auxiliary frequency. Complex frequency of current is auxiliary

102
 7 Detailed function specification

frequency.
2: Plus(polarity oppose of complex and main frequency,complex frequency
is zero).
3:Minus(polarity oppose of complex and auxiliary frequency,complex
frequency is zero).
4:Multiplication(polarity opposed of main and auxiliary frequency:
complex frequency is zero).
5:Max(the max frequency of main and auxiliary absolute value).
6:Min(the min frequency of main and auxiliary absolute value).
7:Selection no-zero value(auxiliary is not negative,main frequency
prior;auxiliary is negative,complex frequency is zero)
r1.The initial polarity of main and auxiliary frequency cannot \
change after main and auxiliary operation.
2.When main and auxiliary frequency channel are complex
value,and both setup into power down reserve: parameter F01.01
Note and F01.04 reserve separately the changed part of main frequency
and auxiliary frequency in the complex frequency when power
down.

Auxiliary frequency
F01.07 Range : 0.00～10.00 1.00
provide coefficient
Parameter F01.07 can adjust auxiliary provide frequency gain.
Coefficient after complex of
F01.08 Range: 0.00～10.00 1.00
main and auxiliary frequency
This parameter is to setup frequency flexibly and calculates the gain of complex
setting frequency by main and auxiliary frequency.
Auxiliary frequency range
F01.09 Range: 0, 1 0
selection
0:Relative high limit frequency. Auxiliary frequency setup range:
0.00Hz~high limit frequency×F01.10.
1:Relative main frequency. Auxiliary frequency setup range: 0.00Hz~main
frequency×F01.10.
Auxiliary frequency source
F01.10 Range: 0.00～1.00 1.00
scope
This parameter cooperate with F01.09 define the scope of auxiliary provide
frequency. Auxiliary provide frequency high limit value is restrained by the
frequency selected by parameter F01.09 through parameter F01.10 gain
calculation.

103
7 Detailed function specification

Range: lower limit

F01.11 Upper limit frequency 50.00Hz
frequency～600.00Hz
This parameter’s max setting frequency of all run modes should be modification
carefully according to the motor nameplate details.
Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
F01.12 Low limit frequency 0.40Hz
frequency
Low limit frequency
F01.13 Range : 0～3 2
run mode
Sleep run hysteresis Range: 0.01Hz~upper limit
F01.14 0.01Hz
frequency frequency
0: As low limit frequency run.
1: As setting frequency run.
2: As zero frequency run.
3: Sleep: PWM clocked at sleep mode.
When actual setting frequency lower than low limit frequency, low limit frequency
run mode selection 0,then drive run at low limit frequency; low limit frequency run
mode selection 1,drive continuously run according to setting frequency; low limit
frequency run mode selection 2,drive continuously low output frequency and run at
zero frequency; low limit frequency run mode selection 3,immediately clock the
output and display frequency decline slowly to zero, when provide value over low
limit frequency, drive restart to accelerate run from 0Hz to provide value after
through F01.14 stagnant loop.

When F01.13=3: this parameter can finish sleep function to achieve

energy saving run and avoid drive to start frequently at threshold
Note value through width of return difference.

F01.15 Run command channel selection Range: 0～2 0

0: Operation keyboard run control. Start and stop with
1: Terminal run command control. Terminal X1 is forward (FWD),X2 is
reverse(REV)during the function code X1~X8 setup. Other terminal can also be
regarded as for/rev input terminal.
2: Communication runs command control. Start and stop with
communication mode.

104
 7 Detailed function specification

r1.Drive can change run command channel through switch of

multi-function key,terminal command channel in halt and
run,carefully modify command channel after confirm in site the
permission to run command channel modification. After the
! command channel modification: keyboard button setup valid
or not by parameter F00.15.
2.After run command channel modification,frequency channel can

—
be defined by parameter F18.00,F18.01,F18.02 .or defined by
parameter F01.00,F01.03,F01.06 and multi-function terminal.

Range: units digit: 0,1

F01.16 Run direction setup 00
tens digit: 0~2
Units digit: Keyboard command for/rev setup (only valid to keyboard inching
command)
0: Forward.
1: Reverse.
Tens digit: for/rev forbid (suitable for all command channel, not include
inching function)
0: For/rev available.
1: Reverse not available (imposing on reverse, stop as the halt mode).
2: Forward not available (imposing on forward, stop as the halt mode).
F01.17 Acceleration time 1 Range: 1～60000 Depend on type
F01.18 Deceleration time 1 Range:1～60000 Depend on type
Acceleration time is interval accelerate from zero frequency to high limit
frequency, deceleration time is the interval decelerate from high limit frequency to
zero frequency. The unit defined by F01.19. Example: F01.17=100, F01.19=1,
acceleration time 1 is 10.0 seconds.

1.EN500/EN600 series drive defines 15 acceleration and

deceleration time, only acceleration and deceleration time 1
a
Note
defined here, acceleration and deceleration 2~15 defined in
parameter F04.16~F04.43.
2.acceleration and deceleration 1~15 select time unit through
parameter F1.19,factory default unit is 0.1 second.

F01.19 Accelerate/decelerate time unit Range: 0～2 1

This function can define acceleration and deceleration time unit.
0:0.01s

105
 7 Detailed function specification

1:0.1s
2:1s

1.The function is valid to all acceleration and deceleration excerpt

d> for inching run.
Note 2.Advise to select 0.1s as the time unit.
V. J

F01.20 Accelerate/decelerate mode selection Range: 0, 1 0

0:Line acc/dece mode. Output frequency raises or decline as the constant
slope, as fig.7-1.
1: S curve acc/dece mode. Output frequency raise or decline as the S curve:
as fig.7-2.
i . Freq. A Freq.
50.00Hz
50.00Hz ① ③

② ②

time ③ ① time
4 4 *
t1 t2 * t1 t2

Fig. 7-1 Line acc/dece Fig. 7-2 S curve acc/dece

S curve acceleration
F01.21 Range: 10.0%～50.0% 20.0%
initiation segment time
S curve acceleration up
F01.22 Range: 10.0%～70.0% 60.0%
segment time
S curve deceleration
F01.23 Range: 10.0%～50.0% 20.0%
initiation segment time
S curve deceleration up
F01.24 Range: 10.0%～70.0% 60.0%
segment time
F01.21~F01.24 select S curve acceleration and deceleration mode(F01.20＝
1)valid only under acceleration and deceleration, and F01.21+F01.22≤90% ,
F01.23+F01.24≤90%.
S curve starts interval time as fig.7-2③, output frequency changed slope increase
slowly from zero.
S curve up interval time as fig.7-2②, output frequency changed slope is constant.
S curve ends interval time as fig.7-2①, output frequency changed slope decrease
slowly to zero.

106
 7 Detailed function specification

e.
Note
S curve acc/dece mode is suitable for the start and stop of elevator,
conveyor belt, transport and transfer load so on.

Range:0.00Hz~upper
F01.25 Keyboard jog run frequency 5.00Hz
limit frequency
Range:0.00Hz~upper
F01.26 Terminal jog run frequency 5.00Hz
limit frequency
F01.27 Jog interval time Range: 0.0～100.0s 0.0s
F01.28 Jog acceleration time Range: 0.1～6000.0s 20.0s
F01.29 Jog deceleration time Range: 0.1～6000.0s 20.0s
F01.25, F1.26 defines keyboard jog and terminal jog run frequency, when jog run:
accelerate as the zero frequency, and not effect by the start mode defined by
parameter F02.00. When jog command revocation, stop as setting halt mode,
when input another command during the deceleration, accelerate or decelerate
according to the current frequency.
F1.27 defies valid command interval time at continuously jog. When jog
command invalid, the time restart jog command is short than jog interval time, jog
command ignore here.
F1.28, F1.29 defines jog run acceleration and deceleration time, fixed unit is 1s.

107
7 Detailed function specification

7.3 Start, stop, forward/reverse, brake function parameter group:

F02
F02.00 Start running mode Range: 0～2 0
0: Start from starting frequency. After receiving start command by setting
F02.01 delay time, the inverter starts after setting F02.02 starting frequency and
F02.03 starting frequency duration.
1: First brake, and then start from starting frequency. First brake the
current from DC and then from time (F02.04, F02.05), and then start after setting
starting frequency and starting frequency duration set by F02.03.
2: Speed tracking start. This mode can be supported by the entire motor
control model at the present.

1.Start-up mode 0: It is suggested to use Start-up mode 0 for general

purpose applications and for general drive synchronous motor.
2. Start-up mode 1: Suitable for small inertia load, for example,
forward and reverse occurs when the motor is not driven.
3. Start-up mode 2: Suitable for the starting of large inertia load

<3.
Note
before stopping stably. Generally this mode is used when restarting
after power failure, fault self-recovery and other functions. The
following points need to be noticed when this Start-up mode is used:
3.1 When the inverter stops freely, restart the inverter after a few
seconds. If over-current fault occurs when starting, please extend the
F02.08 time.
3.2 Do not modify the set frequency when the inverter starts in slow
down process.
4 .When torque model is valid, we suggest use the start mode 2.
V
F02.01 Starting delay time Range: 0.0～60.0s 0.0s
Starting delay time refers to the waiting time before the inverter is started after
receiving running command.
F02.02 Starting frequency Range: 0.0～10.00Hz 0.00Hz
Starting frequency duration
F02.03 Range: 0.0～60.0s 0.0s
time
Starting frequency refers to the initial frequency when the inverter is started, as
shown in Fig. 7-3 fs; starting frequency holding time refers to consecutive running
time during which the inverter runs at the starting frequency, as shown in Fig. 7-3
t1.

108
 7 Detailed function specification

i ,

fmax

fs
Start
time
Freq.
Starting
t1 time
Fig. 7-3 Starting frequency and starting time

Starting frequency is not limited by lower limit frequency.

Note
Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0%
DC braking current when
F02.04 (G type inverter rated 30.0%
starting
current)
DC braking time when
F02.05 Range: 0.0～30.0s 0.0s
starting
When F02.00=1, F02.04, F02.05 valid, and stop mode is deceleration stop, as shown
in Fig. 7-4.
The setting of starting DC braking current is with respect to the percentage of
inverter rated output current. When starting DC braking time is 0.0 second, no DC
braking process.

Output Freq.

DC brake Time
Output volt. quantity
(Valid value)

Time
DC brake time

Running command

Fig. 7-4 Starting mode 1 description

109
7 Detailed function specification

Speed track starting

F02.06 Range: 0～2 2
frequency selection
0: Current setting frequency.
1: Running frequency before power down.
2: Speed track auxiliary starting frequency.
Select frequency closed to the current running frequency of the motor so as to
track the current running revolving speed of the motor. For example, when current
running frequency is closed to current setting frequency, then select 0 and start to
search from current setting frequency.
Speed track auxiliary Range:0.00Hz~upper
F02.07 30.00Hz
starting frequency limit frequency
This parameter defines when 2 is selected in F02.06 parameter, the starting
searching frequency when revolving track is started.
Speed track starting
F02.08 Range: 0.00～10.00s 0.10s
waiting time
When 2 is selected in F02.00, if the inverter checks that the running command is
valid, the revolving speed is searched after the time defined by F2.08.
Speed track current control
F02.09 Range: 1～20 2
coefficient
This parameter define the speed search process tracking current, the bigger of the
value , the faster it can track.
Speed track searching
F02.10 Range: 0.1～30.0 4.00
speed time
This parameter can be modified to improve speed track time.
On SVC control, the minimum unit of speed tracking for search speed time
is 0.1s；
On V/F control, the minimum unit of speed tracking for search speed time is
1s；
1. F02.06～F02.09 parameter only can be started on the speed
3
Note
variator, the start is valid.
2.F02.10 parameter can be used for both V/F model and SVC
model .

F02.11 Stop mode Range: 0～2 0

0: Deceleration stop. After receiving stop command, the inverter reduces
output frequency gradually according to the set deceleration time, the inverter
stops when frequency is 0.
1: Free stop. After receiving stop command, the inverter stops output
110
 7 Detailed function specification

immediately, and the load stops freely according to mechanical inertia.

2: Deceleration + DC braking stop. After receiving stop command, the
inverter reduces output frequency gradually according to the set deceleration time.
When reaching F02.14 starting frequency of stop braking, After F02.15 defines
DC braking waiting time, the inverter starts DC braking, as shown in Fig. 7-5.
Deceleration stop holding Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F02.12 0.00Hz
frequency limiting frequency
Deceleration stop holding
F02.13 Range: 0.00～10.00s 0.00s
time
The parameters F02.12 and F02.13 define inverter’s deceleration stop holding
function. When the frequency reaches set value of F02.12 in deceleration, it stops
deceleration, and maintains the set time of F02.13, and enters deceleration state.
This parameter is only valid for stop mode 0.
Stop DC braking starting
F02.14 Range: 0.00～15.00Hz 0.50Hz
frequency
Sop DC braking waiting
F02.15 Range:0.00～30.00s 0.00s
time
Range: 0.0～100.0%
F02.16 Stop DC braking current （G type machine rated 0.0%
current）
F02.17 Stop DC braking time Range: 0.0～30.0s 0.0s
Range: 0.0～100.0%
Stop auxiliary braking
F02.18 （G type machine rated 0.0%
current
current）
F02.19 Stop auxiliary braking time Range: 0.0～100.0s 0.0s
F02.14 ~ F02.19 parameter defines the current and duration inputting to the motor
in the stop DC braking state. If F02.17, F02.19 or F02.14 parameter is 0.0s, then
no DC braking process.
Auxiliary DC brake means when the inverter stops DC brake is finished give the
second stage DC braking. Role in some special circumstances require rapid
braking, and stop long time in the state of DC braking, but to prevent motor heat
circumstances.

111
7 Detailed function specification

Output freq.

Stop brake
Starting freq.
Time
Auxiliary brake quantity
Output volt.
(Valid value) DC brake quantity

Time
Al
Auxiliary brake time
Stop DC brake time
Running command

Fig. 7-5 Deceleration stop + DC braking

F02.20 Forward/reverse dead zone time Range:0.0～3600.0s 0.0s
F02.21 Forward/reverse switching mode Range: 0, 1 0
0: Over zero switchover
1: Over starting frequency switchover
Forward/reverse dead zone time refers to the process in which the inverter
operates from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward. After output
frequency reaches the defined frequency in switchover mode, entering in to the
transition time, as shown in Fig. 7-6 t1, within transition time t1, output frequency
is 0Hz.
Output

\ time

\7 t1

Fig. 7-6 Forward/reverse dead zone time

112
 7 Detailed function specification

Energy consumption
F02.22 Range: 0～2 0
braking selection
0: No energy consumption braking.
1: Energy consumption braking 1(No braking while halting).
2: Energy consumption braking 2(Braking while halting). This option can
prevent over-voltage fault caused by high busbar voltage during the halting
process.

Please set the function parameter correctly according to the actual k

3
Note
use condition. Otherwise, control feature will be affected. Before
starting this function, make sure the inverter has built-in brake
unit and brake resistor.

Energy consumption Range:100.0~145.0%

F02.23 125.0%
braking voltage (rated busbar voltage )
Energy consumption
F02.24 Range:0.0～100.0% 100.0%
braking use rate
Energy consumption braking function is only valid for built-in brake unit. F02.23
defines energy consumption braking busbar voltage threshold value, F02.24
parameter adjusts duty ratio brake unit. The higher the brake use rate is, the
greater the brake unit duty ratio is, and the more apparent the brake effect is, but
when fluctuation of the brake process busbar voltage is more apparent, user needs
to select proper parameter based on brake resistor and brake power.
F02.25 Encryption time Range:0～65535h 0
When F02.25>1, the encryption time is available. When the running time exceed
the time defined by F02.25, the inverter will stop and it will restart after decode.
F02.26 Reserved

113
 7 Detailed function specification

7.4 V/F control parameter group: F03

F03.00 V/F curve set Range: 0～4 0
0: Constant torque curve.
1: Degression torque curve 1.
2: Degression torque curve 2.
3: Degression torque curve 3.
4: V/F curve setting (V/F frequency and voltage cannot be 0 or Max. value).
This function code defines EN500/EN600 flexible V/F setting mode to satisfy
different load characteristics. 4 kinds of fixed curves and one customized curve
can be selected according to definition of F03.00.
When F3.00=0, V/F curve is Constant torque curve feature, as shown in Fig. 7-7a
curve 0.
When F03.00=1, V/F curve is 2.0 order power degressive torque characteristic, as
shown in Fig. 7-7a curve 3.
When F03.00=2, V/F curve is 1.7 order power degressive torque characteristic, as
shown in Fig. 7-7a curve 2.
When F03.00=3, V/F curve is 1.2 order power degressive torque characteristic, as
shown in Fig. 7-7a curve 1.
User can choose 1, 2, 3 V/F curve running mode according to load characteristic
to reach better energy-saving effect when the inverter drives degressive torque
load such as blower and water pump etc.
When F03.00=4, user can set V/F curve by setting F03.04 ~ F03.11 parameter.
As shown in Fig. 7-7b, V/F curve can be defined freely by setting (V1, F1),
(V2, F2), (V3, F3), (V4, F4) to meet special load environment.

Voltage %
Output voltage 100%
Rated voltage V3
0 V2
1
2 V1
3 V0
Freq. Hz
»
Output freq. F0 F1 F2 F3 Fb
0 V0~V3: The 1st-4th voltage percentage of multi section V/F
Rated freq.
F0~F3: The 1st-4th frequency points of multi section V/F
Fb: Rated frequency

Fig. 7-7 a V/F curve b User-setting V/F curve

114
 7 Detailed function specification

F03.01 Torque boost mode Range: 0, 1 0

0: Manual boost. Torque boost voltage is totally decided by parameter
F03.02, whose feature is that the boost voltage is fixed, but magnetic saturation of
the motor is occurs often to the light-load.

Boost voltage = F03.02 ×motor rated voltage

100
1: Auto torque boost. Torque boost voltage changes when the stator current
of the motor changes, the greater the stator current is, magnetic saturation boost
voltage is.

F03.02 Inverter output current

Boost voltage = ×motor rated voltage×
100 2×inverter rated current
Depend on
F03.02 Torque boost Range: 0.0～12.0%
type
Torque boost cut-off Range:0.0~100.0%
F03.03 100.0%
frequency (motor rated frequency )
Improving inverter low torque characteristic, the output voltage can be
compensated

Motor rated Motor rated

volt. volt.

Boost Boost
volt. Volt.
Cut-off Motor Cut-off Motor
Freq. rated freq. Freq. rated freq.
a Degression torque curve Torque boost b Constant torque curve Torque boost

Fig. 7-8 Torque boost

1.F03.02 for increasing torque setting to this parameter can cause k

motor heating or over current protection.

s
Note
2.When driving synchronous machine ,User is advised to adopt
manual torque boost and adjust V/F curve according to motor
parameter and usage occasion when driving synchronous motor.

115
7 Detailed function specification

Range: 0.00～V/F frequency

F03.04 V/F frequency value 0 10.00Hz
value1
Range:0.00～V/F voltage
F03.05 V/F voltage value 0 20.00%
value1
Range: V/F frequency value
F03.06 V/F frequency value1 20.00Hz
0～V/F frequency value2
Range: V/F voltage value0～
F03.07 V/F voltage value1 40.00%
V/F voltage value2
Range: V/F frequency value1～
F03.08 V/F frequency value2 25.00Hz
V/F frequency value3
Range: V/F voltage value1～
F03.09 V/F voltage value2 50.00%
V/F voltage value3
Range: V/F frequency value2～
F03.10 V/F frequency value3 40.00Hz
upper limiting frequency
Range: V/F voltage value2～
F03.11 V/F voltage value3 80.00%
100.00%(motor rated voltage)
F03.04 ~ F03.11 defines multi-step V/F curve. Note that 4 voltage points and
frequency points relationship shall be satisfied: V0<V1<V2<V3, F0<F1<F2<F3,
for details, please refer to Fig. 7-8b.
If the voltage at low frequency is set too high, motor overheat or even over
burning may cause, over current protection may occur to the inverter.
V/F oscillation suppression
F03.12 Range: 0～255 10
factor
Under V/F control, this parameter can be set properly to prevent motor vibration
of the motor. When the inverter operates at low frequency without load, the
greater the motor power is, the greater the vibration of motor will be. This
parameter can be increased to restrain the vibration of motor. When carrier freq. is
smaller, this parameter can be adjusted lower to reduce vibration.

116
 7 Detailed function specification

7.5 Auxiliary running parameter group: F04

Range: 0.00Hz～upper limiting
F04.00 Jump freq. 1 0.00Hz
frequency
Range: 0.00Hz～upper limiting
F04.01 Jump freq. 1 range 0.00Hz
frequency
Range: 0.00Hz～upper limiting
F04.02 Jump freq. 2 0.00Hz
frequency
Range: 0.00Hz～upper limiting
F04.03 Jump freq. 2 range 0.00Hz
frequency
Range: 0.00Hz～upper limiting
F04.04 Jump freq. 3 0.00Hz
frequency
Range: 0.00Hz～upper limiting
F04.05 Jump freq. 3 range 0.00Hz
frequency
F04.00 ~ F04.05 is set to keep inverter’s output frequency away from resonance
frequency of mechanical load. Inverter setting frequency can jump around some
frequency point according to mode as shown in Fig. 7-9, 3 jumping ranges can be
defined at most.
i Set freq. after adjustment
Jump freq. 3 Jump range3

Jump freq. 2 Jump range2

Jump freq. 1
i Jump range1
. Output freq.

Fig. 7-9 Jump freq. and range

F04.06 Slip freq. gain Range: 0.0～300.0% 0.0%
F04.07 Slip compensation limit Range: 0.0～250.0% 100.0%
F04.08 Slip compensation time constant Range: 0.1～25.0s 2.0s
This function can adjust output frequency properly as the load varies to
compensate slip frequency of the asynchronous motor dynamically, so that control
motor speed is in constant value. If acting with automatic torque boost function,
better low speed moment characteristic can be obtained. As shown in Fig.7-10.
Slip compensation range = Slip compensation limit (F04.06)× Rated slip .
Rated slip = F15.03 ×60 / Np - F15.04.
Np is motor polarity.

117
7 Detailed function specification

Slip compensation is 100%

A Output current
/
150% « »

100%
Before slip compensation
After slip compensation
50%
Motor revolving speed

Fig. 7-10 Slip freq. Compensation

Depend on
F04.09 Carrier frequency Range: 0.5～16.0K
type
Carrier freq. mainly affects motor noise and heat loss when running. Relationship
among carrier freq, motor noise, and leak current is as follows:
When carrier freq. goes up (↑), the motor noise is reduced (↓), leakage current of
the motor is increased (↑), and the interference is increased (↑);
When carrier freq. goes down (↓), the motor noise is increased (↑), leakage current
of the motor is decreased (↓), and the interference is decreased (↓).
When the ambient temperature is high, and the motor load is heavy, reduce the
carrier freq. properly to reduce thermal loss to the inverter.
Table7-1 model and Carrier freq. relationship
Model Max. Carrier freq. Factory Default

0.4KW～1.5KW 16KHz 6KHz

2.2KW～11KW 16KHz 5KHz

15KW～55KW 8KHz 4KHz

75～200KW 6KHz 2KHz

220KW above 4KHz 2KHz

1.To get better control characteristic, it is suggested that the ratio

of max. running frequency between carrier frequency and inverter
be not smaller than 36.
Note 2.Error exists in current displayed value when carrier frequency is
small.

118
 7 Detailed function specification

Range: units digit: 0,1

tens digit: 0,1
F04.10 PWM optimized adjustment 0010
hundreds digit: 0,1
thousands digit: 0,1
Units digit: Carrier freq. is adjusted automatically according to temperature
0: Banned.
1: Allowed.
Carrier frequency changes based on temperature, which refers to inverter check
that the radiator temperature is relatively high, it automatically reduces carrier
freq., so as to reduce inverter temperature rise. When radiator temperature is
relatively low, carrier freq. gradually restores to set value. This function can
reduce inverter overheat alarm.
Digit: low speed carrier freq. limit mode
0: No limit.
1: Limit. Limit carrier wave at low speed, improve stability performance of
revolving speed at low speed.
Hundreds digit: carrier wave modulation system
0: 3 phase modulation.
1: 2 phase and 3 phase modulation.
Thousands digit: Asynchronous modulation, synchronization mode (valid
under V/F control)
0: Asynchronous modulation.
1: Synchronous modulation (under 85Hz: Asynchronous modulation).

r 1.When units digit is set as 1, after reaching overheat warning

alarm point, carrier wave will decrease to 1.5KHz; when the
temperature decrease to 5℃ lower than overheat warning alarm
point, carrier freq. will automatically rise to the set carrier freq.
2. Synchronous modulation, it means that carrier freq. changes
when output frequency changes, it guarantees that the ratio
(carrier ratio) between the two does not change, generally used
Note when output frequency is high, conducive to input voltage quality.
When output frequency is low(85Hz or below, generally no need of
synchronous modulation , so at this time carrier freq. and output
frequency ratio is relatively high, advantages of asynchronous
modulation are more apparent. When operating frequency is
higher than 85Hz , Synchronous modulation is valid, frequency
v lower than this is fixed with asynchronous modulation mode.
j

119
7 Detailed function specification

F04.11 AVR function Range : 0～2 2

AVR namely automatic voltage regulation function, it indicates that the inverter
can output constant voltage by AVR function when the inverter inputs voltage
fluctuates.
0: No action
1: Action all the time
2: No action only during deceleration

1.When input voltage is higher than rated value, under normal

situation, F04.11=1 shall be set. F02.11= 0 namely inverter is in
deceleration stop, motor deceleration time short time running
current will be greater. But the motor decrease speed placidly
d.
Note
with small run current and long Dec time if choose AVR action
all the time.
2.When motor system vibration occurs due to AVR function, set
F04.11= 0, namely AVR function is invalid.
3.This function is valid in V/F control mode.

F04.12 Reserved

Automatic energy saving

F04.13 Range: 0, 1 0
operation
0: No action
1: Action
To reach better energy-saving effect, automatic energy-saving purpose can be
obtained by checking load current.
When motor runs with no-load or light-load, energy-saving can be realized by
checking load current, and properly adjusting input voltage. Auto energy-saving
operation is mainly used in applications like stable load and revolving speed.

1. This function is generally used in load like blower and water

pump.
Note 2. This function is valid only in V/F mode.

120
 7 Detailed function specification

Acceleration time 2 and 1 Range: 0.00Hz~upper

F04.14 0.00Hz
switchover frequency limit frequency
Deceleration time 2 and 1 Range: 0.00Hz~upper
F04.15 0.00Hz
switchover frequency limit frequency
This function is used in the process of the inverter running, and we should adopted
the acceleration time and deceleration for different applications.
During the acceleration process, if the frequency is lower than F04.14, we choose
acceleration time 2, if the running frequency is bigger than F04.14, we choose
acceleration time 1, during the deceleration process, if the running frequency is
bigger than F04.15, then we choose deceleration time 1 , if the running frequency is
lower than F14.05, then we choose deceleration time 2.
When using terminal for choose the deceleration time,F04.14,
F04.15 function is invalid.
Note

F04.16 Acceleration time 2 Range: 1～60000 200

F04.17 Deceleration time 2 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.18 Acceleration time 3 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.19 Deceleration time 3 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.20 Acceleration time 4 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.21 Deceleration time 4 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.22 Acceleration time 5 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.23 Deceleration time 5 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.24 Acceleration time 6 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.25 Deceleration time 6 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.26 Acceleration time 7 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.27 Deceleration time 7 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.28 Acceleration time 8 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.29 Deceleration time 8 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.30 Acceleration time 9 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.31 Deceleration time 9 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.32 Acceleration time 10 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.33 Deceleration time 10 Range: 1～60000 200

121
7 Detailed function specification

F04.34 Acceleration time 11 Range: 1～60000 200

F04.35 Deceleration time 11 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.36 Acceleration time 12 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.37 Deceleration time 12 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.38 Acceleration time 13 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.39 Deceleration time 13 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.40 Acceleration time 14 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.41 Deceleration time 14 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.42 Acceleration time 15 Range: 1～60000 200
F04.43 Deceleration time 15 Range: 1～60000 200
EN500/EN600 defines 15 kinds of acceleration/deceleration time, select
acceleration/deceleration time 1 ~ 15 during the inverter running by different
combinations of control terminal. Please refer to the definitions of
acceleration/deceleration time terminal function in F08.18 ~ F08.25. Cooperating
with simple PLC function can also realize each step of PLC adopting different
acceleration/deceleration time to complete specific requirements.
The time unit of acceleration/deceleration time 2 ~ 15 above is the same as that of
acceleration/deceleration time 1, all are decided by F01.19 parameter of
acceleration/deceleration time unit.

Ol
Note
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 is defined in F01.17 and F01.18.

122
 7 Detailed function specification

7.6 Communication control parameter group: F05

F05.00 Protocol selection Range: 0~6 0

0: Modbus protocol .
1: Reserved.
2: Profibus protocol, external expansion card needs to be purchased if
needed.
3: CANlink protocol, external expansion card needs to be purchased if
needed.
4: CANopen protocol, external expansion card needs to be purchased if
needed.
5: Free protocol 1. Can realize the revision of all EN500/EN600 function
parameters
6: Free protocol 2. Can only realize the revision of part EN500/EN600
function parameters
Range: units digit: 0~8
Baud rate
F05.01 tens digit: 0~3 005
configuration
hundreds digit: 0~6
F05.01 is for choosing communication baud rate when using different
communication modules.
Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus Baud rate selection
0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
4:4800BPS
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
Tens digit: Profibus_DP Baud rate selection
0：115200BPS
1：208300BPS
2：256000BPS
3：512000BPS
Hundreds digit: CanLink and CANopen Baud rate selection
0:20K
1:50K
2:100K
123
7 Detailed function specification

3:125K
4:250K
5:500K
6:1M
Range: units digit:0~5
F05.02 Data format tens digit :0~3 000
hundreds digit: 0,1
Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus protocol data format
0: 1-8-1 format, no parity, RTU. 1 for start bit, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop bit,
no parity’s RTU communication mode.
1: 1-8-1 format, even parity, RTU. 1 for start bit, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop
bit, even parity’s RTU communication mode.
2: 1-8-1 format, odd parity, RTU. 1 for start bit, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop
bit, odd parity’s RTU communication mode.
3: 1-7-1 format, no parity, ASCII. 1 for start bit, 7 data bits, 1 for stop bit,
no parity’s ASCII communication mode.
4: 1-7-1 format, even parity, ASCII. 1 for start bit, 7 data bits, 1 for stop bit,
even parity’s ASCII communication mode.
5: 1-7-1 format, odd parity, ASCII. 1 for start bit, 7 data bits, 1 for stop bit,
odd parity’s ASCII communication mode.
Tens digit: Profibus_DP protocol data format
0: PPO1communication format
1: PPO2communication format
2: PPO3communication format
3: PPO5communication format
Hundreds digit: Modbus agreement or free protocol response selection
Under the condition that Modbus or protocol agreement and the hundreds of
F05.02 is 1, when slave sends mainframe the demand of running, frequency revise
and hide parameter inside, the slave is without response to increase the slave
response speed. But when mainframe reads inverter parameter, status or revises
inverter any parameter, the hundreds of F05.02 would not influence the slave
response.
F05.03 Local address Range: 0~247 1
During serial port communication, this function code is used to identify inverter’s
address.
Under free protocol communication, 00 is set and the inverter is master station,
can be the Master-slave communication.
Under Modbus communication, 00 is broadcast address. When setting broadcast
address, it can only receive and execute upper computer broadcast command,
124
 7 Detailed function specification

while cannot respond to upper computer.

Communication overtime
F05.04 Range:0.0~1000.0s 0.0s
checkout time
When serial port communication fails and its continuous time exceed set value of
this function code, the inverter judges it as communication failure.
The inverter would not detect serial port communication signal, namely this
function ineffective when set value is 0.

Communication
F05.05 Range: 0.0~1000.0s 0.0s
error checkout time
When serial port communication fails and its continuous time exceed set value of
this function code, the inverter judges it as communication failure.
The inverter would not detect serial port communication signal, namely this
function ineffective when set value is 0.
Range: 0~200ms
F05.06 Local response delay time 5ms
(Modbus is valid)
Local response delay time represents the time within which the inverter serial port
receives and executes command from upper device and then responds to upper
device.
Main & sub inverter
F05.07 communication frequency Range: 0~500% 100%
setting percentage
After setting this parameter proportion when frequency sent from main inverter, as
the input source of communication frequency of sub inverter, one inverter can
control multiple devices with different proportional frequency.

&
Note
This parameter is valid only when inverter is master slave station
and the frequency given channel is communication given.

Communication virtual
F05.08 Range: 00~FFH 00H
input terminal enabled
Bit0: CX1 virtual input terminal enabled
Bit1: CX2 virtual input terminal enabled
Bit2: CX3 virtual input terminal enabled
Bit3: CX4 virtual input terminal enabled
Bit4: CX5 virtual input terminal enabled
Bit5: CX6 virtual input terminal enabled
Bit6: CX7 virtual input terminal enabled
Bit7: CX8 virtual input terminal enabled

125
7 Detailed function specification

Communication virtual input

F05.09 Range: 0,1 0
terminal joining node
0: Independent node. Communication virtual terminal function is only set in
F05.10 ~ F05.17.
1: Terminal node. Communication virtual terminal function is only set in
F08.18 ~ F08.25, regardless of X1 ~ X8 valid, or CX1 ~ CX8 valid all execute
this setting function , X1 ~ X8 corresponds to CX1 ~ CX8.
Communication virtual terminal
F05.10 Range: 0~90 0
CX1 function
Communication virtual terminal
F05.11 Range: 0~90 0
CX2 function
Communication virtual terminal
F05.12 Range: 0~90 0
CX3 function
Communication virtual terminal
F05.13 Range: 0~90 0
CX4 function
Communication virtual terminal
F05.14 Range: 0~90 0
CX5 function
Communication virtual terminal
F05.15 Range: 0~90 0
CX6 function
Communication virtual terminal
F05.16 Range: 0~90 0
CX7 function
Communication virtual terminal
F05.17 Range: 0~90 0
CX8 function
Communication virtual terminal CX1 ~ CX8 function and terminal X1 ~ X8
function is different.

The communication virtual terminal function is realized by setting

3
Note
the Modbus address and 1D09

Input mapping application

F05.18 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 1
Input mapping application
F05.19 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 2
Input mapping application
F05.20 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 3
Input mapping application
F05.21 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 4
Input mapping application
F05.22 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 5
Input mapping application
F05.23 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 6
Input mapping application
F05.24 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 7

126
 7 Detailed function specification

Input mapping application

F05.25 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 8
Input mapping application
F05.26 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 9
Input mapping application
F05.27 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 10
Input parameter address mapping.
This parameter is used for mapping waiting for input. Integral part corresponds
with group no. of the parameter, while decimal part corresponds with intra-class
reference (parameter series no. within group parameter). For example: Setting
F05.18=00.00 indicates that mapping F05.18=00.00 as input parameter1.

r 1. xx represents function code.

2. F25.xx represents not mapping.
\
3. By this way, some incontinuity parameter can be together to
read the data, and using the input mapping application parameter
to increase the communication efficiency. For example, if reading
Note F00.00, F01.10, F02.02 and F03.04, you can map the
above-mentioned parameters to F05.18, F05.19, F05.20, F05.21 and
F05.22. Under RTU communication mode, only 1 continuous
reading 5 groups of parameter commands (01 03 05 12 00 05 24
D1) can read 5 groups of parameter values, thus improving
communication efficiency.

F05.28
～ Reserved
F05.39

127
7 Detailed function specification

7.7 Setting curve parameter group: F06

Range: units digit: 0~2
Setting curve tens digit: 0~2
F06.00 0000
selection hundreds digit: 0~2
thousands digit: 0~2
Units digit: AI1 curve selection
0: curve 1.
1: curve 2.
2: curve 3.
Tens digit: AI2 curve selection
Same as units digit.
Hundreds digit: rapid pulse curve selection
Same as units digit.
Thousands digit: Pulse width setting curve selection
Same as units digit.
This function code tens digit, hundreds digit and thousands digit are used to select
analog quantity input AI1, AI2, rapid pulse input and pulse width input signal
setting curve. Curve 1 and 2 are 3 point curve, curve 3 is 4 point curve. User can
select different curves for adjustment based on characteristic requirement of the
input signal so as to realize specific input.
Range: 0.0% ~ curve 1
F06.01 Curve 1 min. setting 0.0%
Inflexion setting
Corresponding physical
F06.02 quantity of curve 1 min. Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 0.0%
setting
Curve 1 inflexion Range: curve 1 min. setting ~
F06.03 50.0%
setting curve 1 Max. setting
Corresponding physical
F06.04 quantity of curve 1 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 50.0%
inflexion setting
Range: curve 1 inflexion
F06.05 Curve 1 Max. setting 100.0%
setting ~100.0%
Corresponding physical
F06.06 quantity of curve 1 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 100.0%
Max. setting
Range: 0.0% ~ curve 2
F06.07 Curve 2 min. setting 0.0%
inflexion setting
Corresponding physical
F06.08 quantity of curve 2 min. Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 0.0%
setting
Curve 2 inflexion Range: curve 2 min. setting ~
F06.09 50.0%
setting curve 2 Max. setting
128
 7 Detailed function specification

Corresponding physical
F06.10 quantity of curve 2 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 50.0%
inflexion setting
Range: curve 2 inflexion
F06.11 Curve 2 Max. setting 100.0%
setting ~ 100.0%
Corresponding physical
F06.12 quantity of curve 2 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 100.0%
Max. setting
Range: 0.0% ~ curve 3
F06.13 Curve 3 min. setting 0.0%
inflexion 1 setting
Corresponding physical
F06.14 quantity of curve 3 min. Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 0.0%
setting
Curve 3 inflexion 1 Range: curve 3 min. setting ~
F06.15 30.0%
setting curve 3 inflexion 2 setting
Corresponding physical
F06.16 quantity of curve 3 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 30.0%
inflexion 1 setting
Curve 3 inflexion 2 Range: curve 3 inflexion 1
F06.17 60.0%
setting setting ~ curve 3 Max. setting
Corresponding physical
F06.18 quantity of curve 3 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 60.0%
inflexion 2 setting
Range: curve 3 inflexion 1
F06.19 Curve 3 Max. setting 100.0%
setting ~100.0%
Corresponding physical
F06.20 quantity of curve 3 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 100.0%
Max. setting
Take curve 1 as an example:
Parameter F06.01 ~ F06.06 is used to set analog quantity input voltage and its
representative set value relationship. When analog quantity input voltage is
greater than the set “Max. input”(F06.05), analog quantity voltage is calculated
based on “Max. input”; similarly, When analog input voltage is smaller than the
set “min. input ”(F06.01), Set based on “ curve lower than min. input setting
selection”(F06.21), calculated by min. input or 0.0%.

129
7 Detailed function specification

1. For function and usage of curve 2, please refer to curve 1 i

instruction.
2. Curve 3 function is similar to curve 1 and curve 2, but curve 1
and 2 are three-point straight line, while curve 3 is four-point

a
Note
curve, which can realize more flexible corresponding relationship.
3. The output positive/negative polarity of curve 1, 2, 3 is decided
by the features of input analog signal. Curve will not change
output positive/negative polarity.
4. As frequency setting, 100.0% setting corresponding physical

F06.21
—
quantity is upper limit frequency F01.11.

Curve lower
than min. input
Range: units digit: 0,1
tens digit: 0,1
hundreds digit: 0,1 11111
corresponding
thousands digit: 0,1
selection
ten thousands digit: 0,1
Units digit: curve 1 setting
0: Corresponds to min. setting corresponding physical quantity.
1: 0.0% of the corresponding physical quantity.
Tens digit: curve 2 setting
Same as units digit.
Hundreds digit: curve 3 setting
Same as units digit.
Thousands digit: extended curve 1
Same as units digit.
Ten thousands digit: extended curve 2
Same as units digit.
This parameter is used to set, when curve’s corresponding analog quantity input
voltage is smaller than the min. setting, how to decide corresponding setting
analog quantity.
For example, F06.21 units=0, when analog quantity input is lower than F06.01,
this curve output F06.02 corresponding physical quantity value. If F06.21 units=1,
when analog quantity input is lower than F06.01, this curve output is 0.
Take 0 ~ 10V AI1 for setting frequency as an example: AI1 selects curve 1, setting
frequency and AI1 relationship as shown in Fig. 7-11.

130
 7 Detailed function specification

Freq.

50.00Hz

45.00Hz

30.00Hz

2.50Hz
AI1
2V 5V 7.5V 10V
F06.01=20.0% F06.02=5.0%
F06.03=50.0% F06.04=60.0%
F6.05=75.0% F06.06=90.0%
F06.21=0

Fig. 7-11 AI1 selects curve 1 frequency setting

131
7 Detailed function specification

7.8 Analog quantity, Pulse input function parameter group: F07

F07.00 AI1 input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.050s
F07.01 AI1 setting gain Range: 0.000~9.999 1.006
F07.02 AI1 setting bias Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.5%
AI1 input filter time, is used to set AI1 software filter time. When field analog
quantity is easily interrupted, increase filter time to make the analog quantity
check stable, but when filter time is greater, the response time of analog quantity
check is slower. Please set according to the actual situation.
AI1 setting bias is indicated with Max. input (10V or 20mA) percentage, which is
used to set up and down translation quantity of AI1 analog input. Take voltage
input, bias positive as an example, the adjustment relationship of setting bias and
gain adjustment before and after adjustment is as follows:
Analog input AI1（after revise） = input gain（F07.01）× Analog input AI1（before
revise）＋setting bias（F07.02）×10V
Taking current input and bias positive as an example, the adjustment relationship
between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows:
Analog input AI1（after revise） = input gain（F07.01）× Analog input AI1（before
revise）＋setting bias（F07.02）×20mA
F07.03 AI2 input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.050s
F07.04 AI2 setting gain Range: 0.000~9.999 1.003
F07.05 AI2 setting bias Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.1%
Parameter F07.03 ~ F7.05 is used to set analog quantity input AI2 filter time ,
gain and setting bias, For detail using method, please refer to analog quantity
input AI1. Take voltage input, bias positive as an example, the adjustment
relationship between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows:
Analog input AI2（after revise） = input gain（F07.04）× Analog input AI2（before
revise）＋setting bias（F07.05）×10V
Taking current input and bias positive as an example, the adjustment relationship
between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows:
Analog input AI2（after revise） = input gain（F07.04）× Analog input AI2（before
revise）＋setting bias（F07.05）×20mA
Analog setting bias Range: units digit: 0,1
F07.06 01
polarity tens digit: 0,1
Units digit: AI1 setting bias polarity
0: Positive polarity.
1: Negative polarity.

132
 7 Detailed function specification

Tens digit: AI2 setting bias polarity

0: Positive polarity.
1: Negative polarity.
Parameter F07.06 is used to set analog quantity AI1 and when AI2 counts the
polarity of bias. Take voltage input as an example, when F07.06 units are set as 0:
Analog input AI1(after revise) = input gain(F07.01)×Analog input AI1(before
revise)＋ Setting bias(F07.02)×10V
When F7.06 units are set as 1:
Analog input AI1(after revise) = input gain(F07.01)×Analog input AI1(before
revise)－ Setting bias(F07.02)×10V

Output Volt. after AI1 adjustment

10V
input gain =2

input gain =1

Bias voltage
Set voltage after AI1 filter
0 5V 10V

Fig. 7-12 AI1 adjustment

F07.07 Pulse input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.000s

F07.08 Pulse input gain Range: 0.000~9.999 1.000
F07.09 Pulse input Max. frequency Range: 0.01~50.00KHz 10.00KHz
F07.07, F07.08 parameter defines filter time and gain when frequency channel
selection terminal pulse is set. When setting filter time, Please be noted that the
longer the filter time is, the slower the change rate of output frequency is. So set
filter time properly according to the actual situation. Pulse width gain is for
impulse quantity of current input impulse terminal.
F7.09 parameter defines frequency input range when frequency setting channel
selection terminal pulse is set. When actual input frequency is greater than the set
Max. frequency, deal with it according to Max. frequency. When the external
input pulse is less than 2Hz, disposed as 0Hz.
F07.10 Pulse width input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.000s
F07.11 Pulse width input gain Range: 0.000~9.999 1.000

133
7 Detailed function specification

F07.12 Pulse width input logic setting Range: 0,1 0

F07.13 Pulse width Max. input width Range: 0.1~999.9ms 100.0ms
F07.10, F07.11 parameter defines filter time and gain when frequency channel
selection terminal pulse width is set. When setting filter time, Please be noted that
when the Max. pulse width set in F07.13 is smaller, the filter time is not suggested
to be set too long, otherwise the response time of output frequency will be very
slow. Pulse width gain is for impulse width duty cycle of current impulse width
input terminal
0: Positive logic.
1: Negative logic.
F07.12 defines valid level of digital quantity input X8 channel input pulse when
frequency channel selection terminal pulse width is set. The applications shall go
with double polarity working state of X input terminal.
F07.13 parameter defines the width range of input valid pulse when frequency
setting channel selection terminal pulse width is set.
F07.14 Reserved
F07.15 Reserved
F07.16 Reserved
F07.17 Reserved

134
 7 Detailed function specification

7.9 On-off input function parameter group: F08

Input terminal positive and
F08.00 Range: 0000~FFFF 0000
negative logic setting

thousands hundreds tens units

BIT0: X1 positive and negative logic definition
BIT1: X2 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2:X3 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3:X4 positive and negative logic definition

BIT: X5 positive and negative logic definition

BIT1: X6 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2:X7 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3:X8 positive and negative logic definition

BIT0: EX1 positive and negative logic definition

BIT1: EX2 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2: EX3 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3:EX4 positive and negative logic definition

BIT0: EX5 positive and negative logic definition

BIT1:EX6 positive and negative logic definition

The setting of this parameter is finally converted to binary setting, relationship

between binary setting and hexadecimal is as shown in table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Relationship between binary setting and bit displayed value
Binary setting Hexadecimal
BI3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0 (bit displayed value)
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 0 0 1 9
1 0 1 0 A
1 0 1 1 B
1 1 0 0 C
1 1 0 1 D

135
7 Detailed function specification

1 1 1 0 E
1 1 1 1 F
Bit refers to units, tens, hundreds or thousands displayed in operation panel.
F08.00 parameter defines valid logic state of Xi input terminal:
Positive logic: Xi terminal and corresponding common port closed valid, opened
invalid;
Negative logic: Xi terminal and corresponding common port closed invalid,
opened valid;
When BIT selects 0, it indicates positive logic; 1 indicates negative logic. Proper
setting of this parameter can realize correct logic input without changing terminal
wiring.
F08.01 Input terminal filter time Range: 0.000~1.000s 0.010s
F08.01 parameter sets filter time of input terminal check. When input terminal
state is changed, the terminal state change is valid only when the set filter time is
unchanged. Otherwise, it will remain the last state, thus effectively reduce
malfunction caused by interruption. The group C monitor state is for the state of
the disposed parameter. When demand terminal as the high speed function, low
down the value of this parameter is needed in case losing the signal.
F08.02 X1 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.03 X1 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.04 X2 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.05 X2 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.06 X3 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.07 X3 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.08 X4 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.09 X4 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.10 X5 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.11 X5 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.12 X6 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.13 X6 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.14 X7 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.15 X7 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
F08.16 X8 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s

136
 7 Detailed function specification

F08.17 X8 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s

F08.02 ~ F08.17 parameter defines the corresponding delay time of Xi input
terminal from closed to opened or opened to closed so as to meet user’s multiple
requirements. This parameter does not affect the monitor value of input terminal
state. You can revise the parameter to control the filtering when the interruption is
strong.

Xi Level

Invalid Invalid
Xi Valid
Valid

On-delay Off-delay

Fig. 7-13 closed and opened delay

F08.18 Input terminal X1 function selection Range: 0~96 1
F08.19 Input terminal X2 function selection Range: 0~96 2
F08.20 Input terminal X3 function selection Range: 0~96 0
F08.21 Input terminal X4 function selection Range: 0~96 0
F08.22 Input terminal X5 function selection Range: 0~96 0
F08.23 Input terminal X6 function selection Range: 0~96 0
F08.24 Input terminal X7 function selection Range: 0~96 0
F08.25 Input terminal X8 function selection Range: 0~96 0
Multi-functional input terminal X1 ~ X8 provides users with up to 95 selections,
which can be selected based on actual applications. For details, please refer to
parameter function Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Multi-functional input selection function table
Content Function Content Function
0 Leave control terminal unused 49 Command switchover to panel
1 Forward running FWD terminal 50 Command switchover to terminal
Command switchover to
2 Reverse running REV terminal 51
communication
Running command Channel selection
3 External forward jogging control 52
terminal 1
Running command Channel selection
4 External reverse jogging control 53
terminal 2
Forward prohibited command
5 Multi-step speed control terminal 1 54
(Stop according to the stop mode,

137
7 Detailed function specification

invalid for jogging command)

Reverse prohibited command
6 Multi-step speed control terminal 2 55 (Stop according to the stop mode,
invalid for jogging command)

7 Multi-step speed control terminal 3 56 Swinging frequency input

8 Multi-step speed control terminal 4 57 Resetting state of swinging frequency

Acceleration/deceleration time
9 58 Interior counter reset end
selection terminal 1
Acceleration/deceleration time
10 59 Interior counter input end
selection terminal 2
Acceleration/deceleration time
11 60 Internal timer resetting
selection terminal 3
Acceleration/deceleration time
12 61 Internal timer triggering
selection terminal 4
Main and auxiliary frequency
13 62 Length count input
operational rule selection terminal 1
Main and auxiliary frequency
14 63 Length reset
operational rule selection terminal 2
Main and auxiliary frequency
15 64 Reset this operation time
operational rule selection terminal 3
16 Frequency ascending command (UP) 65 Speed/torque control switching
Frequency descending command Point positioning enabled
17 66
(DOWN) terminal(F00.24=2 valid).
Frequency ascending/descending Zero-speed servo enabled
18 67
frequency resetting terminal(F00.24=2 valid).
Motor position reset
19 Multi-step closed loop terminal 1 68
terminal(F00.24=2 valid).
Recovery point positioning terminal
20 Multi-step closed loop terminal 2 69
(F00.24=2 valid).
21 Multi-step closed loop terminal 3 70 Reserved
22 External equipment failure input 71 Reserved
23 External interruption input 72 Reserved
24 External resetting input 73 Reserved
25 Free stop input 74 Reserved
External stop instruction—Stop
26 75 Reserved
according to the stop mode
27 stop DC braking input command DB 76 Reserved
inverter running prohibited—Stop
28 77 Reserved
according to the stop mode
Acceleration/deceleration prohibited
29 78 Reserved
command
30 Three-wire running control 79 Reserved
31 Process PID invalid 80 Reserved
32 Process PID stop 81 Reserved
33 Process PID integral holding 82 Reserved
34 Process PID integral resetting 83 Reserved
Process PID function negation
35 84 Reserved
(Closed loop adjustment feature

138
 7 Detailed function specification

negation)
36 Simple PLC invalid 85 Reserved
37 Simple PLC halted 86 Reserved
38 Simple PLC stop state resetting 87 Reserved
Main frequency switchover to digit
39 88 Reserved
(keypad)
40 Main frequency switchover to AI1 89 Reserved
41 Main frequency switchover to AI2 90 Reserved
42 Main frequency switchover to EAI1 91 Pulse frequency input (X8 VALID)
Pulse width PWM INPUT (X8
43 Main frequency switchover to EAI2 92
VALID)
Main frequency setting channel
44 93 Reserved
selection terminal 1
Main frequency setting channel
45 94 Reserved
selection terminal 2
Main frequency setting channel
46 95 Reserved
selection terminal 3
Main frequency setting channel
47 96 Reserved
selection terminal 4
48 Auxiliary frequency reset - -
Function introduction in Table 7-3 is as shown below:
1, 2: External command terminal. When running command channel is
terminal running command, control inverter’s forward and reverse by external
terminal.
3, 4: External jogging command terminal. Set as any running command
channel setting running command, control inverter’s jogging forward and jogging
reverse by external terminal.
5 ~ 8: Multi-step running terminal. By setting these functions’ terminal
ON/OFF combination, up to 15 multi-step running frequencies can be set. The
increase and decrease time of each step corresponds to the each step time. The
corresponding motor running direction of each phase in multi-speed is determined
by the ten’s place of F10.01~F10.15.
Table 7-4 Multi-step running selection table
K4 K3 K2 K1 Frequency setting
OFF OFF OFF OFF Other running frequencies
OFF OFF OFF ON Multi-step frequency 1
OFF OFF ON OFF Multi-step frequency 2
OFF OFF ON ON Multi-step frequency 3
OFF ON OFF OFF Multi-step frequency 4
OFF ON OFF ON Multi-step frequency 5
OFF ON ON OFF Multi-step frequency 6
OFF ON ON ON Multi-step frequency 7
ON OFF OFF OFF Multi-step frequency 8
ON OFF OFF ON Multi-step frequency 9
139
7 Detailed function specification

ON OFF ON OFF Multi-step frequency 10

ON OFF ON ON Multi-step frequency 11
ON ON OFF OFF Multi-step frequency 12
ON ON OFF ON Multi-step frequency 13
ON ON ON OFF Multi-step frequency 14
ON ON ON ON Multi-step frequency 15

When using multi-step speed to run and simple PLC to run, use multi-step speed
frequency (F10.31 ~ F10.45) above, take multi-step speed running as an example:
Define control terminal X1, X2, X3, X4:
When F08.18=5, F08.19=6, F08.20=7, F08.21= 8, X1, X2, X3, X4 are used to
define multi-step speed running, as shown in Fig. 7-14.
In fig7-14. Take the example of terminal running command channel, the ten’s
place of F10.01~F10.15 are both 2, and X5 is set as forward running terminal, X6
is reverse running terminal, for the running control of forward direction and
reverse direction.

3 phase
三相断路器breaker
U KM
o-o-o-o

3 三相
phase R V M
AC交流 S W
电源 T
—©

Power
' iH

4-
EN500/EN600 X5
K1 X1
K2 X2
K3 X3
4

K4 X4 K5 COM
X5
K6
COM X6
COM

Fig. 7-14 Multi-step speed running wiring Fig. 7-15 Peripheral equipment fault Normally Open
9 ~ 12: Acceleration/deceleration time terminal selection. By ON/OFF of
acceleration/deceleration time terminal, acceleration/deceleration time 1 ~ 15 can be
selected. For details, see Table 7-5:
Table 7-5 Acceleration/deceleration time terminal selection
Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/
deceleration deceleration deceleration deceleration Acceleration/deceleration time
time selection time selection time selection time selection selection
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
OFF OFF OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 1
OFF OFF ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 2
OFF OFF ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 3
OFF ON OFF OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 4
OFF ON OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 5
OFF ON ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 6

140
 7 Detailed function specification

OFF ON ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 7

ON OFF OFF OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 8
ON OFF OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 9
ON OFF ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 10
ON OFF ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 11
ON ON OFF OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 12
ON ON OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 13
ON ON ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 14
ON ON ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 15
13 ~ 15: Main and auxiliary frequency operational rule selection
terminal. By ON/OFF of frequency setting channel selection terminal 13, 14, and
15, 7 kinds of main and auxiliary frequency operational rules defined in F01.06
parameter can be realized. Switchover between main and auxiliary operational
rule terminal is prior to function code F01.06 setting. For details, please see table
7-6:
Table 7-6 Selection table of terminal main and auxiliary frequency operational rule
Main and auxiliary Main and auxiliary Main and auxiliary
Main and auxiliary operational
operational rule operational rule operational rule
rule selection
selection terminal 3 selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1
OFF OFF OFF Decided by F01.06
Synthesized frequency is
OFF OFF ON
sub-frequency
OFF ON OFF Operation rule: addition
OFF ON ON Operation rule: subtraction
ON OFF OFF Operation rule: multiplication
Synthesized frequency is Max.
ON OFF ON
value
Synthesized frequency is min.
ON ON OFF
value
Synthesized frequency is
ON ON ON
nonzero value
16, 17: Frequency ascending command UP/descending command DOWN.
Realize frequency ascending or descending by control terminal, substitute
operation keypad for remote control. Normal running F01.00 or F01.03 set as 3 is
valid. Ascending/descending rate is set in F18.06 and F18.07.
18: Frequency ascending/descending frequency resetting.
When frequency setting is set as terminal UP/DOWM, this terminal can
eliminate the set frequency value by terminal UP/DOWN.
19 ~ 21: Multi-step closed loop setting terminal. By ON/OFF of multi-step
closed loop setting terminal, Table 7-7 Multi-step closed loop setting selection can
be realized.

141
7 Detailed function specification

Table 7-7 Multi-step closed loop setting selection table

Multi-step closed Multi-step closed Multi-step closed loop
Multi-step closed loop
loop setting loop setting setting
setting selection
selection terminal 3 selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1
Closed loop setting decided
OFF OFF OFF
by F11.01
Multi-step closed loop
OFF OFF ON
setting 1
Multi-step closed loop
OFF ON OFF
setting 2
Multi-step closed loop
OFF ON ON
setting 3
Multi-step closed loop
ON OFF OFF
setting 4
Multi-step closed loop
ON OFF ON
setting 5
Multi-step closed loop
ON ON OFF
setting 6
Multi-step closed loop
ON ON ON
setting 7
22: External equipment failure jump-in. with this terminal, peripheral
equipment fault signal can be input, which is convenient for inverter to perform
fault monitoring for peripheral equipment, as shown in Fig. 7-15.
23: External interruption input. When the inverter is running, after receiving
external interruption signal, it blocks output, and runs with zero frequency. Once
external interruption signal is released, and inverter running command is still valid,
inverter auto revolving speed tracking starts, the inverter restarts.
24: External resetting input. When fault alarm occurs to the inverter, you
STOP
can reset fault by this terminal. Its function and operation keypad RESET key
function are in accordance.
25: Free stop input. The purpose of this function and free stop set in F02.11
is the same, but here it uses control terminal to realize, which is convenient for
remote control.
26: External stop instruction. This command is effective for all running
command channel, when this function terminal is effective, the inverter stops
running according to mode set by F2.11.
27: Stop DC braking input command DB. Implement DC braking to the
motor during stop by control terminal so as to realize emergency stop and accurate
position of the motor. During deceleration stop, if this function terminal closed,
when frequency is lower than the brake starting frequency F02.14, it will brake
according to brake current defined in F02.16. It will not stop until terminal is
opened.
28: Inverter running prohibited. The running inverter stops freely when
this terminal is effective, and forbidden to start in waiting status. It is mainly

142
 7 Detailed function specification

applied to occasion needing safe linkage.

29: Acceleration/deceleration prohibited command. When this function is
valid, keep the motor away from any external signal (except stop command),
maintain current revolving speed running.

s
Note
This function is invalid in normal deceleration stop process.

30: Three-wire running control. Refer to F08.26 operating mode (Three-wire

operating mode) function introduction.
31: Process PID invalid. Realize flexible switchover in low-level running
mode under closed-loop running status.
r 1. Switchover between closed-loop and low level running mode can
be available only when the inverter runs in closed-loop mode

e.
Note
(F11.00=1 or F12.00=1).
2.When switching to low-level running mode, start-stop control,
direction and acceleration/deceleration time comply with
relevant setting of running mode.
y

32: Process PID stop. Invalid when PID stops, when inverter maintains
current output frequency, PID regulation of frequency source is no more
performed.
33: Process PID integral holding. PID integral impact maintains, and will
not regulate according to the output quantity.
34: Process PID integral resetting. When the terminal is valid, PID integral
regulation function halts, but PID proportional control and differential control
function are still valid.
35: Process PID function negation. When the terminal is valid, direction of
PID effect and setting direction of F11.13 is opposite.
36: simple PLC invalid. Realize flexible switchover in low-level running
mode under PLC running status.
r
1. Switchover between PLC and low level running mode can be
available only when the inverter runs in PLC mode (F10.00 unit’s
s
Note
digit is not 0).
2. When switching to low-level running mode, start-stop control,
direction and acceleration/deceleration time comply with relevant
setting of running mode.
V y

143
7 Detailed function specification

37: Simple PLC halted. It is to control the stop of running PLC, when the
terminal is valid, the inverter runs at zero frequency, PLC running does not time;
after invalid implementation, auto revolving speed tracking starts and keep on
running PLC.
38: Simple PLC stop state resetting. Under stop status of PLC running
mode, will clear PLC run step, runtime, run frequency etc. recorded when PLC
running stops if this terminal is effective, please see F10 group function
description.
39: Main frequency switchover to digital setting (keypad). The main
frequency provision channel is switched to keypad digital provision when this
terminal is valid (setting frequency by keypad up and down key).
40: Main frequency switchover to AI1. The main frequency provision
channel is switched to analog quantity AI1 provision when this terminal is valid
41: Main frequency switchover to AI2. The main frequency provision
channel is switched to analog quantity AI2 provision when this terminal is valid
42: Main frequency switchover to EAI1. When extended analog quantity is
valid, the main frequency provision channel is switched to extended analog
quantity EAI1 provision when this terminal is valid,
43: Main frequency switchover to EAI2. When extended analog quantity is
valid, , the main frequency provision channel switchover to extended analog
quantity EAI2 provision when this terminal is valid.
44 ~ 47: Main frequency setting channel selection terminal. By ON/OFF
of selection terminal 1 ~ 4, Free selection of main frequency setting channel can
be realized by terminal. The priority of main frequency setting channel selection
terminal (terminal function 44 ~ 47) is higher than the main frequency switchover
to (terminal function 41, 42, 43). For details, see table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Main frequency setting channel selection terminal
Channel Channel Channel Channel
Main frequency setting channel
selection selection selection selection
selection terminal
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
Operation keypad digital
OFF OFF OFF ON
setting
OFF OFF ON OFF AI1 analog setting
OFF OFF ON ON AI2 analog setting
OFF ON OFF OFF Terminal UP/DOWN setting
OFF ON OFF ON Communication setting
OFF ON ON OFF EAI1 analog setting (extended)
OFF ON ON ON EAI2 analog setting (extended)
ON OFF OFF OFF rapid pulse setting (X8)
ON OFF OFF ON Pulse width setting (X8)
ON OFF ON OFF Terminal encoder setting (X1,

144
 7 Detailed function specification

X2)
Keypad analog potentiometer
ON OFF ON ON
setting (optional)
ON ON OFF OFF Reserved
ON ON OFF ON Reserved
ON ON ON OFF Reserved
48: Auxiliary frequency reset. Only valid for digit auxiliary frequency,
when this function terminal is valid, reset auxiliary frequency setting quantity,
setting frequency is completely decided by main frequency setting channel.
49: Command switchover to panel. When current command source is reset
by terminal or communication, switchover between current command source and
keypad command setting can be realized by this terminal.
50: Command switchover to terminal. When current command source is
reset by keypad or communication, switchover between current command source
and terminal command setting can be realized by this terminal.
51: Command switchover to communication. When current command
source is reset by keypad or terminal, switchover between current command
source and communication command setting can be realized by this terminal.
52, 53: Running command Channel selection terminal. For details, please
refer to Table 7-9.
Table 7-9 Running command channel logic mode
Running command channel Running command channel
Running command channel
selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1
OFF OFF Invalid
Operation keypad running
OFF ON
command channel
Terminal running command
ON OFF
channel
Communication running
ON ON
command channel
54: Forward prohibited command. Enable this terminal during the forward
running process, and the inverter stops according to the stop mode. First enable
this terminal, and then forward running enters zero frequency running status.
Jogging running is not affected by this.
55: Reverse prohibited command. Function and “Forward prohibited
command” are opposite.
56: Swinging frequency input. When the starting mode of swinging
frequency is manual input, this terminal is valid, and swinging frequency function
is valid. See F13 group function parameter instruction. When swinging frequency
is set as manual input, this terminal is invalid, run with preset frequency of
swinging frequency.

145
7 Detailed function specification

57: Resetting state of swinging frequency. When selecting swinging

frequency function, no matter auto or manual input mode, closing this terminal
will clear state information of swinging frequency memorized in the inverter.
When opening this terminal, swinging frequency restarts. For details, please see
F13 group function.
58: Interior counter reset end. Reset inverter built-in counter, and go with
counter triggering signal input. For details, please see parameter F08.27, F08.28.
59: Interior counter input end. Interior counter’s counting pulse input port,
pulse max. frequency: 50.0KHz.
60: Interior timer reset end. Reset inverter built-in timer, goes with timer
triggering-end signal input.
61: Interior timer triggering end. See parameter F08.29 function.
62: Length count input. Length counting input terminal, see fixed length
function of F13 group parameter.
63: Length reset. When the terminal is valid, reset internal length value, see
F13 fixed length function of parameter group.
64: Reset this operation time. When the terminal is valid, the running
counting time of this inverter is reset, see timing running defined in F18 group.
65: speed/torque control switching. The function of this terminal is only
effective under the mode of Speed Mode, this terminal can realize the dynamic
switching between torque Mode and Speed Mode.
66: Point positioning enabled terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the parameter
description at group 16.
67: Zero-speed servo enabled terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the parameter
description at group 16.
68: Motor position reset terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the parameter
description at group 16.
69: Recovery point positioning terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the
parameter description at group 16.
70~ 90: Reserved
91: Pulse frequency input (X8 valid). Only valid for multi-functional input
terminal X8, this function terminal accepts pulse signal as frequency setting,
relationship between the input signal pulse frequency and setting frequency is as
shown in F06 and F07 group parameter.
92: Pulse width PWM input (X8 valid). Only valid for multi-functional
input terminal X8, this function terminal accepts PWM signal, check pulse width
as frequency setting, relationship between input PWM Pulse width and setting
frequency is as shown in F06 and F07 group parameter.

146
 7 Detailed function specification

93~96:Reserved
F08.26 FWD/REV operating mode selection Range: 0~4 0
This parameter defines five different modes by controlling external terminal
inverter running.
0: Two-wire control mode 1

K2 K1 Operating command
EN500/EN600
K1
0 0 Stop FWD
K2
1 0 REV REV

0 1 FWD COM

1 1 Stop

Fig. 7-16 Two-wire operating mode 1

1: Two-wire control mode 2

K2 K1 Operating command EN500/EN600

K1
0 0 Stop FWD
K2
1 0 Stop REV

0 1 FWD COM

1 1 REV

Fig. 7-17 Two-wire operating mode 2

2: Two-wire control mode 3 (monopulse control mode)
Monopulse control is triggered-type control. After triggering SB1 once, it
forwards runs. Retriggering SB1 once, it stops. Triggering SB1 once, it reversely
runs. Retriggering SB2 once, it stops. If it is forward running, the inverter stops
when triggering SB2 once. Retriggering SB1 once, it stops. If it is reverse running,
the inverter stops when triggering SB1 once.

147
7 Detailed function specification

EN500/EN600
SB1
FWD
SB2
REV

COM

Fig. 7-18 Two-wire control mode 3

3: Three-wire control mode 1
EN500/EN600
Defines are as follows:
SB2
FWD
SB1: stop button SB1
Xi
SB2: forward button
SB3: reverse button SB3
REV

-<•> COM

Fig. 7-19 Three-wire operating mode 1

Xi is X1 ~ X8’s Multi-functional Input terminal, at this moment, define its
corresponding terminal function as “Three-wire running control” function of
No.30.
4: Three-wire control mode 2
SB1: stop button
m EN500/EN600
SB2: run button SB2 FWD
Y Running direction
m K2
SB1 - selection
x/ T Xi 0 Forward
K2 1 Reverse
< j> REV

è COM

Fig. 7-20 Three-wire operating mode 2

Xi is X1 ~ X8’s Multi-functional input terminal, At this moment, define its
corresponding terminal function as “Three-wire running control” function of No.
30.
F08.27 Set internal count value to setting Range: 0~65535 0

148
 7 Detailed function specification

F08.28 Specify internal count to setting Range: 0~65535 0

F08.27 and F08.28 are to additionally define functions of 30 and 31 in 7-10.
When Xi (Counting trigger signal input function terminal) output pulse reaches
F08.27 defined value, Y1 (Y1 is set as internal count value final value to) outputs
one indicating signal, as shown in Fig. 7-21, When Xi inputs the eighth pulse,
Y1outputs one indicating signal. At this moment, F8.27=8.
When Xi (Counting trigger signal input function terminal) output pulse reaches
F08.28 defined value, Y2 (Y2 is set as internal counter specified value to) outputs
one indicating signal, until set count value arrives.
As shown in Fig. 7-21, when Xi inputs the fifth pulse, Y2 starts outputting one
indicating signal. Until set count value 8 arrives, F08.28=5. When specified count
value is greater than set count value, specified count value Invalid.

Xi input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Y1

Y2

Fig. 7-21 set count value setting and specified count value setting
F08.29 Internal timer timing setting Range: 0.1~6000.0s 60.0s
This parameter sets timing time of inverter internal timer, timer is triggered by
external triggering terminal (Xi terminal function no. is 61), the timer starts timing
upon receiving external triggering signal. After reaching timing time, Yi terminal
outputs a breadth of 0.5s valid pulse signal. When internal timer clearing terminal
is valid (Xi terminal function is set as 60), internal timer is reset.
Terminal pulse encoder
F08.30 Range: 0.01~10.00Hz 1.00Hz
frequency rate
This parameter defines main frequency regulation speed during terminal pulse
encoder setting frequency (F01.00=9). Main frequency terminal encoder pulse
input can only choose channel X1 and X2 combination; auxiliary frequency
terminal encoder pulse input can only choose channel X3 and X4 combination,
and the rate of the auxiliary frequency encoder frequency is the fixed rate.

s.
Note
When 9 is selected in F01.00 and F01.03, X1~X4 can only be used
as encoder frequency setting. Other terminal functions defined by
F08.18~F08.21 are invalid.

F08.31 Reserved
149
7 Detailed function specification

7.10 Switch output function parameter group: F09

Open-collector output terminal Y1
F09.00 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
Open-collector output terminal Y2
F09.01 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
Open-collector output terminal Y3
F09.02 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
Open-collector output terminal Y4
F09.03 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
F09.04 Programmable relay output setting Range: 0~60 22
Functions of the above parameters are used to select Y1 ~ Y4 and relay output
terminals. Table 7-10 shows the functions of the above 4 terminals. One function
can be selected repeatedly.
Open-collector (Yi) and high-speed pulse (DO) output share terminal Y4. Y4
terminal as the high-speed pulse function to be modified F00.22 thousands place
to 1.
Table7-10 Output terminals function selection diagram
Setting Function Setting Function
0 No output 31 Set count value reached
1 Frequency inverter running(RUN) 32 Designated count value reached
2 Frequency inverter Forward running 33 Shutdown time arrival of the running
3 Frequency inverter Reverse running 34 Time arrival of the running
4 Frequency inverter DC brake 35 Setup running time arrived
Frequency inverter Ready for
5 36 Setup power-on time arrived
operation(RDY)
6 Shutdown command indicator 37 1st pump variable frequency
7 Zero current state 38 1st pump frequency
8 Over current state 39 2nd pump variable frequency
9 Current 1 arrived 40 2nd pump frequency
10 Current 2 arrived 41 Communication given
Frequency inverter Zero-frequency
11 42 Torque control speed limiting
output
12 Frequency arriving signal (FAR) 43 Torque arriving output
Frequency level detection signal 1
13 44 Positioning completion
FDT1
Frequency level detection signal
14 45 Reserved
2(FDT2)
Output frequency arriving upper
15 46 Reserved
limit(FHL)
Output frequency arriving lower
16 47 Reserved
limit(FLL)
17 Frequency 1 arrived 48 Reserved
18 Frequency 2 arrived 49 Reserved
Frequency inverter overload pre- alarm
19 50 Reserved
signal(OL)

150
 7 Detailed function specification

Frequency inverter Low voltage

20 51 Reserved
lock-up signal(LU)
21 External stopping command(EXT) 52 Reserved
22 Frequency inverter fault 53 Reserved
23 Frequency inverter warning 54 Reserved
24 Simple PLC operation running 55 Reserved
25 Completion of simple PLC operation 56 Reserved
26 Simple PLC cycle-running completed 57 Reserved
27 Simple PLC suspended 58 Reserved
28 Upper and lower limit of Wobble 59 Reserved
29 Setup length arrived 60 Reserved
30 Internal counter final value arrived - -
The instructions of the function output terminals listed in table 7-10 are as below:
0: The terminal function is idle.
1:Frequency inverter is running(RUN).The Drive is in the running state,
output the indicator signal.
2. Frequency inverter is forward running. The Drive is in the forward
running state, output the indicator signal.
3. Frequency inverter is reversed running. The Drive is in reversed
running state, output the indicator signal.
4.Frequency inverter is DC braking. The Drive is in DC braking state,
output the indicator signal.
5. Frequency inverter is ready to run. This signal being valid means that
the Drive bus voltage is normal, the Drive is running and forbidding the terminal
is invalid, it can accept a start command.
6. Shutdown command indicator. When the shutdown command is valid,
output the indictor signal.
7. Zero current is arrived. When detected the output meet the zero current
state, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the instruction of F09.12and
F09.13parameters for details.
8. Over current is arrived. When the output current meet the over current
detection conditions, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the instruction of
F09.14and F09.15 parameters for details.
9. Current 1 arrived. When the output current reaches the detection
conditions to meet the current 1, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the
instruction of F09.16and F09.17 parameters for details.
10. Current 2 arrived. When the output current reaches the detection
conditions to meet the current 2, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the
instruction of F09.18and F09.19 parameters for details.
11. Frequency inverter Zero frequency output. Please refer to the function

151
7 Detailed function specification

instruction of F09.10and F09.11.

12. Frequency arriving signal(FAR). Please refer to the function instruction
of F09.05.
13. Frequency level detection signal 1(FTD1). Please refer to the function
instruction of F09.06, F09.07.
14. Frequency level detection signal 2(FTD2). Please refer to the function
instruction of F09.08, F09.09.
15. Output frequency reaches upper limit (FHL). When the running
frequency reaches upper limit, the output is indicator signal.
16. Output frequency reaches lower limit (FHL). When the running
frequency reaches lower limit, the output is indicator signal.
17. Frequency 1 arriving output. Please refer to the function instruction of
F09.20, F09.21.
18. Frequency 2 arriving output. Please refer to the function instruction of
F09.22, F09.23.
19. Frequency inverter overload pre-alarm signal. Frequency inverter
output current exceeds F19.06 overload pre-alarm detection levels, and time is
greater than F19.07 overload pre-alarm delay time, output the indicator signal.
20. Frequency inverter Low voltage lock-up signal (LU).When the
frequency inverter is running, the DC bus voltage below the limit level, output
indication signal.
21. External fault shutdown (EXT).When the frequency inverter appears
external fault trip alarm (E-18), output indication signal.
22. Frequency inverter fault. When the frequency inverter detects fault, the
output is indication signal.
23. Frequency inverter warning. When the frequency inverter detects alarm,
the output is indication signal.
24. Simple PLC during operating. The simple PLC is enabled, and enter
into operation state, output indication signal
25. Simple PLC stage operation completed. When the simple PLC stage
operation is completed, output indication signal (single pulse signal, the width is
500ms).
26. Simple PLC ends after running a cycle. After the completion of a cycle
of simple PLC, output indication signal (single pulse signal, the width is 500ms)
27. Simple PLC pause. When the simple PLC is running into the pause state,
output is indication signal.
28. Wobble upper and lower limit. If the frequency fluctuation range
calculated by center frequency exceeds the upper limit F01.11 or belows lower

152
 7 Detailed function specification

limit F01.12 after selecting the wobble function, it will output indication signal, as
shown in Figure 7-22.
Output

A Upper limit
/
Setting
freq.
1. Detection range

Lower limit Time

Y
Time
Y1:Wobble upper and lower

Fig.7-22 Wobble amplitude limit Fig.7-23 Freq. arrival signal output diagram
29. Setup length arrived. When detected the actual length exceeds a set
value F13.08, output indication signal.
30. Internal counter final value arrived. Please refer to the function
instruction of F08.27.
31. Internal counter specified value arrived. Please refer to the function
instruction of F08.28.
32. Internal counter timing meter arrival. Please refer to the function
instruction of F08.29.
33. Shutdown time arrival of the running. Frequency inverter runs longer
than the setting time of F18.12, output indication signal.
34. Time arrival of the running. Frequency inverter runs longer than the
setting time of F18.13, output indication signal.
35. Setup time arrived. Accumulated running time of the frequency inverter
reaches the set accumulated running time (F18.10), output indication signal.
36. Setup power-on time arrived. Accumulated power on time of the
frequency inverter reaches the set accumulated running time (F18.09), the output
indication signal.
37: 1st pump variable frequency.
38: 1st pump frequency.
39: 2nd pump variable frequency.
40: 2nd pump frequency
When using Y1 ~ Y4 achieve two pumps constant pressure water supply, Y1 ~ Y4
functions are arranged in order of 37 to 40. Under constant pressure water supply
mode, the four parameters must all set to this value, the terminal functions can be
achieved
41: Communication given. In this moment the output of Yi is controlled by
communication, Please refer to the related communication protocol for details.

153
7 Detailed function specification

42: torque control speed limiting. Under the mode of torque control, when
the actual output frequency is greater than or equal to the value of limiting
frequency, this output terminal is effective. The value of speed limiting is defined
by parameter F14.16 to F14.19.
43: Torque arriving output. Under the torque control，when the motor
torque reaches to the torque command which is after the acceleration and
deceleration, and continue for the time defined by F09.48, then output active
level.
44: Positioning completion. Under the positioning control，when motor
position reaches to the designated spot, then output active level.
45~60:Reserved
Detection amplitude of
F09.05 Range: 0.00~50.00Hz 5.00Hz
frequency arrival(FAR)
This parameter is added in the definition of Table 7-10 on the 12th functions. As
shown in Figure 7-23, when the inverter output frequency in the setting frequency
of positive and negative detection width, output indication signal.
Range: 0.00Hz~upper
F09.06 FDT1(frequency level)level 10.00Hz
limit frequency
F09.07 FDT1 lag Range: 0.00~50.00Hz 1.00Hz
Range: 0.00Hz~upper
F09.08 FDT2(frequency level)level 10.00Hz
limit frequency
F09.09 FDT2 lag Range: 0.00~50.00Hz 1.00Hz
F09.06, F09.07 is in the
definition of Table 7-10 on the 13th
Output freq.
Functions, F09.08, F09.08 is in the
FDT1 level . FDT1 lag
definition of Table 7-10 on the 14th
1

/ X t
functions, take an example of 13th
functions: When the output frequency Time

exceeds a certain setting frequency {

Y
(FDT1 level), output indicator
Signal, until the output frequency drops Time
below the certain frequency FDT1 frequency
level (FDT1 level -FDT1 lag). As shown in Fig.7-24 Freq. level detection diagram
Figure 7-24.
Zero-frequency signal Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
F09.10 0.00Hz
detection value frequency
Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
F09.11 Zero-frequency backlash 0.00Hz
frequency

154
 7 Detailed function specification

Operating
运行频率 freq. i

F09.10 \ TF09.11
时间
Time

零频运行
Zero freq. A
operating
输出
output
Time
时间
Fig.7-25 Zero-frequency signal detection
Parameter F09.10, F09.11 defines the zero frequency output control function.
When the output frequency is within the zero-frequency signal detection range, if
Yi output function selects 11, then the output of Yi is indication signal.
Zero current detection
F09.12 Range: 0.0~50.0% 0.0%
amplitude
F09.13 Zero current detection time Range: 0.00~60.00s 0.1s

A
Output current
输出电流

Zero current
detection零电流检出
amplitude
幅值
(F09.12) F09.12
时间
Time
current i
Zero零电流检出
detection signal
信号

时间
Time
Zero current
零电流检出时间
detection
F09.13 time
(F09.13)
Fig.7-26 Zero current detection diagram
When the output current of the inverter is less than or equal to zero current
detection level, and lasts longer than the zero current detection time, then the
output of frequency inverter multifunction Yi is indication signal. Figure 7-26 is
the schematic of zero current detection.
F09.14 Over-current detection value Range: 0.0~250.0% 160.0%
F09.15 Over-current detection time Range: 0.00~60.00s 0.00s

155
7 Detailed function specification

Output current
输出电流
Output over
输出过电流检出值
current detection
F09.14

value(F09.14)

时间
Time
Output输出过电流
over
current指示信号
induction
signal ON

时间
Time
Output over
输出过电流检出时间
current detection
F09.15

time(F09.15)
Fig.7-27 Output over-current detection diagram
When the output current of the inverter is greater than the over-current detection
points, and lasted longer than the over-current detection time, frequency inverter
multifunction Yi output indication signal, Figure 7-27 is the schematic of output
over-current detection.
Current 1 arriving the
F09.16 Range: 0.0~250.0% 100.0%
detection value
F09.17 Current 1 width Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.0%
Current 2 arriving the
F09.18 Range: 0.0~250.0% 100.0%
detection value
F09.19 Current 2 width Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.0%
When the output current of frequency inverter is within the positive and negative
detection width of setting current arrival, then the output of frequency inverter
multifunction Yi is indication signal.
EN500/EN600 provides two current arrival and detection width parameters, table
7-28 is the function schematic diagram.

输出电流
Output current A
Current I arriving Current I arriving detection width
电流I到达检出宽度
电流I到达检出值
detection value 电流I到达检出宽度
Current I arriving detection width
r

时间
Time
Current I arriving ON ON ON
电流I到达指示信号
induction signal OFF OFF OFF

Fig.7-28 Current arriving detection diagram

156
 7 Detailed function specification

Frequency 1 arriving Range:0.00Hz~upper

F09.20 50.00Hz
detection value limit frequency
Frequency 1 arriving Range:0.00Hz~upper
F09.21 0.00Hz
detection width limit frequency
Frequency 2 arriving Range:0.00Hz~upper
F09.22 50.00Hz
detection value limit frequency
Frequency 2 arriving Range:0.00Hz~upper
F09.23 0.00Hz
detection width limit frequency
When the output frequency of frequency inverter reaches detecting value of the
positive and negative detecting width range, then the output of multifunctional Yi
is indication signal.
EN500/EN600 provides two sets of frequency arrival detecting parameters, which
have set frequency value and frequency detecting width respectively. Table 7-29
is the diagram of this function.

Operating
运行频率 freq.

Frequency I arriving
频率I到达检出宽度 detection width
Frequency I arriving
频率I到达检出值
J_
1 T Frequency I arriving
频率I到达检出宽度 detection width
detection value

时间
Time
Frequency I arriving ON ON
频率I到达指示信号
induction signal OFF OFF OFF

Fig.7-29 Frequency arriving detection diagram

Positive and negative logic
F09.24 Range: 0000~FFFF 0000
setting of output terminal
This parameter defines the output logic of the standard output terminal Yi, relay
RLY and expand output terminal EYi, relays ERIY1, ERLY2.
0: positive logic, output terminal and the common terminal close to the valid
state, disconnect invalid state
1: reverse logic, output terminal and the common terminal close to the
invalid state, disconnect valid state

157
7 Detailed function specification

thousands hundreds The tens the units

BIT0:Y1 positive and negative logic definition
BIT1:Y2 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2:Y3 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3:Y4 positive and negative logic definition

BIT0: fault relay 1 positive and negative logic definition

BIT1：expand OC1 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2:expand OC2 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3：expand OC3 positive and negative logic definition

BIT0：expand OC4 positive and negative logic definition

BIT1：expand fault relay1 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2：expand fault relay2 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3: reserved

BIT0~BIT3: reserved

F09.25 Y1 output closed delay time Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s

Y1 output disconnected
F09.26 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
F09.27 Y2 output closed delay time Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
Y2 output disconnected
F09.28 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
F09.29 Y3 output closed delay time Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
Y3 output disconnected
F09.30 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
F09.31 Y4 output closed delay time Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
Y4 output disconnected
F09.32 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
Relay output closed delay
F09.33 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
time
Relay output disconnected
F09.34 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
Parameter F09.25 ~ F09.34 defines the corresponding delay time from connect or
disconnect to frequency level of the multifunction output terminals. Table 7-30 is
the schematic of multi-function output terminal operation.

158
 7 Detailed function specification

Yi level

Invalid Valid Invalid

Yi Valid
closeI- *i
* delay
- -

- *
Disconnect M I-
delay
- -

Setting rang：0.000～50.000s
Fig.7-30 Multifunction output terminal action diagram
F09.35 Analog output (AO1) selecting Range: 0~25 0
F09.36 Analog output (AO2) selecting Range: 0~25 0
DO function selecting(reuse
F09.37 Range: 0~25 0
with Y4)
0:output frequency before slip compensation(0.00Hz~ upper limit
frequency)
1:output frequency after slip compensation(0.00Hz~ upper limit
frequency)
2: setup frequency(0.00Hz~ upper limit frequency)
3:master setup frequency(0.00Hz~ upper limit frequency)
4:auxiliary setup frequency(0.00Hz~ upper limit frequency)
5:current output 1(0~2×rated current of frequency inverter)
6:current output 1(0~3×rated current of frequency inverter)
7:output voltage(0~1.2×rated voltage of load motor)
8: bus voltage (0~1.5×Rated bus voltage)
9:motor speed(0~3 ×rated speed)
10:PID given(0.00~10.00V)
11:PID feedback(0.00~10.00V)
12:AI1(0.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
13:AI2(-10.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
14: communication given(AO output is controlled by communication,
please refer to the related communication protocol for details.)
15:motor rotate speed (0.00Hz~upper limit frequency)
16:current given torque (0~2 times of rated torque)
17:current output torque(0~2 times of rated torque)
18:current torque current(0~2 times of rated motor current)
19:current flux current(0~1 times of rated motor flux current)
20~25:Reserved

159
7 Detailed function specification

r1.Terminal AO1 and AO2 are optional output terminal of 0~10V

or 4~20mA which can satisfy the variety needs of customer.
2.By disposing F00.21 analog output，output of terminal AO1 and
AO2 can be 0~10V or 4~20mA to satisfy the variety needs of
customer.
Note 3.The unit’s place of F00.22 is set to 1 when DO output pulse signal.
4.Rated flux current=current value of F15.11 parameter.
Rated torque current=sqrt (rated motor current×rated motor
Current-rated flux current×rated flux current)
v /
F09.38 Reserved

F09.39 Analog output (AO1) filter time Range: 0.0~20.0s 0.0s

F09.40 Analog output (AO1) gain Range: 0.00~2.00 1.00
F09.41 Analog output (AO1) bias Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.0%
Parameter F09.39 defines the filter time of A01 output, its reasonable setting can
improve stability of analog output. But a higher setting will influence the rate of
change, which can not reflect the instantaneous value of corresponding physical
quantity.
If users want to change the display range or error correction table headers, you can
achieve it by adjusting the output gain and bias of AO1.
When AO1 output voltage, the adjustment is as follows:
Analog output AO1(after revise)=output gain(F09.40)×analog output AO1(before
revise)+output bias(F09.41)×10V
When AO1 output current, the adjustment is as follows:
Analog output AO1(after revise)=output gain(F09.40)×analog output AO1(before
revise)+output bias(F09.41)×20mA

13
Note
. This function code will influence analog output during modify
processes.
1

F09.42 Analog output (AO2) filter time Range: 0.0~20.0s 0.0s

F09.43 Analog output (AO2) gain Range: 0.00~2.00 1.00
F09.44 Analog output (AO2) bias Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.0%
Please refer to the function introduce of parameters F09.39~F09.41

160
 7 Detailed function specification

F09.45 DO filter time Range: 0.0~20.0s 0.0s

F09.46 DO output gain Range: 0.00~2.00 1.00
DO maximum pulse output
F09.47 Range: 0.1~20.0KHz 10.0KHz
frequency
Please refer to the function introduce of parameters F09.39~F09.41.
Maximum pulse output frequency of terminal DO corresponds to maximum select
value of F09.37. For example, F09.31=0, terminal DO’s function is: output
frequency before slip compensation, which means Maximum pulse output
frequency corresponds to upper frequency.
Note：When the output frequency of DO port is less than 1.5Hz, disposed as 0Hz.
Torque reaches to the
F09.48 Range: 0.02～200.00s 1.00s
detection time

F09.49 Reserved
F09.50 Reserved

161
7 Detailed function specification

7.11 Simple PLC/Multi-speed function parameters Group:F10

Range: unitdigit: 0～3
tens digit: 0～2
F10.00 Simple PLC operate setting 0000
hundreds digit: 0,1
thousands digit: 0,1
The simple PLC operation mode, re-start mode after interruption, unit of running
time and the storage mode when power off can be set in different bit of parameter
F10.00, details as follows:
Unit digit: simple PLC operation mode.
0:No action.PLC operation mode is disabled.
1:Stop after single cycle. as show in Fig.7-31, the drive stops automatically
after one cycle of operation and will not start only when receiving RUN command
again.
2: Maintain final value after one cycle, as show in Fig.7-32, the drive will
keep running with the final value and the direction after complete one cycle
operation, the drive won’t stop according to the set stop mode until the stop
command is available.
3: Continuous operation, as show in Fig.7-33, the drive will start next cycle
of operation automatically after completing one cycle of operation until receiving
STOP command then stop according the set stop mode.

/
f2 /
/ d15 f15
/
a2 f5 /

f1 d3
a1 a5
a3 f3
a4 d5
f4
T2 T15
T1 T3 T4 T5

RUN Command il
STOP Command

Fig.7-31 PLC stop operating after one cycle mode

162
 7 Detailed function specification

f2 d15f15
a2 f5
f1 d3

Hold final value

a1 a5
a3 f3
d5
a4
f4
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T15

RUN Command

STOP Command

Fig.7-32 PLC holds the final value after one cycle mode
d15 d15
f2 f15 f2 f15
d1
a2 d1 a2
d2 f5 f1 f5 f1
f1 d3
a1 a5 a5
PLC运行
PLC Operation
a3 a3
f3 f3
d4
d4
a4 a4
f4 f4
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T15 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T15
The first cycle
第一次循环 The second cycle
第二次循环

RUN命令
RUN Command
STOP命令
STOP Command
Fig7-33 PLC continuous operation mode
a1～a15:The Acc time of different steps
d1～d15:The Dec time of different steps
f1～f15:The frequency of different steps
There are 15 steps can set in Fig.7-31，7-32，7-33.
Tens digit: Restart mode after interruption.
0: Restart from the first step.
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP commands, fault
alarm or power failure, it will run from the first step after restarting.
1: Restart from the interruption step;
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP command or fault

163
7 Detailed function specification

alarm, the drive will record the operating time of the current step and will
continue from the step where the drive stops after restart at the frequency defined
for this step with the remained time, as show in Fig.7-34.If the drive stops due to
power off, it will not record the state and from the first step operate when restart.
2: Restart from the interrupted Frequency
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP command or fault
alarm, the drive will record the operating time and the current frequency of the
interrupt step, it will operating with the record time and record frequency when
restart, as show in Fig7-35
Output Freq. Hz
Pause signal
A
f1
[

a1 d2

f3
a3
f2
a2 Time t
Step1 Step2
*1
Operated time Step2 remain time
a1:Acc time of the 1st step a2:Acc time of the 2nd step
a3:Acc time of the 3rd step d2:Dec time of the 1st step
f1:Frequency of the 1st step f2:Frequency of the 2nd step
f3:Frequency of the 3rd step
Fig.7-34 simple PLC restart mode 1

Pause signal
Output Freq Hz f1 Same freq.
A a1 d2
d2 f3
a2 f2 a3
Time t
Step1 Step2 Step 2 remain time
Operated time

a1:Acc time of the 1st stepa2:Acc time of the 2nd step

a3:Acc time of the 3rd step d2:Dec time of the 1st step
f1:Frequency of the 1st step f2:Frequency of the 2nd step
f3:Frequency of the 3rd step
Fig.7-35 PLC Restart mode 2

164
 7 Detailed function specification

Hundreds digit: PLC unit of running time.

0: Seconds;
1: Minutes;
The unit is effective for the running time of different steps only, during the operation
of PLC, the unit of Acc time and Dec time is defined by parameter F01.19.

1. The step is ineffective if the time of this step of PLC operation is k

set as 0 thereafter operate the next step.

s
Note
2.Control the PLC process a pause ,ineffective, operate via
terminal ,for details please refer to parameters in F8 Group that
relative with terminal function.

Thousands digit: the storage mode when power off.

0: No storage. No record the running state when power off, it will restart
from the first step when power on again.
1: Storage. Records the running status which include the step, running
frequency and running time when power off, it restart with the mode that set in
hundreds digit after power on again.

13
Note
. No matter power-off storage in stop status or running status, you
should set thousands digit as 1 thereafter set tens digit as 1 or
2,otherwise power-off storage function is ineffective.

F10.01 Step 1 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000

F10.02 Step 2 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.03 Step 3 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.04 Step 4 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.05 Step 5 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.06 Step 6 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.07 Step 7 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.08 Step 8 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.09 Step 9 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.10 Step 10 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.11 Step 11 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.12 Step 12 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000

165
7 Detailed function specification

F10.13 Step 13 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000

F10.14 Step 14 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.15 Step 15 setting Range: 000H～E22H 000
F10.01～F10.15 are used to configure the operating frequency, direction and
Acc/Dec time of each PLC operating step. These functions are all selected by
digits on different place of parameters. Details as below:
Unit digit: Frequency setting
0:select multi-frequency i. i=1～15,please refer to F10.31～F10.45 for
definitions of multi-frequency.
1:the frequency is determined by the combination of the main frequency
and the auxiliary frequency.
2: Reserved.
Tens digit: The selection of running direction for PLC and multi-speed.
0: Forward.
1: Reversed.
2: Determined by operating commands (FWD, REV)
Hundreds digit: Acc/Dec time choose
0: Acc/Dec time 1
1: Acc/Dec time 2
2: Acc/Dec time 3
3: Acc/Dec time 4
4: Acc/Dec time 5
5: Acc/Dec time 6
6: Acc/Dec time 7
7: Acc/Dec time 8
8: Acc/Dec time 9
9: Acc/Dec time 10
A: Acc/Dec time 11
B: Acc/Dec time 12
C: Acc/Dec time 13
D: Acc/Dec time 14
E: Acc/Dec time 15
Accelerate time1～15 defined by F01.17,F01.18,F04.16～F04.43. The running
direction of PLC and multi-speed is determined by the ten’s place of
F10.01~F10.15.
F10.16 Step 1 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.17 Step 2 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0

166
 7 Detailed function specification

F10.18 Step 3 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0

F10.19 Step 4 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.20 Step 5 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.21 Step 6 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.22 Step 7 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.23 Step 8 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.24 Step 9 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.25 Step 10 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.26 Step 11 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.27 Step 12 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.28 Step 13 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.29 Step 14 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
F10.30 Step 15 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
Parameters F10.16～F10.30 defined Running time of each PLC Step from Step 1
to Step 15.

Each step running time include Acc time and Dec time.
Note

F10.31 Multi-Frequency 1 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 5.00Hz

F10.32 Multi-Frequency 2 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 10.00Hz
F10.33 Multi-Frequency 3 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 20.00Hz
F10.34 Multi-Frequency 4 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 30.00Hz
F10.35 Multi-Frequency 5 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 40.00Hz
F10.36 Multi-Frequency 6 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 45.00Hz
F10.37 Multi-Frequency 7 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 50.00Hz
F10.38 Multi-Frequency 8 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 5.00Hz
F10.39 Multi-Frequency 9 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 10.00Hz
F10.40 Multi-Frequency 10 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 20.00Hz
F10.41 Multi-Frequency 11 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 30.00Hz

167
7 Detailed function specification

F10.42 Multi-Frequency 12 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 40.00Hz

F10.43 Multi-Frequency 13 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 45.00Hz
F10.44 Multi-Frequency 14 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 50.00Hz
F10.45 Multi-Frequency 15 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 50.00Hz
Frequency will be used in Multi-speed operation mode and Simple PLC operation
mode. More details please refer to the Multi-speed terminal operation function in
Parameters Group F08 and Simple PLC operation function in Parameters Group
F10.

168
 7 Detailed function specification

7.12 Closed-Loop PID operation Parameters Group:F11

Analog feedback control system:
Pressure reference is input through the terminal AI1，and water pressure sensor
send a 4-20mA to the terminal AI2 of inverter as a feedback signal, all of them
make up of analog closed-loop control system via build-in PID adjuster ,as shown
in Fig.7-36

Three QF
R EN500/EN600 U Output

rw>- -r>

^5
phase

eY
M

rh
S V P

Pressure sensor
\ \

380V T W

©
Xi (Defined as FWD)

COM 4～20mA
AI2

Provision
+10V
—
GND O
—

AI1
1～3K
—

GND

Fig.7-36 Build-in PID adjuster control system diagram

\
fp

Setting the value of F11.01 can choose the channel of pressure

Note reference.

Operating principle of built-in PID function of EN500/EN600 is shown in

Fig.7-37 as below:
Proportion
gain
(F11.07)
+ e
Closed-loop Reference Offset limit + Closed-loop
regulation Integral gain output Closed-loop
I

_ (F11.11)
j

reference (F11.03) (F11.08) regulation

+ output
Differential
gain
Feedback (F11.09)
regulation
Closed-loop feedback
k

(F11.04，F11.14)
J

Fig.7-37 PID block control principle diagram

In above diagram ,the definition of closed-loop reference ,feedback error limit and
PI parameters are similar with the general PID adjuster，the relationship between
reference and expected feedback is shown in Fig.7-38.The reference and feedback

169
7 Detailed function specification

are converted and based on 10.00V.

In Fig.7-37, the real values of closed-loop reference and feedback can be
regulated in Group F06 and F07, so that can reach a good performance.

Expected Value eedback

20mA

4mA Pressure reference

»
0 10V
Fig.7-38 Reference and expected feedback value
After the system control mode is confirmed, follow the procedures below to set
the closed-loop parameters:
(1)Determine the closed-loop reference and feedback channel (F11.01F11.02).
(2)The relationship between the closed-loop reference and feedback should be
defined for closed-loop control (the Group F6).
(3) Set up the closed-loop frequency presetting function (F11.19,F11.20).
(4) Adjust the proportion gain, integral gain, differential gain, sampling cycle and
error limit(F11.07～F11.11).
F11.00 Closed-loop control function Range: 0,1 0
0:PID closed-loop function disabled
1:PID closed-loop function enabled
F11.01 Reference channel choose Range: 0～7 0
0: Digital provision
1:AI1 analog 0-10V or 4-20mA provision
2:AI2 analog provision
3:EAI1 analog provision (Extensible)
4:EAI2 analog provision (Extensible)
5: Pulse provision
6: Communication provision(Communication address：1D00). Please
refer to the chapter of Modbus communication.
7: Reserved

170
 7 Detailed function specification

e.
f \
Except the above provision channels, Multi-Closed-loop provision
is available. Connecting different terminal to choose different
Note provision value which with a highest priority.
v

F11.02 Feedback channel selection Range: 0～8 0

0:AI1 analog input
1:AI2 analog input
2:EAI1 analog input(Extensible)
3:EAI2 analog input(Extensible)
4:AI1+AI2
5:AI1-AI2
6:Min｛AI1，AI2｝
7:Max｛AI1，AI2｝
8: Pulse input
F11.03 Provision channel filtering time Range: 0.01～50.00s 0.20s
F11.04 Feedback channel filtering time Range: 0.01～50.00s 0.10s
F11.05 PID output filtering time Range: 0.00～50.00s 0.00s
The external reference signal and feedback signal usually carry some noise. those
noise signal can be filtered by setting the time constant of filter in F11.03 and
F11.04.The bigger the time constant is, the better the immunity capability, but
with a slow response. The shorter the time constant is, the faster the response, but
the immunity capability became weak.
The PID output filter time is the time of the filter for output frequency or torque,
the bigger time, the slower the response output.
F11.06 Provision digital setting Range: 0.00～10.00V 1.00V
This function can realize digital setting of reference via keypad.

u
Note
>
When the PID function is enabled, Setting F18.14 as 1 can adjust
pressure reference by press A V , otherwise the A
are invalid for adjusting reference in monitoring mode.
v keys

F11.07 Proportion Gain Kp Range: 0.000～9.999 0.100

F11.08 Integral Gain Ki Range: 0.000～9.999 0.100
F11.09 Differential Gain Kd Range: 0.000～9.999 0.000

171
7 Detailed function specification

F11.10 Sampling cycle T Range: 0.01～1.00s 0.10s

The bigger of the proportion gain of Kp, the faster the response, but oscillation
may easily occur.
If only proportion gain Kp is used in regulation, the offset cannot be eliminated
completely. To eliminate the offset, please use the integral gain Ki to form a PI control
system. The bigger Ki is, the faster the response, but oscillation may easily occur if Ki is
big enough.
The sampling cycle T refers to the sampling cycle of feedback value. The PI D
regulator calculates once in each sampling cycle. The bigger the sampling cycle is,
the slower the response.
F11.11 Deviation limit Range: 0.0～20.0% 2.0%
If defines the max. Deviation of the output from the reference, as shown in Fig.7-39,
the PID adjuster stops operation when the feedback value within this range. Setting
this parameter correctly will improve the moderation of the accuracy and stability of
the system
Feedback
Reference
L i i
\ / \ /s «

.Y ...Y...Y...Y..Y.
iOffset limit
A
t
/1
k
Time

Output Freq.

Time

Fig.7-39 Offset limit

0 .
Note
Offset limit is the percentage refer to the value of reference.
J
F11.12 PID differential amplitude limit Range: 0.00～100.00% 0.10%
In the PID regulator, the effect of differential is too sensitive too easy to cause
system oscillation, therefore limit the effect of differential PID in a smaller range,
F11.12 the parameter that used to set the output range of PID differential.
F11.13 Closed-loop regulation characteristic Range: 0,1 0
0: Positive effect. When the provision increases, select while requiring speed
of motor increase.
1: Negative effect. When the provision increases, select while requiring

172
 7 Detailed function specification

speed of motor decrease.

Value after
converted
Speed
10V
Positive Effect Positive Effect

Negative Effect Negative Effect

Reference » Feedback
0 10V 0 10V

Fig.7-40 Closed-loop characteristic Fig.7-41 Feedback characteristic

Feedback channel positive-negative
F11.14 Range: 0,1 0
characteristic
0: Positive characteristic. The relationship between reference and feedback
is positive
1: Negative characteristic. The relationship between reference and feedback
is negative
This parameter is used to change the feedback characteristic of the feedback
signal. After input into inverter through the feedback channel, the feedback
pressure will compare with the reference after regulated by the positive and
negative characteristic regulation, as shown in Fig.7-41
PID regulation upper Range: 0.00Hz～upper limit
F11.15 50.00Hz
limit frequency Frequency
PID regulation lower Range: 0.00Hz～upper limit
F11.16 0.00Hz
limit frequency Frequency
User can set up the parameters F11.15 and F11.16 to define the output lower limit
and upper limit frequency of the PID regulator.
F11.17 Integral regulation selection Range: 0,1 0
0: Stop integral regulating when the comparison value of the reference and
feedback reaches the range of threshold for integral separation
1: Keep integral regulating even thought the comparison value of the
reference and feedback reach the range of threshold integral separation
Adjusting this parameter can avoid integral saturation and improve the response
of the system.
PID threshold of the integral
F11.18 Range: 0.0～100.0% 100.0%
separation
PID integral separated function: there is no integral regulating just proportion
regulating during closed-loop control when the comparison value that between
173
 7 Detailed function specification

reference and feedback is bigger than this threshold. When the comparison is
smaller than this threshold, the integral regulating will be active, and can adjust
the response speed of system by adjusting this parameter.
Preset Closed-loop Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F11.19 0.00Hz
frequency limit frequency
Holding time of preset
F11.20 Range: 0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
Closed-loop frequency
This function can make the closed-loop adjuster into the stable status quickly.
When the closed-loop function start，the output frequency will ramp up to the preset
closed-loop frequency(F11.19) within the Acc time, and keep running the time that set
in F11.20 then start the closed-loop operation as shown is Fig.7-42
Output Freq.
Preset Freq.

Time
*
Hold time of Preset Freq.

Fig.7-42 Preset closed-loop operating

f

Preset closed-loop Function is ineffective when set F11.19 and

Note F11.20 as 0.

F11.21 Closed-loop output reversion selection Range: 0~2 2

0: The inverter will runs with the low limit frequency when the closed-loop
output value is negative
1:The inverter will reverse running when the value of the closed-loop output
is negative(be opposite of the initial direction )
2: determined by running demand. The motor running direction is
determined by demand direction.

The comparison value can be display in the PID monitor

parameters, it’s positive when the reference bigger than the
feedback value, and negative when reference smaller than
Note
feedback value.

174
 7 Detailed function specification

Closed-loop output
Range: 0.00Hz～upper limit
F11.22 reversion frequency 50.00Hz
Frequency
upper limit
The PID regulator is a kind of bipolar adjustment. By setting F11.21 and F11.22,
can choose whether the inverter reverse run in some degree frequency or not.
F11.23 Multiple closed-loop provision 1 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
F11.24 Multiple closed-loop provision 2 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
F11.25 Multiple closed-loop provision 3 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
F11.26 Multiple closed-loop provision 4 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
F11.27 Multiple closed-loop provision 5 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
F11.28 Multiple closed-loop provision 6 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
F11.29 Multiple closed-loop provision 7 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
Among the closed-loop reference channel, besides the 7 channels defined by
F11.01,the closed-loop reference can also be defined in F11.23～F11.29. The
priority of multi-closed-loop reference control is higher than the reference
channels that defined by F11.01.
Multi-closed-loop reference 1～7 can be selected by external terminals. Please
refer to the terminal function 19~21 of introductions to F08.18～F08.25.When the
function of Constant water supply is enable, the reference of constant water
pressure is decided by the multi-closed-loop reference which selected by external
terminals.
Computational formula: constant pressure reference = F12.06 × Multi-closed-loop
reference/10.00V.By using this functions can realize different times with a
different constant water pressure.

175
7 Detailed function specification

7.13 Constant pressure water supply function parameters Group: F12

Constant pressure water supply mode
F12.00 Range: 0～5 0
selection
0: disabled.
1: Inverter works in one-drive-two-pump mode.
2: Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one-drive-two-pump
mode.
3: Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one-drive-three-pump
mode.
4: Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one-drive-four-pump
mode.
5: Select inverterY1,Y2 as the double pump timing alternate constant
pressure water supply mode. While F12.00=5,F09.00=37,F09.01=38，realize the
timing alternate constant pressure water supply control between two pumps, only
one motor is running at most at any time, the time of timing alternate is defined by
F12.10. While F12.10=0, no alternate control, While F12.10=1，switch a running
pump while starting.
This function can be used to choose different kinds of constant pressure water
supply mode, and you should choose an extensible constant pressure board to
realize one-drive-three mode and one-drive-four mode and F00.19 should be set to
2.
When modify F12.00 from 0 to water supply mode is valid ， C-04,C-05
automatically relate constant pressure water supply setting pressure and feedback
pressure (including the display of halting and running).

r1. The function of Group F11 will be effective automatically whenx

the constant pressure supply function is enabled.
2. Except for the related parameters in Group F11 and F12 for
Closed-loop, the function of Yi should be enabled in F9 for the
inverter works in one-drive-two-pump mode without an extend
Note board.
3. Output terminal Y4/DO should be set to Y4.
4. When one inverter drive one pump with constant pressure water
supply, the parameter F09.00~F09.03 (Y1~Y4) can not be set
37~38.

Range: 0.000～the range of

F12.01 Target pressure setting 0.200Mpa
long-distance manometer
This parameter defined the target pressure of the constant pressure supply system.
The channels of the pressure reference and feedback are defined by F11.01 and

176
 7 Detailed function specification

F11.02.
Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F12.02 Sleep frequency threshold 30.00Hz
limit frequency
Range: 0.000～F12.06
F12.03 Revival pressure threshold 0.150Mpa
Mpa
The function of Sleep frequency threshold: To save energy and protect the motor,
when the water feedback pressure within the offset limit (F11.11), and the
operating frequency is under in the sleep frequency threshold (F12.02), after a
sleep delay time (F12.04), the system will enter a sleep mode and the operating
frequency will drop to 0.00Hz
Revival function: When the system is in the sleep mode, if the feedback water
pressure keep less than F12.03 (the revival pressure) a delay time (F12.05), the
system will revival from the sleep mode.
F12.04 Sleep delay time Range: 0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
This parameter is the delay time that from the feedback pressure meets the sleep
conditions to the system enter in sleep mode.
Within the sleep delay time, if the feedback pressure does not meet the sleep
conditions, the system will not enter into sleep mode
Sleep function is disabled when F12.04=0.
F12.05 Revival delay time Range: 0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
When the constant pressure supply system in the sleep state, if the feedback
pressure of system less than F12.11 which defined the revival pressure
threshold ,the system will revival and get out of sleep mode after the revival delay
time.
The range of long-distance
F12.06 Range: 0.001～9.999Mpa 1.000Mpa
manometer
This parameter defines the range of long-distance manometer. Setting this
parameter can correspond to the maximum feedback pressure with the analog
feedback signal 10V or 20mA
Allowed deviation of upper
limit frequency or lower limit
F12.07 Range: 0.1～100.0% 1.0%
frequency when add or
reduce pump
When output frequency reaches the deviation range of upper limited frequency
and the feedback is less than given value, adding pumps judge is available. When
output frequency reaches the deviation range of lower limited frequency and the
feedback is more than given value, decreasing pumps judge is available.
When F12.07=0.0%, output frequency reach upper or lower limitation frequency
and the pressure meets the requirement, then decrease pumps is available.

177
7 Detailed function specification

F12.08 Pump switch judging time Range: 0.0～999.9s 5.0s

When the output frequency up to the upper limit frequency (F11.15) but the
pressure still not meeting the requirement, the system will add pump after the
judging time.
When the output frequency down to the lower limit frequency (F11.16) but the
pressure still not meeting the requirement, the system will reduce pump after the
judging time.
Electromagnetic contactor
F12.09 Range: 0.1～10.0s 0.5s
switching delay time
This parameter defines the action delay time of magnetic control conductor when
it’s switch from power source supply to variable or from variable frequency
control to power source supply.
Automatic switching time
F12.10 Range: 0000～65535 minute 0
interval
By setting this parameter can avoid the rust of motor when it’s not work long time.
The inverter will switch the work status of the working pump and static pump
automatically and smartly under the switch interval.
The automatic switch function is disabled when set the parameter as 0000. The
system will switch one time when each restart of system as this parameter is 0001.
If the value of this parameter is bigger than 0002, the system will switch
automatically according the switch interval.
F12.11 Revival mode selection Range: 0,1 0
F12.12 Revival pressure coefficient Range: 0.01～0.99 0.75
When F12.11=0, the revival pressure of the constant pressure supply is the value
of F12.03.
WhenF12.11=1, the revival pressure is the calculating value of F12.12*F12.01
F12.13 Reserved
F12.14 Reserved

178
 7 Detailed function specification

7.14 Traverse, Fixed-length control Function Parameters Group:

F13
F13.00 Traverse function selection Range: 0,1 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Range: unit digit: 0,1
tens digit: 0,1
F13.01 Traverse operating mode 0000
hundreds digit: 0,1
thousands digit: 0,1
Unit digit: Start mode 1st
0: Auto start. The drive operates at the preset frequency of traverse for a
certain time thereafter enter traverse mode automatically.
1: Terminal manual mode. Choosing multi-function terminal(Xi= X1～
X8)as 56 function, when the terminal is enabled, the drive will enter traverse
mode. The drive will exit traverse operation and operate at the pre-set traverse
frequency when it’s disabled.
Tens digit: Traverse amplitude AW mode choosing
0: Variable swing. Amplitude AW changes with the central frequency and
the change rate relate to the definition of F13.02.
1: Fixed swing. Traverse operating amplitude AW is determined by Upper
limit Frequency and F13.02.
Note: The traverse central frequency is set by the main frequency.
Hundreds digit: Restart mode
0: Restart at the initial state.
1: Restart at the memorized state before stopping
Thousands digit: Traverse state saving when power off.
This function is effective when the start mode is Restarting from the reserved
memory state, and saving operating state when power off.
0: Not save
1: Save

0
Note
. When in variable amplitude mode, the channel of central
frequency is confirmed by F01.06.During the traverse frequency
operation, the Acc and Dec time are controlled only by traverse
frequency circle F13.04 when adjusting the central frequency.

179
7 Detailed function specification

F13.02 Traverse frequency swing value Range: 0.0～50.0% 10.0%

Variable amplitude: AW= the central frequency ×F13.02
Fixed amplitude: AW=Upper limit frequency ×F13.02

0
Note
. The traverse operating frequency is restricted by the upper and
lower limit of frequency. Incorrectly setting the frequency will lead
to abnormal of traverse operation.

F13.03 Sudden-jump frequency Range:0.0～50.0% 2.0%

As shown in Fig.7-43, there is not a jitter frequency when F13.03=0.
F13.04 Traverse cycle Range:0.1～999.9s 10.0s
F13.04 defines a complete cycle of traverse operation which including rising and
falling processed.
Triangular wave rising Range:0.0～98.0%(Traverse
F13.05 50.0%
time cycle)
Definition traverse rising time=F13.04×F13.05 (s), the traverse falling time=
F13.04×(1-F13.05)(s).
Please refer to Fig.7-43
F13.06 Preset frequency of Traverse Range:0.00～400.00Hz 0.00Hz
F13.06 defines the operating frequency of the Drive before entering traverse
operation.
Traverse preset frequency
F13.07 Range:0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
waiting time
F13.07 defines the operating time of Preset frequency before entering Traverse
operation when auto-start mode is enabled.
If manual start mode is available, F13.07 is disabled.
Please refer to Fig.7-43 as below.

180
 7 Detailed function specification

Hz Operating Fre.
Traverse amplitude
AW=Fset*F13.02
Upper Limit Freq
Central Freq +AW
Lower limit Freq -AW
a1
Preset Freq Jitter Freq
a1 =AW*F13.03

Time t
Rising time
Accelerate Traverse waiting Decelerate
time=F13.07 Traverse Cycle
according the Dec time
Run

Stop

Fig.7-43 Traverse operation

F13.08 Setting length Range: 0～65535m 0m

Number of pulses for axis
F13.09 Range: 1～10000 1
per circle
F13.10 Perimeter of shaft Range: 0.01～100.00cm 10.00cm
F13.11 Reserved
Correction coefficient of
F13.12 Range: 0.001～1.000 1.000
length
Set length, Actual length and Numbers of pulses per cycle are used for fixed
length control.
The Actual length is calculated by the number of pulses collected by terminal
Xi(i=1～8).
Allocate corresponding Xi terminal with 62(Length count input).
Actual length=(The number of Pulses×F13.10×F13.12)/ F13.09.
When the actual length (F00.02 = 39)exceeds the set length (F13.08)，the drive
can output a “Length reached” signal via Yi or relay.

o.
Note
When F00.02=39，Actual length can be monitored by C-01 in
running state, Count length function is available both V/F control
mode and Vector Control mode.
k

181
7 Detailed function specification

Processes when reaching the set

F13.13 Range: 0,1 1
length
0: Reset
When reaching the set length, the counter reset automatically.
Restart counting with the coming of next pulse.
1: Keep the record
When reaching the set length，the counter keep the record at present.
F13.14 Processes of length record when stop Range: 0,1 1
0: Reset
The counter reset automatically when stop the drive.
1: Keep the record.
When stop or power off, the length of current record keeps constant.

182
 7 Detailed function specification

7.15 Vector Control parameters Group: F14

F14.00 Speed/Torque control selection Range: 0,1 0
0: Speed control mode
1: Torque control mode (this parameter is effective when set F00.24 as 1 or
2).
When the control mode is vector control with PG or without PG, the user can
select torque control or speed control by setting the parameter of F14.00 or
through control multi-function terminal which selected as No.65 function.
Speed loop high speed Range:0.1～40.0(Valid when
F14.01 20.0
proportional Gain F00.24=1 or 2)
Speed loop high speed Range:0.001～10.000s(Valid
F14.02 0.040s
integral time when F00.24=1 or 2)
Speed loop low speed Range:0.1～80.0(Valid when
F14.03 20.0
proportional Gain F00.24=1 or 2)
Speed loop low speed Range:0.001～10.000s(Valid
F14.04 0.020s
integral time when F00.24=1 or 2)
Speed loop parameter Range:0.00Hz～20.00Hz(Valid
F14.05 5.00Hz
switching frequency when F00.24=1 or 2)
Through F14.01 to F14.05, you can set the proportional gain and integral time of
Speed loop regulator, so as to change the speed response characteristic under
vector control mode.
The system dynamic response of speed loop can be faster if the proportional gain
is increased or the integral time is decreased. However, if the proportional gain is
too large or the integral time is too small, the system tends to oscillate.
The suggested adjusting way as below:
When the default parameter is not suitable, please fine adjust the parameters based
on the default value. Proportional gain is usually adjusted first. Under the
condition that the system is immune from oscillation, proportional gain can be
increased as big as possible. Then adjust integral time so that the system responds
fast and will not be over adjusted.
The above parameters are valid for Closed-loop or Open-loop speed control mode,
invalid for V/F control and torque control mode.
Stable coefficient of low Range: 0～50(Valid when
F14.06 16
frequency generating F00.24=1 or 2)
When the motor connected to frequency inverter under a low frequency
generating status, Please adjusting this parameter appropriately.
For example, the frequency inverter will be unstable when drives a potential load
which is declining gradually. Increasing F14.06 will improve the stability of the
system.

183
7 Detailed function specification

Current loop proportional Range: 1～500(Valid when

F14.07 70
gain F00.24=1 or 2)
Range: 0.1～100.0ms(Valid
F14.08 Current loop integral time 4.0ms
when F00.24=1 or 2)
F14.07 and F14.08 are the PI regulator parameters of Current loop.
The system torque dynamic response can be faster if the Current loop proportional
gain P is increased or Current loop integral time constant Ti is decreased.
The system stability can be improved if the Current loop proportional gain P is
decreased or integral time constant Ti is increased.
In general, the above parameters don’t need change.
Motor-driven torque Range: 50.0～250.0%(Valid
F14.09 160.0%
current limit value when F00.24=1 ,2 and 3)
Braking torque Range: 50.0～250.0%(Valid
F14.10 160.0%
current limit value when F00.24=1 or 2)
It is the range of output torque of speed loop defined by the positive torque and
negative torque limit. When the application needs quick acceleration and
deceleration, this parameter can be appropriately increased to meet the specific
requirements. However, if it’s too large, the drive tends to over-current.
In torque control mode, the range of actual torque output is restricted to the above
limit too.
Asynchronous motor
Range: 20.0～100.0%(Valid
F14.11 flux-weakening control 80.0%
when F00.24=1 or 2)
coefficient
Asynchronous motor Range: 10.0～80.0%(Valid
F14.12 10.0%
Min. flux coefficient when F00.24=1 or 2)
Parameters of F14.11, F14.12 Used to correcting the weakening curve in
weakening field. The correction of the curve will improve the precision of speed
control during weakening field. The minimum field reference is the minimum
value of weakening field. And F14.12 is just available for Closed-loop vector
control mode.
F14.13 Torque provision channel selection Range: 0～8 0
0: Digital setting
1:AI1 analog provision(0-10V or 4-20mA corresponds to 0～200.0% Rated
torque current of the motor)
2:AI2 analog provision
3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting
4:Communication provision(Communication address：1D01) . (0～10000
corresponds to 0～200.0% Rated torque current of the motor )
5:EAI1 analog provision (Extensible)
6:EAI2 analog provision (Extensible)

184
 7 Detailed function specification

7: High speed Pulse provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
8: Terminal width provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
The range of the above channels which from the Min value to the Max value
corresponds to 0.0～200% Rated torque current of motor.
F14.14 Torque polarity setting Range: 00～12 00

Unit digit: Polarity of Torque reference

0: Positive
1: Negative
2: Defined by running command. While F14.13=2，and the ten's place of
F00.20 equals 0，the torque direction is determined by the polarity of AI2.
Tens digit: Polarity of Torque compensation
0: Same direction with torque reference
1: Opposite direction with torque reference
F14.14 defines the polarity of torque compensation and torque reference. When
select AI2, EAI1, EAI2 as provision channels and set as bipolar mode, the polarity
of torque provision depends on the polarity of the analog. At this time, the units
digit of F14.14 is invalid.
It’s available changing the direction of torque provision through multi-function
key.
Range:0.0～200.0%(Valid
F14.15 Torque digital setting value 0.0%
when F00.24=1 or 2)
When F14.13=0，the value of torque provision is set by F14.15. A 100.0% value
of F14.15 corresponds to the rated current of motor. The actual output torque will
be decreased when the motor under a weaken field status. When choosing digital
setting, press up and down keypad can revise the torque value.
Forward speed limit channel
F14.16 Range: 0～8 0
selection in torque control mode
0: Digital setting
1:AI1 analog provision
2:AI2 analog provision
3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting
4: Communication provision(Communication address: 1D0A).
5:EAI1 analog provision (Extensible)
6:EAI2 analog provision (Extensible)
7: High speed Pulse provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
8: Terminal width provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
When positive torque provided, if the load torque is smaller than the output
torque, the motor’s rotational speed will rise forward continuously to the forward

185
7 Detailed function specification

frequency limit defined by limit channel (F14.16),so as to avoiding runaway of

the motor.
Reverse frequency limit channel
F14.17 Range: 0～8 0
selection in torque control mode
0: Digital setting
1:AI1 analog provision
2:AI2 analog provision
3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting
4: Communication provision(Communication address: 1D0B).
5:EAI1 analog provision (Extensible)
6:EAI2 analog provision (Extensible)
7: High speed Pulse provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
8: Terminal width provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
When negative torque provided, if the load torque is smaller than the output
torque, the motor’s rotational speed will rise reverse continuously to the reverse
frequency limit defined by limit channel (F14.17),so as to avoiding runaway of
the motor.
Forward Speed
Range: 0.00Hz～Upper limit
F14.18 limit in Torque 50.00Hz
freq.(Valid when F00.24=1 or 2)
control mode
Reverse Speed limit
Range: 0.00Hz～Upper limit
F14.19 in Torque control 50.00Hz
freq.(Valid when F00.24=1 or 2)
mode
When F14.16=0，F14.17=0，the related limit frequency of the positive torque or
negative torque are confirmed by F14.18 and F14.19.
Acc and Dec time of Range: 0.000～60.000s Valid
F14.20 0.100s
torque provision when F00.24=1 or 2)
The torque provision from the provision channel will form the final torque
provision after the Acc and Dec time of F14.20.Suitable value of F14.20 can avoid
vibration of the motor which caused by saltation of torque provision.
Range: 0.0～100.0% Valid
F14.21 Torque compensation 0.0%
when F00.24=1 or 2)
Tens digit of F14.14 and F14.21 define the characteristic and value of torque
compensation. When Large torque losing which caused by mechanical losing of
motor, Setting torque compensation is needed.100% of F14.21 corresponds to the
rated torque current of motor.
Positive torque gain Range: 50.0～150.0% Valid
F14.22 100.0%
regulation coefficient when F00.24=1 or 2)
Negative torque gain Range: 50.0～150.0% Valid
F14.23 100.0%
regulation coefficient when F00.24=1 or 2)

186
 7 Detailed function specification

When choosing positive torque provision, adjusting F14.22 will correct the
matching of the actual output torque and the torque provision if they are
unmatched.
When choosing negative torque provision, adjusting F14.23 will correct the
matching of the actual output torque and the torque provision if they are
unmatched.
Range: 0.0～300.0% (Valid
F14.24 Flux braking coefficient 0.0%
when F00.24=1 or 2)
Under open-loop and closed-loop speed control mode, increasing the strength of
the field can realize fast decreasing of the motor when stop. The energy generated
during the field braking process will be consumed in a form of heat inside of the
motor. As a result, the temperature of motor inside will increase when field
braking frequently. Please care about the temperature of the motor not over the
allowed maximum value. If an operation command be given during the process of
field braking, the field braking function will be canceled and the frequency
inverter will operate to the set frequency again. Please disable the field braking
function when using braking resistor.
Pre-excitation start-up Range: 0.1～3.0(Valid when
F14.25 0.5
time constant F00.24=1)
In SVC control mode, decrease the value of F14.25 appropriately will decrease
the start time of the motor, realizing fast start performance.
Speed loop proportional Range: 0.010～6.000(Valid
F14.26 0.500
gain when F00.24=3)
Speed loop integral time Range: 0.010～9.999(Valid
F14.27 0.360
constant when F00.24=3)
Adjusting F14.26 and F14.27 will change the responsive characteristic of Vector
control.
Motor stabilization Range: 10～300(Valid when
F14.28 100
coefficient F00.24=3)
When the motor which connected to the drive is vibration and not stable,
increasing F14.28 will get rid of the vibration.
Compensation gain of Range: 100.0～130.0%(Valid
F14.29 100.0%
vibration restrain when F00.24=3)
The compensation is 0 when F14.29=100%.Large enough of this value will lead
to over-current when start operation.
Torque compensation Range: 0.00Hz～Upper limit
F14.30 0.00Hz
limit frequency Freq(Valid when F00.24=1,2)
When the output frequency is bigger than the value of F14.30, the torque
compensation defined by F14.21 is 0.And the actual torque compensation will
linear decrease from 0Hz to the frequency of F14.30.

187
7 Detailed function specification

7.16 Motor parameters Group: F15

F15.00 Reserved
Asynchronous motor Depend on
F15.01 Range: 0.1～6553.5KW
rated power type
Asynchronous motor Depend on
F15.02 Range: 1～690V
rated voltage type
Asynchronous motor Depend on
F15.03 Range: 0.1～6553.5A
rated current type
Asynchronous motor Depend on
F15.04 Range: 0.00～600.00Hz
rated frequency type
Asynchronous motor Depend on
F15.05 Range: 0～60000r/min
rated rotational speed type
Asynchronous motor
F15.06 Range: 1～7 2
Poles No.
Set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether V/F
control mode or vector control mode is adopted, otherwise it may be abnormal.
To achieve better V/F or vector control performance, motor auto-tuning is
required.
The motor auto-tuning accuracy depends on the correct setting of motor
nameplate parameters.
Range: 0.001～65.535Ω(AC
Asynchronous drive power＜7.5KW) Depend on
F15.07 motor Stator
Range: 0.0001～6.5535Ω(Ac type
resistance
drive power≥7.5KW)
Range: 0.001～65.535Ω(AC
Asynchronous drive power＜7.5KW) Depend on
F15.08 motor Rotor
Range: 0.0001～6.5535Ω(Ac type
resistance
drive power≥7.5KW)
Range: 0.01～655.35mH(AC
Asynchronous drive power＜7.5KW) Depend on
F15.09 motor leakage
Range: 0.001～65.535mH (AC type
inductance
drive power≥7.5KW)
Range: 0.1～6553.5mH (AC
Asynchronous drive power＜7.5KW) Depend on
F15.10 motor mutual
Range: 0.01～655.35mH (AC type
inductance
drive power≥7.5KW)
Asynchronous
Depend on
F15.11 motor no-load Range: 0.01～655.35A
type
current

188
 7 Detailed function specification

F15.07～F15.11 is the characteristic parameters of asynchronous motor, not

display on the nameplate, which need detected by auto-tuning. To achieved a
good control performance, please let the motor unload before start rotating
auto-tuning. For the asynchronous motor that cannot be disconnected from the
load, you can choose static auto-tuning or input the motor parameters manually.
Another way is just set F15.01 and used the default parameters in F15.01～
F15.11.Meantime,Choosing different type of G and P will also change the default
parameters in F15.01～F15.11.
F15.12
～ Reserved
F15.18

F15.19 Motor parameter auto-tuning selection Range: 0～3 0

0: No action
1: Static auto-tuning
It is applied to applications where the motor cannot be disconnected from the load
or the process is complicated. Values on the motor’s nameplate should be input
correctly before staring auto-tuning(F15.01-F15.06),Set F15.11 as 1 and
press ENTER
DATA ,back to monitoring mode, then press to start auto-tuning
which with a “tune” symbol on the keyboard.
After auto-tuning, the Drive will exit process automatically and the detected
values of the stator’s resistance, rotor’s resistance and the leakage inductance will
be saved in F15.07-F15.09.
In static auto-tuning mode, the value of No-load current and mutual inductive
reactance will not be detected. The user can input the related values with the
reference of the Motor factory data or the data on the motor test report. Without
related value, please adopt the Default value. Otherwise it may cause negative
influence on the performance of motor.
During the process of auto-tuning, any abnormal please press RESET STOP
to stop
auto-tuning.
2: Rotating auto-tuning of Asynchronous motor
Rotating auto-tuning function is suitable for the applications which the load of
motor is lighter than 30% of the rated load or some kind of small inertia load.
Please try your best to disconnect the load of your motor and make the motor in
static or unload state so that auto-tuning the value of motor exactly.
Values on the motor’s nameplate should be input correctly before staring
/ ENTER \
auto-tuning(F15.01-F15.06),Set F15.19 as 2 and press VjDATA / ,back to monitoring
mode, then press to start auto-tuning which with a “tune” symbol on the

189
7 Detailed function specification

keyboard.
After auto-tuning, the Drive will exit process automatically and the detected
values of the stator’s resistance, rotor’s resistance, the leakage inductance,
No-load current and mutual inductive reactance will be saved in F15.07-F15.11.
STOP
During the process of auto-tuning, any abnormal please press RESET to stop
auto-tuning.
3: Reserved
F15.20
～ Reserved
F15.22

190
 7 Detailed function specification

7.17 Closed-loop encoder parameters Group: F16

F16.00 Zero-speed servo enabled Range:0,1 0
Zero-speed servo enabled
0：Zero-speed servo is invalid
1：Zero-speed servo is valid
While F16.00=1 or the terminal function 67 is valid, under the circumstance that
there is no run command and the motor speed is less than the lower limit F01.12,
the inverter is on the zero-speed control .
F16.01 Encoder line number Range: 0～10000 1024

This parameter should be set as same as the value of encoder installed on the axis
of motor, or it will lead to an offset between the monitor speed and the actual
speed of the motor.
Range: units digit:0,1
F16.02 Direction of encoder 00
tens digit:0～3
Units digit: Phase sequence of AB phase
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Tens digit: Set of point positioning and seeking position direction
0: Seeking position according to command direction.
1: Seeking position according to forward direction.
2: Seeking position according to reverse direction.
3: Seeking position according to random direction.
The above parameters define the Encoder pulses per revolution and AB phase
sequence of encoder, wrong phase sequence will lead to over-current alarm of the
drive.
Encoder fractional frequency
F16.03 coefficient Range: 0.001～60.000 1.000

This parameter can correct the actual speed of the motor when the encoder not
installed on the axis of motor.
For example, when the encoder installed on a reduction gears with a 10:1 ratio,
you should set F16.02 as 10.000 so that get a correct feedback of actual motor
speed.
Because of encoder usually install on the axis of motor in closed-loop vector
control mode, so there is no need setting this parameters in this mode.
F16.04 Encoder filtering coefficient Range: 5～100 15
In some occasion with strong interference, increasing the value of F16.04 properly

191
7 Detailed function specification

will weaken the vibration of the motor which because of the interference of the
encoder signal. Meantime, a too big and too small value of F16.04 will lead to the
vibration of the system.

u
Note
>
Except for correct setting of F16 parameters Group, Correct
setting of F00.19 is also needed for a normal Closed-loop vector
control.
1 .

F16.05 Position control mode Range: 0～4 0

0:Position control is invalid。
1:Point positioning mode。
2:Recovery point positioning mode
3～4:Reserved
While F16.05=1 ， No.66 multi-function input terminal is valid, inverter is
positioned on the angle defined by F16.12 according to the position seeking mode
defined by the ten's place of F16.02. Under the mode of point positioning, if
losing the Z pulse, the inverter will alarm fault of E-40 (Z pulse losing)
While F16.05=2，No.69 multi-function input terminal is valid, under the non-jog
running command, the motor will run to the original location recorded by system,
the original location can be determined by the terminal function 68 or the first
power on.
Position control maximum
F16.06 Range: 0.01～100.00Hz 30.00Hz
frequency
Position control minimum
F16.07 Range: 0.01～5.00Hz 0.01Hz
frequency
Parameter of F16.06, F16.07 are not limited by F01.11, F01.12, F01.13.
Creeping afterpulse count
F16.08 Range:0～60000 30
before finishing the position
Under the set of positioning control for the parameter, it is the pulse count that the
motor creeps at frequency of F16.07.
The parameter setting should be reasonable, if the setting value is too low, the
final positioning may overshoot, sequentially affect the ultimate positioning
precision; if the setting value is too high, the final positioning may switch from
the higher output frequency to the creeping frequency, sequentially cause the
vibration for motor and machine system. When the inertia is high but friction is
low, the setting value should be increased.

192
 7 Detailed function specification

\ 减速终了前脉冲数
Pulse count before deceleration end

jL
目标值点
t
Target value point

Fig. 7-44 Afterpulse when deceleration is over at positioning

Positioning reaches to the

F16.09 Range:1～255 2
pulse range
The parameter is set as the positioning control, the positioning reaches within the
permissible error range of position to target setting value. If set F16.09=2，within
the ±2 pulses range of target position, it defaults the position has reached, see the
Fig. 7-45 Then terminal Y can output position reaching signal.

PSG

在此范围内，认为定位到达
Deem positioning reaches under this range

-A POS reaching +A
POS到达 t
time
时间点point

Fig. 7-45 Positioning reaches to the setting range

F16.10 Position control gain Range:1～5000 200
The bigger this parameter，the faster the location responds, but too higher setting
value may cause the system oscillation.
F16.11 PSG alteration point Range:0.01～30.00Hz 5.00Hz
The smaller this parameter, the faster the location responds, but too lower setting
value may cause the system oscillation.
Point positioning relative
F16.12 Range:0.00～360.00 degree 0.00
to Z-axis angle

193
7 Detailed function specification

Positioning control
F16.13 acceleration-deceleration Range:1～60000 200
time
The bigger this parameter，the faster the location responds, but too higher setting
value may cause the system oscillation. The unit of time is determined by the
F01.19, the factory default of F16.13 is 20.0s.

194
 7 Detailed function specification

7.18 Reserved parameters Group1:F17

F17.00
～ Reserved
F17.20

195
7 Detailed function specification

7.19 Enhanced Control Functions Parameters Group: F18

Operation panel control
F18.00 Range: 0～15 0
frequency binding
F18.00 can bundle operation panel with frequency reference channels, to achieve
synchronous switching.
0: No bundling
1: Keyboard digital provision
2:AI1 analog provision
3:AI2 analog provision
4: Terminal UP/DOWN adjust setting
5: Communication provision (MODBUS and FieldBus used a same
storage registers)
6:EAI1 analog provision (Extensible)
7:EAI2 analog provision (Extensible)
8: High speed Pulse provision (Please choose the corresponding functions
of X8)
9: Terminal pulse-width provision (Please choose the corresponding
functions of X8)
10: Terminal encoder provision (Defined by X1 and X2)
11～15:Reserved
Different control command channels can be bundled to the same frequency
reference channel. After success bundled, the bundled frequency reference
channel have a highest priority and just available for Main frequency bundling.
Terminal control frequency
F18.01 Range: 0～15 0
binding
Please refer to the description of F18.00
Communication control
F18.02 Range: 0～15 0
frequency binding
Please refer to the description of F18.00
Digital frequency integral Range: units digit: 0,1
F18.03 00
function selection tens digit: 0,1
Units digit: Keyboard UP/DOWN Integration control
0: Integral function enabled
1: Integral function disabled
Tens digit: Terminal UP/DOWN Integration control
0: Integral function enabled
1: Integral function disabled
This function should cooperate with 16 and 17 functions of multi-function

196
 7 Detailed function specification

terminal.
Keyboard UP/DOWN
F18.04 Range: 0.01～50.00Hz 0.10Hz
integral rate
When the keyboard UP/DOWN Integration is enabled, if keep adjusting the
frequency in the same direction, the Integration effect will be effective, and the
Integration rate is determined by F18.04.
This function is suitable for the applications that need adjusting frequency
quickly.
Keyboard no integral single
F18.05 Range: 0.01～10.00Hz 0.01Hz
step’s size setup
When the keyboard UP/DOWN integral function disabled, the rate of adjusting
frequency fixed by the value of F18.05.
Terminal UP/DOWN
F18.06 Range: 0.01～50.00Hz 0.20Hz
Integral rate
Terminal no integral single
F18.07 Range: 0.01～10.00Hz 0.10Hz
step’s size setup
Please refer to the functions of F18.04 and F18.05 for the functions of F18.06 and
F18.07.
F18.08 Droop control decline frequency Range: 0.00～10.00Hz 0.00Hz
When several drivers drive one load, the function can make the drives share the
load equally. When the load of one drive is heavier, the drive will reduce its
output frequency to shed part of the load.
This function is suitable for the share of several motors which with a common
load. The value of F18.08 is the maximum reduced frequency when the drive
reaches the rated power.
F18.09 Setup accumulate power on time Range: 0～65535h 0
F18.10 Setup accumulate run time Range: 0～65535h 0
When the actual accumulate operation time reach to the set accumulated operation
time (F18.10), the drive will output an indication signal. Please refer to the
description of F09.00～F09.03.
F18.09 defined the expected accumulated time of power on from Ex factory.
\

9
Note
Power-on time and accumulated run time can be checked by
monitoring parameters group C.
1

r
V. -
i v |
|
|
*

«*. «- -' £|
.^ | '
£•
) |H
| - I ;- ’
C" .s *'v./Yr * */. • > . 1 1
|

F18.11 Timing run function enable Range: 0,1 0

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
197
7 Detailed function specification

F18.12 Timing run stop time Range: 0.1～6500.0Min 2.0Min

When F18.11 Timing operation function enabled, the driver will start the timer
with inverter start.
The drive will stop automatically and the multi-function Yi (Set Yi as the 33
function) will output an indicator signal when reach to the set stop time.

a
Note
The timer of inverter start form 0 every times, the user can
monitor the current operation time through the F0 Group.

F18.13 Currently run arrival time Range: 0.0～6500.0Min 1.0Min

When the actual operation time reach to this time, the multi-function Yi (choose
Yi as 34 function) will output an indicator signal of “Currently operation time
reached”.
Keyboard UP/DOWN selection
F18.14 Range: 0～6 0
under monitor mode
0: Keyboard frequency provision frequency adjusting
1: PID digital reference value adjusting
2～6:Reserved
When F18.14 =1, UP/DOWN is used to adjust the PID digital reference value in
Monitor Mode merely.
When F18.14 =0, UP/DOWN is used to adjust the frequency value not only in
Monitor Mode when choose frequency digital reference channel.
V/F vibration restrain end Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F18.15 50.00Hz
frequency limit frequency
In V/F Control mode, when the output frequency of inverter is bigger than the
limit frequency，the suppression of F03.12 will be disabled. Adjusting F18.15 can
restrain the shake phenomenon of motor in a large range.
Torque closed loop control Range: 0,1（when
F18.16 1
selection F00.24=1 or 2）
When F18.16=0，torque open loop control is available
When F18.16=1，torque close loop control is available, which can increase the
precision of torque control
Cooling fan control Range: units digit: 0～2
F18.17 00
selection tens digit: 0,1
Units digit:fan control mode
0:Smart fan
1:Inverter is running all the time after power on
2:No running for fan, but it starts automatically when the temperature is
higher than 75 degree.

198
 7 Detailed function specification

Tens digit:Speed regulation fan control mode.

0:Smart PWM Speed regulation
1:Running at highest speed.
Under the smart control, after stopping the inverter, if the detection temperature is
lower than 35 degree, the fan stop running automatically in 20s.

F18.18
～ Reserved
F18.24

199
 7 Detailed function specification

7.20 Protective Relevant Function Parameters Group:F19

Range: 0.0～20.0s
Power off restart waiting
F19.00 (0 indicates disabled this 0.0s
time
function）
When the power is off, then power-on, whether this inverter will start
automatically after a waiting time.
When F19.00=0.0s, after the power off then power-on, inverter will not start
automatic. F19.00≠0.0s, after the power off then power-on again, if all is ready,
inverter will run automatically with the start method defined by F02.00 after
waiting the time defined by F19.00.
r
Conditions for repower-on after power-off: it should be in the k

running status before power-off; there’s no fault and running signal

maintained when power-on again; there’s no other factors which
Note
affect normal starting.
V

Range: 0～10
F19.01 Fault self-recovery times (0 indicates no self-recovery 0
function)
Fault self-recovery interval
F19.02 Range: 0.5～20.0s 5.0s
time
When the inverter is running, because of fluctuation of load, faults may happen in
some case and it will top to output. In order not to stop the operation of equipment,
choosing the recovery functions No alarm, stop in stopping mode. Inverter will
recovery to run with speed-checking restart style, within the setting time, if inverter
cannot run, then fault protection will begin, stop running. No alarm, when the self
recovery times of fault are set to 0, self recovery function stops.

1.When using fault self recovery function, and make sure the
equipment is permitted and inverter do not enter fault.
2.Self recovery function have the effect on power-on terminal
protection, clock fault. overload and over-heated, output
! short-circuit, short circuit to ground ,and the lack-voltage when
running of fault Protection is disabled.
3.When F19.00≠0,open stop and restart function. We can start this
equipment without operators, so be careful to use this function.

Motor overload protection

F19.03 Range: 0～2 2
action selection
When the AC motors is overloaded , this mode of Protection will happen.

200
 7 Detailed function specification

0: Alarm, continue operation; It happens with only warning, no motor

overload Protection characteristic (used cautiously, at this time, inverter has
nothing to do with load motor for overload protection;
1: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode;
2: Fault, Free stop. When it is overloaded , the output of inverter is block ,
this AC motor free stop .
Motor overload protection Range: 10.0～800.0%
F19.04 100.0%
coefficient （Motor rated current）
To protect the loading motors with different types from overloading effectively,
make sure that the parameter F15.03 (motor rated current) is set according to the
motor nameplate.
The motor overloading time can be adjusted by adjusting F19.04, As shown in
Fig.7-46, when the output current of motor equals 150% of motor's rated current,
and continues for the time determined by 4min*F19.04, then alarm for motor
overloading protection. If F19.04=120.0% ， then the overloading time is
4min*120.0%=4.8min. The minimum overloading time of motor is 5s.
过载时间
Overloading time
80min

40min

15min
| |

I I

6min
1- 1

4min
2.5min
|||

2min
[

90s
60s
20s
-

115% 125% 135% 145% 155% 165% 175% 185% 195% 230% Rated
电机额定 current
percentage
电流百分比 of motor

Fig.7-46 Electronic thermal relay protection

This adjustable value can base on the user’s setting. In the same condition, if the
AC motor is overloaded and need the fast protection, then decrease F19.04, or else
increase.
Inverter overload pre-alarm
F19.05 Range: 0,1 0
detection selection
0: Detection all the time. during the working process of inverter , it still
work after detecting overload situation.
1: Enable only constant speed detection. Only the inverter work in a
constant speed mode, it still works after detecting overload situation.

201
7 Detailed function specification

Inverter overload pre-alarm Range: 20～180%

F19.06 130%
detection level (Inverter rated current)
Inverter overload pre-alarm
F19.07 Range: 0.0～20.0s 5.0s
delay time
If output current higher parameter F19.06,the set electrical level will go though
delay time of F19.07,open collector will output enabled signal (please refer to
fig7-47 and parameter list F09.00~F09.03).

Il
Warning level Output current
(F19.06)

l
Yi '

valid valid
V i ? w% Time
F19.07 —
F19.07

Fig.7-47 Overload alarm

Motor underload Range: 0.0～120.0%
F19.08 50.0%
alarm detection level (Motor rated current）
Motor underload
F19.09 Range：0.1～60.0s 2.0s
alarm detection time
The output current Inverter will lower than Underload alarm detection level
F19.08 (definite the value, comparing to motor rating current ) , and the last time
will over motor underload alarm detection level time F19.09,then Yi will output
underload alarm Signal .
Motor underload Range: units digit: 0～2
F19.10 00
alarm detection action tens digit: 0～2
Units digit: detection selection.
0: No detection.
1: The operation has been detected all the time. This detection is enabled
during the running process of inverter.
2: Detect in constant speed mode only. This detection is enabled during the
constant speed mode only.
Tens digit: action selection.
0: when it’s in alarm, continue operation. inverter will only warn when
detecting motor is underload alarm
1: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode
2: Fault, Free stop .The inverter will detect motor is in underload alarm, and

202
 7 Detailed function specification

it will lock PWM output, the motor will stop with free rotation.
Range: units digit: 0,1
Input & output phase loss,
tens digit: 0,1
F19.11 short circuit detection 1111
hundreds digit: 0,1
action
thousands digit: 0,1
Units digit: input phase failure protect
0: No detection.
1: Fault, Free stop .When inverter detect that the input is lacked one phase,
alarm in input lacked, alarm, and free stop.
Tens digit: output phase failure protection
0 : No detection.
1:Fault, Free stop .When inverter detect that the output is lacked one phase,
alarm in input lacked, then Free stop.
Hundreds digit: power-on will detect Short circuit protection.
0: No detection.
1: Fault, Free stop. When inverter is power-on, the output to earth is
short-circuiting. At this time, the fault of short-circuiting to earth while power on
is alarmed, the inverter freely stops.
Thousands digit: The detection to earth Short circuit protection in the running
mode.
0: No detection.
1: Fault, Free stop. When inverter is power-on, the output to earth is
short-circuiting during the running process. At this time, the fault of
short-circuiting to earth while running is alarmed, the inverter freely stops.
F19.12 Overvoltage stall selection Range: 0,1 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled
Overvoltage stall protection
F19.13 Range: 100～150% 125%
voltage
During deceleration, the motor’s decelerate rate may be lower than that of drive’s
output frequency due to the load inertia. At this time, the motor will feed the
energy back to the drive, resulting in the voltage rise on the drive's DC bus. If no
measures taken, the drive will trip due to over voltage.
During the deceleration, the drive detects the bus voltage and compares it with the
over voltage point at stall defined by F19.13. If the bus voltage exceeds the stall
over-voltage point, the output frequency of the inverter will stop decreasing.
When the bus voltage become lower than the point, then run slowly, as shown in
Fig. 7-48.

203
7 Detailed function specification

Overvoltage
point at stall

Time

Output freq.

Time
Fig. 7-48 Over-voltage at stall
Automatic current limit
F19.14 Range: 50～230% 170%
level
Frequency decline rate of
F19.15 Range: 0.00～99.99Hz/s 10.00Hz/s
automatic current limit
Automatic current limit
F19.16 Range: 0,1 0
action selection
0: Constant speed disabled.
1: Constant speed enabled.
Auto current limiting function is used to limit the load current smaller than the
value defined by F19.14 in real time. Therefore the drive will not trip due to surge
over-current. This function is especially useful for the applications with big load
inertia or big change of load.
F19.14 defines the threshold of auto current limiting. It is a percentage of the
drive’s rated current.
F19.15 defines the decrease rate of output frequency when the drive is in auto
current limiting status.
If F19.15 is set too small, overload fault may occur. If it is set too big, the
frequency will change too sharply and therefore, the drive may be in generating
status for longtime, which may result in overvoltage protection.
Auto current limiting function is always active in Acc or Dec process. Whether
the function is active in constant speed operating process is decided by F19.16.
F19.16=0 Auto current limiting function is disabled inconstant speed operating
process;
F19.16=1 Auto current limiting function is enabled inconstant speed operating
process;
In auto current limiting process, the drive’s output frequency may change;
therefore, it is recommended not to enable the function when the drive’s output
frequency is required stable.

204
 7 Detailed function specification

F19.17 Rapid current-limiting coefficient Range: 150%～250% 230%

The rapid current limit function can reduce the AC drive's over-current faults at
maximum, guaranteeing uninterrupted running of the AC drive. If the AC drive is
in a rapid current limit state for a long time, the AC drive may be overheated or
overloaded for further protection.
The lower the setting of the F19.17, the more sensitive the rapid current limit is.
When the F19.17 equals 250%, the rapid current limit function is invalid.
Motor run section selection
F19.18 Range: 0,1 0
when instant power off
0: disabled
1: enabled
Frequency droop rate when
F19.19 Range: 0.00～99.99Hz/s 10.00Hz/s
instant power off
Voltage rebound estimate
F19.20 Range: 0.00～10.00s 0.10s
time when instant power off
Action estimate voltage
F19.21 Range: 60～100% 80%
when instant power off
Allowed the longest off time
F19.22 Range: 0.30～5.00s 2.00s
when instant power off

Bus voltage
F19.20

F19.21

Time
Run freq.

Deceleration Acceleration Time

time time
Run freq

F19.22 Time

Fig 7-49 AC drive action diagram upon instantaneous power failure

205
7 Detailed function specification

Upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the DC bus voltage of
the AC drive reduces. This function enables the AC drive to compensate the DC
bus voltage reduction with the load feedback energy by reducing the output
frequency so as to keep the AC drive running continuously.
If F19.18 = 1, upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the AC
drive decelerates. Once the bus voltage resumes to normal, the AC drive
accelerates to the set frequency. If the bus voltage remains normal for the time
exceeding the value set inF19.20, it is considered that the bus voltage resumes to
normal.
When instantaneous power failure happens, if the time is exceed the time of
F19.22 definite, inverter No alarm, stop in stopping mode Free stop.
Terminal external device
F19.23 Range: 0～2 2
fault action selection
0: Alarm, continue operation .When inverter checked that Terminal of the
external is no alarm, stop in stopping mode enabled, it will alarm, then run
continue. Under this mode, the inverter will do nothing with Terminal of the
external in No alarm, stop in stopping mode, so please cautiously use.
1: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode. When Inverter detect terminal
outside fault is enabled, alarm, and then press Stop in stopping mode.
2: Fault, Free stop .When inverter detect terminal external fault is enabled,
alarm for external equipment fault, and free stop.
Power on terminal protection
F19.24 Range: 0,1 0
selection
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When setting power down and then restart function is enabled, this function is
disabled. When the running command channel is terminal command, and when
power-on and detection run the command is enabled, it will get terminal
protection with faults, this function only is enabled for terminal FWD/REV
function.
F19.25 Provide lost detection value Range: 0～100% 0%
F19.26 Provide lost detection time Range: 0.0～20.0s 0.5s
When setting PID is lower than F19.25 definition continuous(setting the Max. as
base), and the constant time is over than the time that F19.26 definition detected,
then PID setting will lost, inverter will run base on F19.31 Units place set.PID
loss detection show on fig 7-50.
F19.27 Feedback lost detection value Range: 0～100% 12%
F19.28 Feedback lost detection time Range: 0.0～20.0s 0.5s
206
 7 Detailed function specification

When the feedback value of PID is lower than F19.27 definite(setting the input as
base, and the constant time is over than the time that F19.28 definition detected,
then PID setting will lost.
Inverter will run base on F19.31 Tens place set.PID loss detection show on fig
7-50.
Deviation magnitude
F19.29 Range: 0～100% 50%
abnormal detection value
Deviation magnitude
F19.30 Range: 0.0～20.0s 0.5s
abnormal detection time
When the Error amount of PID is higher than F19.29 definite(setting the input as
base, and the constant time is over than the time that F19.30 definition detected,
then PID setting will lost. inverter will run base on F19.31 hundred’s place
set.PID loss detection show on fig 7-50.
Close loop value
(setting, feedback, error value)

The detection
value

Less than detection time No detection more than detection time

No alarm when detection Failure alarm when detection

Time
Fig. 7-50 Closed loop detection timing diagram

Range: units digit: 0~3

Protection action
F19.31 tens digit: 0~3 000
selection 1
hundreds digit: 0~3
This parameter definite the Internal PID controls the action selection of the setting
loss and the fault Error amount. When it’s set as 0 OR 1, inverter will have no
response. And with no protection selection, users should set this parameter basing
on the actual applications.
Units digit: setting PID lost motion detection.
0: no detection.
1: Alarm, continue operation
2: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode
3: Fault, Free stop.
Tens digit: PID feedback for lost motion detection.

207
7 Detailed function specification

0: no detection.
1: Alarm, continue operation.
2: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode.
3: Fault, Free stop.
Hundreds digit: The amount of error fault for PID detection operation
0: no detection.
1: Alarm, continue operation
2: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode
3: Fault, Free stop.

Range: units digit: 0~2

Protection action tens digit: 0~2
F19.32 1200
selection 2 hundreds digit: 0~2
thousands digit: 0,1
This parameter definite the communication fault, E2PROM fault, Contactor fault
and lack-voltage when it’s in No alarm, stop in stopping mode for the action
selection of inverter. When it’s set as 0, during the fault situation, inverter will
only alarm. And with no protection selection, users should set this parameter
basing on the actual applications.
Units digit: communication fault action, including communication replay and
fault.
0: Alarm, continue operation
1: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode
2: Fault, free stop .
Tens digit: E2PROM fault action selection.
0: Alarm, continue operation
1: Alarm, stop according to the stop mode
2: Fault, free stop.
Hundreds digit: Contactor fault action selection.
0: Alarm, continue operation
1: Alarm, stop according to the stop mode
2: Fault, free stop.
Thousands digit: running lack-Voltage fault display action selection.
0: no detection.
1: Fault, free stop.
F19.33 Reserved
F19.34 Reserved

208
 7 Detailed function specification

Fault indication and clock Range: units digit: 0,1

F19.35 00
during the period of recovery tens digit: 0,1
Units digit: During automatic reset of fault display selection.
0: Action. During automatic reset, Yi and Relay of will update display the
Signal based on the internal state.
1: No action. During automatic reset, Yi and Relay display Signal No action.
Tens digit: Lock function selection, to realize display before power-off.
0: disabled.
1: enabled. When this function is enabled, if the inverter shows the fault
before the last time power down, then the inverter will display the fault last time
fault state, make sure that users will know about the inverter’s potential faults.
Continuous run frequency
F19.36 Range: 0～3 0
selection when alarm
This parameter defines the run frequency when users choose “Alarm, continues to
run” for the inverter’s failure.
0: running at the current setting frequency.
1: running at the upper limiting frequency.
2: running at the lower limit frequency.
3: running at the fault Alternate frequency.
Abnormal standby Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
F19.37 10.00Hz
frequency frequency
This parameter definite the alternative running frequency when inverter fault ,
user can use it along with parameterF19.36.
Disconnection testing Range: 0.0～8.0s
F19.38 0.0s
time of encoder (No detection while at 0）
When the inverter runs with the closed-loop vector mode，the detection starts
while the run frequency is higher than 1Hz, when the A,B-phase signal of the
encoder continues for the time set in F19.38, and no feedback has been received,
then the inverter alarms the fault of E-37 and freely stop.
Overspeed detection Range: 0.0～120.0%
F19.39 120.0%
value (equals upper limit frequency)
Overspeed detection Range: 0.00～20.00s
F19.40 0.00s
time (no detection while at 0)
Under the open-loop or the closed-loop vector mode, when it was detected that the
motor rotational speed is higher than the setting value of F19.39, and after the
continue time of F19.40’s setting value, the inverter alarms fault of E-38 and
freely stop. No detection when F19.40 equals 0, but detection is still available
when F19.39 equals 0.

209
7 Detailed function specification

Detection value of too Range: 0.0～50.0%

F19.41 10.0%
large speed deviation (equals upper limit frequency)
Detection time of too Range: 0.00～20.00s
F19.42 0.00s
large speed deviation （no detection while at 0）
Under the open-loop or the closed-loop vector running mode, when it was
detected that the difference of motor rotational speed and setting rotational speed
equals the setting value of F19.41, and after the continue time of F19.42’s setting
value, the inverter alarms fault of E-39 and freely stop. No detection when F19.42
equals 0, but detection is still available when F19.41 equals 0.

Overvoltage suppression
F19.43 Range: 0.0～100.0% 90.0%
coefficient
The bigger value of F19.43, the more obvious the suppression will be, but the load
response will be slow, the parameter is available when F00.24=1 or 2.
When the load fluctuation is strong, the devices like crusher, punch, pipe file
machine and the equipment with clutch will be over-voltage easily, so increasing
the parameter is needed.
F19.44 Reserved

210
 7 Detailed function specification

7.21 Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group: F20

F20.00 Virtual input VDI1 function selection Range: 0～90 0
F20.01 Virtual input VDI2 function selection Range: 0～90 0
F20.02 Virtual input VDI3 function selection Range: 0～90 0
F20.03 Virtual input VDI4 function selection Range: 0～90 0
F20.04 Virtual input VDI5 function selection Range: 0～90 0
VDI1 to VDI5 have the same functions as Xi terminals on the control board and
can be used for digital input. For more details, see description of F08.18 to F08.25.
The realization of the function set by internal virtual terminal must be based on
the available terminal function.
F20.05 Virtual output VDO1 function selection Range: 0～60 0
F20.06 Virtual output VDO2 function selection Range: 0～60 0
F20.07 Virtual output VDO3 function selection Range: 0～60 0
F20.08 Virtual output VDO4 function selection Range: 0～60 0
F20.09 Virtual output VDO5 function selection Range: 0～60 0
VDO functions are similar to the Yi functions on the control board. The VDO can
be used together with VDIx to implement some simple logic control.
If VDO function is set to non-0, the function setting and use of VDOx are the
same as the output of parameter of Yi. Please refer to descriptions in group F09.
Virtual output VDO1 open
F20.10 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO2 open
F20.11 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO3 open
F20.12 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO4 open
F20.13 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO5 open
F20.14 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO1 close
F20.15 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO2 close
F20.16 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO3 close
F20.17 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO4 close
F20.18 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time

211
7 Detailed function specification

Virtual output VDO5 close

F20.19 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.10~ F20.19 definite the time of open up and shut down terminal
VDO1~VDO5 definite is the delay time of internal level from open up to shut
down.
F20.20 Virtual input VDI enable control Range: 00～FF 00
Parameter F20.20 is to control VDI1~VDI5 is enable. F20.20(BIT0-BIT4) is
according to the enable unit VDI1~VDI5,0 stands for disabled , 1 stands for
enable. The relations are below:

tens units
BIT0: VDI1 enable control unit
BIT1: VDI2 enable control unit
BIT2: VDI3 enable control unit
BIT3: VDI4 enable control unit

BIT0:VDI5 enable control unit

F20.21 Virtual input VDI status digital setup Range: 00～FF 00

Virtual input terminal VDI state is determined by the VDI F20.21 definite virtual
input VDI state Digital and virtual output terminal VDO state, the relation
between them is logical OR.
Parameter F20.21 BIT0-BIT4 is according to VDI1-VDI5 state, 0 stands for
disabled state, 1 stands for enabled state.

F20.22 Virtual input: output connection Range: 00～FF 00

Bit0 : The connection of VDI1 and VDO1
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
Bit1 : The connection of VDI2 and VDO2
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
Bit2 : The connection of VDI3 and VDO3
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
Bit3 : The connection of VDI4 and VDO4
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
Bit4 : The connection of VDI5 and VDO5

212
 7 Detailed function specification

0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
Parameter F20.22 definite logical relation if the virtual output terminal, Bit0~Bit4
is according to logical relation setting of VDI1~VDI5 and VDO1~VDO5 , 0
stands for positive logic , 1 stands for negative logic.

Parameter F20.21 definition VDI state , the Digital setting will not
3
Note
influence by F20.22.

213
7 Detailed function specification

7.22 Reserved parameter group 2:F21

F21.00
～ Reserved
F21.21

7.23 Reserved parameter group 3:F22

F22.00
～ Reserved
F22.17

7.24 Reserved parameter group 4:F23

F23.00
～ Reserved
F23.17

7.25 Reserved parameter group 5:F24

F24.00
～ Reserved
F24.13

214
 7 Detailed function specification

7.26 User Definition Display Parameter Group: F25

F25.00 User function code 1 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.01 User function code 2 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.02 User function code 3 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.03 User function code 4 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.04 User function code 5 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.05 User function code 6 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.06 User function code 7 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.07 User function code 8 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.08 User function code 9 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.09 User function code 10 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.10 User function code 11 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.11 User function code 12 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.12 User function code 13 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.13 User function code 14 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.14 User function code 15 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.15 User function code 16 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.16 User function code 17 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.17 User function code 18 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.18 User function code 19 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.19 User function code 20 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.20 User function code21 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.21 User function code 22 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.22 User function code 23 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.23 User function code 24 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.24 User function code 25 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.25 User function code 26 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.26 User function code 27 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00

215
7 Detailed function specification

F25.27 User function code 28 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00

F25.28 User function code 29 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.29 User function code 30 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
This parameter is the User-defined parameter, user can choose the at most 30 from
F0 to F30 that are reflect into F25, in order to check and alter more convenient.
Use F25.00 setting the first function code parameter that users plan to. then use
F25.01 setting the second function code parameter that users plan to, so after the
maximum 30 User-defined parameter that can define is finished, then setting
F00.00=3(user list view, press /\ ENTJRN
DATAy .If users want to drop out user-defined

parameter mode, setting F00.00≠3,then press.

For example: user plan to set three User-defined parameter :F02.01,F03.02 和
F04.00 , following the steps below :
⑴Use F25.00 to set the first function code parameter02.01, press / ENTERN ;
⑵Use F25.01 to set the second function code parameter03.02, press (\ ENTERDATA / ;
\

⑶Use F25.02 to set the third function code parameter04.00, press DATA .
/
ENTERS

⑷Set F00.00=3(user list view, press ).

After the setting is finished , if users do not change F00.00 function code, when
enter function code display state, the operation panel will display
F00.00,F02.01,F03.02 and F04.00 only, if the user do not want to display
User-defined parameter, setting F00.00 to the display expected mode.

0 .
Note
1. xx represent function code.
2.F25.xx represent no reflection.

When the setting function parameter is not available into the

S
Note
range of EN500/EN600 permit, setting the User-defined parameter
will not make effective.

216
 7 Detailed function specification

7.27 Fault Record Function Parameter Group: F26

F26.00 The last fault record Range: 0～50 0
F26.01 The last two fault records Range: 0～50 0
F26.02 The last three fault records Range: 0～50 0
F26.03 The last four fault records Range: 0～50 0
0:No fault.
1～26: E-01～E-26 fault.
27～29: Reserved.
30～40: E-30～E-40 fault.
41～50: Reserved.
F26.00~F26.03 definite the four times previous four code of faults and the two
times previous fault for the voltage, current terminal and etc of inverter , users
base on fault code and refer to fault function& fault handle process, then getting
the results for different types of fault and reasons.
Setup frequency at the Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
F26.04 0.00Hz
last one fault frequency
Output frequency at the Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
F26.05 0.00Hz
last one fault frequency
Output current at the last
F26.06 Range: 0.0～6553.5A 0.0A
one fault
DC bus voltage at the last
F26.07 Range: 0.0～6553.5V 0.0V
one fault
Module temperature at
F26.08 Range: 0～125℃ 0℃
the last one fault
Input terminal status at
F26.09 0
the last one fault
Accumulated run time at
F26.10 Range: 0～65535min 0min
the last one fault
Setup frequency at the Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
F26.11 0.00Hz
last two fault frequency
Output frequency at the Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
F26.12 0.00Hz
last two fault frequency
Output current at the last
F26.13 Range: 0.0～6553.5A 0.0A
two fault
DC busbar voltage at the
F26.14 Range: 0.0～6553.5V 0.0V
last two fault
Module temperature at the
F26.15 Range: 0～125℃ 0℃
last two fault
Input terminal status at
F26.16 0
the last two fault

217
7 Detailed function specification

Accumulated run time at

F26.17 Range: 0～65535min 0min
the last two fault
F26.04~F26.17 record the running state of fault for the first and second time
before, when Input terminal state at the fault, the terminal state is the whole
terminal state after the time delay, including the standard input terminal state and
expanded input terminal state .When Virtual terminal communication is set as the
terminal panel point , the standard Input terminal state is determined by the actual
physical input terminal and Virtual terminal communication .please refer to the
details of the Input terminal state :
Bit0:X1(Standard input terminal 1). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit1:X2(Standard input terminal 2). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit2:X3(Standard input terminal 3). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit3:X4(Standard input terminal 4). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit4:X5(Standard input terminal 5). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit5:X6(Standard input terminal 6). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit6:X7(Standard input terminal 7). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit7:X8(Standard input terminal 8). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit8:EX1(Extended input terminal 1). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit9:EX2(Extended input terminal 2). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit10:EX3(Extended input terminal 3). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit11:EX4(Extended input terminal 4). 1: valid;0: invalid
Bit12:EX5(Extended input terminal 5). 1: valid;0: invalid
BIT13:EX6(Extended input terminal 6). 1: valid;0: invalid

218
 7 Detailed function specification

7.28 Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group:

F27
F27.00 User password Range: 00000～65535 00000
User password setting function is used for preventing unauthorized persons from
checking and modifying the functional parameters.
Set F27.00 to 00000 if the user password function is unnecessary.
If user password function is necessary, input a 5-digitnone-zero figure, and press WJATAy
/ ENTERN

to confirm. The password is effective at once.

To change the password:
Press MENU
ESC
and input the primary password, selectF27.00 (F27.00＝00000 at the
/ BiTlR \
moment), then input new password and press VDATA ) to confirm. The password is
effective at once.
To cancel the password：
Press MENU
ESC
into the state of verification, and enter the original correct 5-digit
password into the state of parameter editing, then select F27.00 (F27.00=00000 at
ENTER
the moment), and directly press DATA to confirm, the password can be canceled

Please memorize the password. Seeking advice from manufacturer

in case it is lost.
Note

F27.01 Manufacturer password Range: 00000～65535 00000

Factory setting function, the user can't modify.

219
8 Troubleshooting

8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Failure and countermeasure
Possible failure types in EN500/EN600 are shown in Table 8-1, the fault types
including fault and alarm two kinds. Such as if inverter fault display E-XX, while
the corresponding alarm is displayed in A-XX. Once the inverter failure , fault types
are stored in the F26 fault recording parameter group, and if alarm, alarm status has
been revealed, until the alarm source release, alarm status are not logged to the F26
parameter group. Some failure code is reserved for intelligent automatic diagnosis
function which will be executed continuously in future. When failure takes place in
the inverter, the user should check according to note of these table first and record
failure phenomena detailedly. Please contact our after-sale service and technical
support Department or agent in your local place when technical service is needed.
Table 8-1 Failure type and the countermeasure
Failure
Failure type Possible reason Countermeasure
code
Accelerating time is too Prolong accelerating time
short
Adjust V/F curve setting，adjust
Improper V/F curve manual torque boost or change to
automatic torque boost
Overcurrent during Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function
E-01 accelerating
process Low power source voltage Check input power supply
Too small power of the
Choose inverter with high-power
inverter
Output phase lose under Check whether the motor wiring is
vector control in good condition
Decelerating time is too Prolong decelerating time
short
Overcurrent during Have potential energy load Increase braking power of external
E-02 decelerating energy consumption braking
or big Inertia load
process subassembly
Power of inverter is a bit
Choose inverter with high-power
small
Load change suddenly or Check or reduce saltation of the
have unwonted phenomena load

Overcurrent during Acc./Dec. time is set to too Prolong accelerating /decelerating

E-03 constant speed short time properly
process low power source voltage Check input power supply
Power of inverter is a bit
Choose inverter with high-power
small
E-04 Overvoltage Unwonted input voltage Check input power supply
during accelerating
process Acc. time is set to too short Prolong accelerating time properly

220
 8 Troubleshooting

Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function

Decelerating time is too
Prolong decelerating time
Overvoltage during short
E-05 decelerating Increase braking power of external
process Have potential energy load
energy consumption braking
or big inertia load
subassembly
Unwonted input voltage Check input power supply

Acc/Dec time is set to too Prolong accelerating decelerating

Overvoltage during short time properly
E-06 constant speed
process Input voltage change
Assemble reactor
abnormally
Use energy consumption
Load inertia is a bit big
subassembly
Inverter control
Check input power supply or look
E-07 power supply Unwonted input voltage
for service
overvoltage
Low-voltage when
E-08 Input voltage is too low Check the input voltage
running
Acc time is set to too short Prolong accelerating time
DC injection braking is too Reduce DC injection braking
big current，prolong braking time

Inverter overload improper V/F curve Adjust V/F curve and torque boost
E-09
protection
Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function
power source voltage is too
check power source voltage
low
Load is too big Choose inverter with high-power
Improper V/F curve Adjust V/F curve and torque boost
Power source voltage is too
check power source voltage
low
General motor run at low Can choose frequency conversion
E-10 Motor overload speed with big load motor for long time low speed run
（A-10） protection
Motor overload protection to set motor overload protection
factor set incorrectly factor correctly
Motor blocked up or load
change too suddenly and Check the load
quickly
The operating current of Confirm whether the parameters
inverter less than underload F19.08, F19.09 setting are
E-11 Motor underload threshold reasonable
（A-11） protection
Checking whether the load divorced
load divorced from motor
from motor
The input phase The three-phase input Check the three-phase input power
E-12
lose power supply is abnormal line is off or poor contact

221
8 Troubleshooting

Power supply board Look for service from manufacturer

anomaly or agent

Look for service from manufacturer

The control board anomaly
or agent
Anomaly wire between
Check the motor wire
motor and inverter
When the motor runs
Check whether the motor
inverter three-phase output
The output three-phase winding is balance
E-13 unbalanced
phase lose
Power supply board Look for service from manufacturer
anomaly or agent
Look for service from manufacturer
The control board anomaly
or agent
Transient overcurrent of the Refer to countermeasure for
inverter overcurrent
phase to phase short circuit or
earthing short circuit of wiring again
output 3 phase
Air-path blocked or fan
To clear air-path or replace the fan
damaged
Ambient temperature is too
Lower ambient temperature
high
Inverting module Connecting wire or insert
E-14 Check and connect the wire again
protection on control board loose
Unwonted current wave
caused by missing output Check wiring
phase etc.
Assistant power supply
Look for service from manufacturer
damaged and drive voltage
or agent
lacking
Look for service from manufacturer
Unwonted control board
or agent
Motor short circuit to
The replacement of cable or motor
ground

Short circuit to
E-15 ground when Hall component is damaged
operation or the hall wiring is poor or Look for service from manufacturer
the current detection circuit or agent
is abnormal

Motor short circuit to

Change the cable or motor
ground
Short circuit to The power supplier of the
E-16 ground when inverter and the motor Change the cable or motor wiring
power on wiring are reversed
Hall component is damaged Look for service from manufacturer
or the hall wiring is poor or agent
E-17 Continuous alarm on A-17 Cleaning or to improve the
Inverter overheat
（A-17） for more than 30 minutes ventilation duct
Cleaning or to improve the
Duct blockage
ventilation duct

222
 8 Troubleshooting

To improve the ventilation

The ambient temperature is
conditions, decreasing the carrier
too high
frequency
Fan damage Change new one
E-18 External device Sudden stop terminal for Open external failure terminal after
（A-18） failure external failure closed external failure is settled
Connecting wire or insert
Check and connect the wire again
on control board loose
Assistant power supply Look for service from manufacturer
Current detecting damaged or agent
E-19
circuit failure Look for service from manufacturer
Hall component damaged
or agent
Unwonted amplifying Look for service from manufacturer
circuit or agent

The interruption protection

of CPU is triggered, but
Press "STOP/RESET" button to
External none of the actual
E-20 reset or add external power supply
interference failure overcurrent, overvoltage
filter from power input side
and short circuit signals
have been detected

Power off and restart, if the failure

Internal
E-21 Internal disturbance serious persists, seek the manufacturer or
interference failure
dealer service
PID given loss threshold
To reset the relevant parameters
setting is not reasonable
E-22 External given
PID given loss Check external given wiring
（A-22） disconnection
Look for service from manufacturer
The control board anomaly
or agent
PID feedback loss threshold
To reset the relevant parameters
setting is not reasonable
E-23 Feedback signal Check external feedback signal
PID feedback loss
（A-23） disconnection wiring
Look for service from manufacturer
The control board anomaly
or agent
PID error abnormal
detection threshold setting To reset the relevant parameters
E-24 PID error
is not reasonable
（A-24） amount abnormal
Look for service from manufacturer
The control board anomaly
or agent
Start terminal Terminal command Check the external input terminal
E-25
protection effective when power on . state
E-26 Communication
（A-26） failure Baud rate set improperly set Baud rate properly

Serial port communication Press “STOP/RESET” key to reset，

error look for service
Failure warning parameter
Modify F05.04, F05.05
set improperly

223
8 Troubleshooting

Check if upper device work and

Upper device doesn’t work
wiring is correct
E-27 Reserved
E-28 Reserved
E-29 Reserved
E2PROM read Mistake take place when Reset by pressing “STOP/RESET”
E-30
and write read or write control Look for service from manufacturer
（A-30）
wrongly parameter or agent
Look for service from manufacturer
Temperature Temperature sensor fault
or agent
E-31 detecting
disconnection The temperature detection Look for service from manufacturer
circuit anomaly or agent
Parameter setting not
set parameter correctly according
according to the motor
to the motor nameplate
nameplate
E-32 Self tuning failure
current anomaly when
Select inverter match the motor
tuning
Motor wiring error Check the motor three-phase wiring
Look for service from manufacturer
E-33 Power board anomaly
Contactor anomaly or agent
（A-33）
Contactor anomaly Replace contactor
E-34 The factory fault 1 Debugging use in factory
E-35 The factory fault 2 Debugging use in factory
Improve the inverter heat
Poor cooling environment
dissipation environment
The bus
E-36 The inverter capacity is too
capacitor Select inverter match motor
（A-36） small
overheating
Bus capacitance cooling fan Replace the bus capacitor cooling
is damaged fan
Encoder Damaged encoder or poor
E-37 Check the wiring or the encoder
disconnection wiring
Short acceleration time Prolong the acceleration time
Low inverter power Select high-power inverter
Overspeed
E-38 Overspeed detect parameter
protection Set the parameter properly
F19.39 and F19.40 is set
according to the situation
improperly
Short Acceleration/
Prolong the acceleration time
deceleration time
Large speed Low inverter power Select high-power inverter
E-39 deviation Over velocity
protection misalignment. Parameter Set the parameter properly
F19.41 and F19.42 is set according to the situation
improperly
Z signal wire of motor
Fault of Z pulse Check the Z signal wire of motor
E-40 coder is unconnected or
loses coder.
loose.
E-41
～ Reserved
E-50

224
 8 Troubleshooting

The main and

auxiliary
F01.00 and F01.03 cannot be set to
given frequency
A-51 Parameter setting error the same channel (9: terminal
channel
encoder given except)
exclusiveness
alarm
Terminal Check the terminal function settings
Terminal function
function
A-52 parameters
exclusiveness
setting repeatedly
alarm
Press key for more than 2s
LOCH1. Keypad lock Keypad lock
to unlock the keypad.

1, Alarm fault of E-16, the inverter must be power off for reset.
2, For the faults of over-current, short-circuit to ground while

s.
Note
running, inverter can reset after 2s’s delay
3, When alarm fault of E-09, the reset time of inverter types over
75kw (including 75kw) is 10s; for 55kw (including 55kw), the time is
4s.

8.2 Failure record lookup

This series inverter can record latest 4 failure code and inverter run parameter of the
last 2 times failure, refer to these information can redound to finding out reason of
the failure.
Failure information is all stored in F26 group parameter，please enter into F26 group
parameter to see about information by referring to keypad operation method.
Code Content Code Content
Input terminal state at previous
F26.00 Previous one failure record F26.09
failure
F26.01 Previous two failure record F26.10 Running time at previous failure
F26.02 Previous three failure record F26.11 Set freq. at previous 2 failure
F26.03 Previous four failure record F26.12 Output freq. at previous 2 failure
Output current at previous 2
F26.04 Set freq. at previous failure F26.13
failure
F26.05 Output freq. at previous failure F26.14 DC bus volt. at previous 2 failure
Module temp. at previous 2
F26.06 Output current at previous failure F26.15
failure
Input terminal state of previous 2
F26.07 DC bus volt. at previous failure F26.16
failure
Running time of previous 2
F26.08 Module temp. at previous failure F26.17
failure

225
8 Troubleshooting

8.3 Failure reset

1. Before reset you must find out reason of failure downright and
eliminate it,
otherwise may cause permanent damage to the inverter.
2. If can’t reset or failure takes place again after resetting, should
look for reason and continuous resetting will damage the inverter.
3. Reset should take place 5 minutes later after overload, overheat
! protection action.
4. For the fault of E-14, the reset is invalid, the motor wiring should
be checked after power off, and restart the inverter.
5. When there is a fault of E-16 after power on, do not directly run
the inverter after reset, and need to check whether the input，out
wiring are reversed.

To resume normal running when failure takes place in the inverter, you can choose
following any kind of operation:
(1) After you set any terminal of X1~X8 to be inputted by external RESET, it
will be reset after connected to COM.
(2) When failure code is displayed，press RESET
STOP
key after confirmed that it
,

can be restoration.
(3) Communication reset. Please refer to annex description.
(4) Cut off power supply.

8.4 Alarm reset

When an alarm occurs, must eliminate alarm source which cause alarm, otherwise
the alarm cannot be eliminated, also cannot be reset by reset button.

226
 9 Maintenance

9 Maintenance
9.1 Routine maintenance
When you use this series you must assemble and operate it according to demand
listed in this “service manual” strictly. During run state, temperature, humidity,
vibration and aging parts will affect it, which may cause failure of the inverter. To
avoid this, it is recommended to perform routine inspections and maintenance.
Table 9-1 Daily inspection and maintenance items
Period
Inspection item
Daily Periodic
Daily cleaning:
(1)Inverter should be maintained in a clean state
√ (2)Clean up the dust on the surface of inverter, prevent the dust into the
inverter internal (especially metal dust).
(3)Clean up the oil stain of cooling fan
√ Check the air duct, and regularly clean.

√ Check whether the screws is loose

√ Check whether the inverter is corrode

√ Whether inverter installation environment changes

√ Whether the inverter cooling fan is working properly

√ Whether the inverter is overheating

√ When running whether voice of motor abnormal change.

√ Whether occur abnormal vibration when motor running

√ Check wiring terminals have arc trace

√ The main circuit insulation test

Recommend to inspect with following instrument:
Input voltage: electric voltmeter；output voltage: rectifying voltmeter；input output
current: pincers ammeter.

9.2 Inspection and replacement of damageable parts

Some component parts in the inverter will be abraded or bear descending
performance for long-term usage，to assure that the inverter can run stably and
reliably, it is recommended to perform defending maintenance and replace
corresponding parts if necessary.

227
 9 Maintenance

(1) Cooling fan

Abnormal noise, even oscillation may take place if the fan have wearing bearing,
aging blade, here replacement of the fan should be considered.

(2) Filter electrolyte capacitance

When frequent-changing load causes increasing pulsant current and aging
electrolyte under high ambient temperature, the electrolyte capacitance may be
damaged and here should replace it.

9.3 Repair guarantee

(1) We provide the free maintenance within warranty time if any failure or
damage under normal usage, the warranty time can be seen in the warranty card,
we will charge some when exceed warranty time.
(2) We will take some upkeep if one of following situations takes place within
period of repair guarantee.
a. If did not use the inverter according to service manual strictly or did not use it
under ambient demanded in service manual, which cause failure.
b. Failure caused by applying the inverter to non-normal function;
c. Failure caused by self-repair, refit which is not already allowed;
d. Damage caused by bad keeping, falling down from high place or other extrinsic
factor after purchasing the inverter;
e. Failure caused by natural disaster or its reason such as unwonted voltage,
thunderbolt, water fog, fire, salt corroding, gas corroding, earthquake and storm
etc.;
f. Make bold to tear up product logo (such as: nameplate etc.); Body serial number
don’t accord with that in repair guarantee card.
(3) We calculate service fee based on actual cost, which is subject to contract if
any.
(4) You can contact the agent and also our company directly if you have questions.
After repair guarantee period, we shall also provide lifetime charged repair service
for our products.

[1= Our company will also provide lifetime repair service with fee for
inverter which is not within period of repair guarantee.
Note

228
 9 Maintenance

9.4 Storage
The user must pay attention to following points for temporary storage and
long-term storage after purchasing the inverter:
(1) Avoid storing the inverter in high temperature, moist place and place of dust,
metal powder and assure good ventilation.
(2) Longtime storage will cause low quality of electrolyte capacitance, so must
assure that it’s electrified for one time within 1 year and electrification time is not
shorter than 1 hour and input voltage must be increased to rated value gradually
by voltage regulator of 250w, meanwhile the inverter should be cut off from the
motor.

229
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

A.1 Summary
We provide general RS485 communication interface in our inverters for the user.
Through this communication interface upper device (such as HMI, PC, PLC
controller and etc.) can perform centralized monitor to the inverter (such as to set
inverter parameter, control run of inverter, read work state of the inverter).
This communication protocol is interface criterion file designed for realizing
above-mentioned function, please read it earnestly and program according to it so
that realize long-distance and network control to the inverter.
A.2 Communication net buildup mode

mainframe is PC or mainframe is PLC

RS232

232-485 conversion
module

RS485

EN600 EN600 EN500 EN500

Fig.A-1 net buildup graph

A.3 Communication mode
At present, EN500/EN600 inverter can be used only as Slave device in RS485 net.
Can realize communication between inverters through PC, PLC or HMI if it’s
needed. Specific communication mode is as mentioned below:
(1) PC or PLC as mainframe，inverter as Slave device, point-to-point
communication between mainframe and Slave device.
(2) Slave device don’t response when mainframe send out command by broadcast
address.
(3) User can set local address, baud rate and data format of the inverter through
Slave device keypad or serial communication mode.
(4) EN500/EN600 provides the RS485 interface.
(5) Default mode: Asynchronous serial，semiduplex transport mode. There are
RTU and ASII two mode . Default format and transport rate: 8-N-1, 9600bps.

230
 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

A.4 Transmission mode

Asynchronous serial, semiduplex transport mode. Default format and transport
rate: 8-N-1, 9600bps. The detail setting parameter, please refer to the F05 group
function mode.
(Remark: the parameter is valid under the Modbus communication, the other
parameter comply with the original service manual)
F05.00 Protocol 0:Modbus protocol 1 0 ×
selection 1:Reserved
2:Profibus protocol(expansion is valid)
3:CanLink protocol(expansion is valid)
4:CANopen protocol(expansion is valid)
5:free protocol 1(revision all the parameter of
EN500/EN600 is valid)
6: free protocol 2(only revising part parameter
of EN500/EN600 is valid)
Remark: expansion card is needed when select
2,3,4 communication
F05.01 Baud rate Units digit: free protocol and Modbus Baud 1 005 ×
setting rate selection
0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
4:4800BPS
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
F05.02 Data format Units digit: free protocol and Modbus protocol 00 ×
Data format
0:1-8-1 format，no checkout，RTU
1:1-8-1 format，Odd Parity，RTU
2:1-8-1 format，Even Parity，RTU
3:1-7-1 format，no checkout，ASCII
4:1-7-1 format，Odd Parity，ASCII
5:1-7-1 format，Even Parity，ASCII
F05.03 Local address 0～247，00 is broadcast address 1 1 ×

A.5 Data communication structure

A.5.1 Data frame format
Using RTU mode, messages are sent at least 3.5 character time interval pause.
The first transmitted field is device address, the character you can transfer is
hexadecimal 0x00 ~ 0xFF. Network equipment Continuously monitor the bus,
including pauses. When the address field is received, all equipment determine
whether it is sent to their own. when the last character of the packet transfer is
complete, at least a 3.5 character times pause mean the end of the message. A new

231
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

message can begin after this pause.

The entire message frame must be transmitted as a continuous flow. If a new
message start transmitting in less than 3.5 character times after a message and
then receiving device will consider it a continuation of the previous message. This
will cause an error, because in the final CRC field value can not be right.
RTU frame format as the table below:

Frame Header 3.5 characters time pause

Slave address Slave address:0~247
03H:read slave parameter
Communication command code
06H:write slave parameter
Data content DATA The contents of packet:
Data content DATA Parameter address(16bit);
Number of parameter or bytes of parameter
…… value;
…… Parameter value(16bit)
CRC check value low byte
16bit Unsigned check value
CRC check value high byte
Closing Flag 3.5 characters time pause
Regarding generation method of CRC check value, please refer to Section A.9.
ASCII frame format as the table below:
Frame Header ‘:’(0x3A)
Slave address Hi Slave address: Combined by 2 ASCII code
Slave address Lo 8 bit slave address 0~247
Command code: 8 bit command code
Command code Hi
combined by 2 ASCII code
03H:read slave parameter
Command code Lo
06H:write slave parameter
Data content DATA The contents of data packet:
N pieces of 8bit data content combined by 2*N
Data content DATA
pieces of ASCII code
……
……
LRC CHK Hi LRC check value includes 2 pieces of ASCII
LRC CHK Lo code
Closing Flag Hi Closing Flag Hi = CR(0x0D)
Closing Flag Lo Closing Flag Lo = LF(0x0A)
A.5.2 Host read slave parameter
Command code 03H. Host can read one or more parameter( up to ten) by
initiating a communication transaction .
E.g., read 2 contiguous inverter parameter values from the address 0000H of
inverter whose address is 01, the contents of host command :

232
 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Parameters initial address high byte 00H
Parameters initial address low byte 00H
Number of parameter high byte 00H
Number of parameter low byte 02H
CRC check value low byte C4
CRC check value high byte OB
The contents of slave reply:
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Parameter value bytes 04H
Address 0000H content high byte 00H
Address 0000H content low byte 00H
Address 0001H content high byte 00H
Address 0001H content low byte 03H
CRC check value low byte BA
CRC check value high byte F2
A.5.3 Host write slave parameter
Command code 06H. Host can write an parameter by initiating a
communication transaction .
E.g.,The decimal system 5000 (1388H) written to the inverter 0101H address
whose slave address is 02，host command including:
ADR 02H
CMD 06H
Parameter address high byte 01H
Parameter address low byte 01H
Parameter value high byte 13H
Parameter value low byte 88H
CRC check value low byte D4
CRC check value high byte 93
The contents of slave reply:
ADR 02H
CMD 06H
Parameter address high byte 01H
Parameter address low byte 01H
Address 0101H content high byte 13H
Address 0101H content low byte 88H
CRC check value low byte D4
CRC check value high byte 93

233
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

A. 6 Data communication address allocation

A.6.1 Function code F00-F26 group communication address
Inverter function parameter’s MODBUS communication address addressing
process follows PPnn way: PP means high byte of the address, corresponding to
function parameter’s group number; nn means low byte of the address,
corresponding to function code parameter’s group internal code. For example:
F3.21 function code’s communication address is 0315H, 03H is the hex form of
group number 3, 15H is the hex form of group internal code 21.
F00.00~F26.17 communication address is 0000H~1A11H, F26 group fault record
parameter start address is 1A00H.
A.6.2 control command and status word communication address
Variable Communicat Reading-writin
Command data or response value meaning
Name ion address g attribute
1: reserved
2: Jog stop command
3: forward JOG run
4: reversal JOG run
Run 5: run
Reading and
command 1 E 00H
writing 6: stop
word
7: forward run
8: reversal run
9: fault reset
10: reserved
Serial F01.02 while hundreds place=0: 5000
port Reading and represents 50.00Hz
1E 01H
value writing F01.02 while hundreds place=1: 10000
setting represents F01.11
BIT0: bus voltage set
BIT1: the ordinary run command effectively
BIT2: JOG command effectively
BIT3: Running
BIT4: the current running direction is reverse
BIT5: the operating instructions is reverse
direction
BIT6: deceleration braking
Inverter
1E 02H Reading only BIT7: acceleration
status
BIT8: deceleration
BIT9: alarm
BIT10: fault
BIT11: current limit
BIT12: fault self recovery
BIT13: self tuning
BIT14: Free stop State
BIT15: speed tracking start

234
 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

Alarm 0: no alarm
1E 03H Reading only
code 1 ~ 50: the current alarm code

o.
Modbus communication address: 1E01 is the given address of k
Frequency-Communication mode; 1D01 is the given address of
Torque-Communication mode; 1D00 is the given address of
Note
PID-Communication mode.

A.6.3 Monitor parameter communication address

Communication read-write
Variable name Command data or response value
address attribute
C-00 1C00H Reading Monitoring parameters 1
C-01 1C01H Reading Monitoring parameters 2
C-02 1C02H Reading Monitoring parameters 3
C-03 1C03H Reading Monitoring parameters 4
C-04 1C04H Reading Monitoring parameters 5
C-05 1C05H Reading Monitoring parameters 6
A.6.4 Inside hidden parameters
Communicatio read-write means of command data or response
Variable name
n address attribute value
PID Communication Range: 0～1000(1000 represents
1D00H read-write
presetting value 10.00V)
Torque
Range:0～2000(2000 represents
communication 1D01H read-write
200.0% rated motor torque)
presetting value
Communication AO1 Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D02H read-write
given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
Communication AO2 Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D03H read-write
given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
Communication Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D04H read-write
EAO1 given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
Communication Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D05H read-write
EAO2 given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
Communication Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D06H read-write
DO given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
Communication Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D07H read-write
EDO given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
BIT0:Y1
BIT1:Y2
BIT2:Y3
The communication
BIT3: Y4
output terminal given 1D08H read-write
value BIT4: RLY1
BIT5: EY1
BIT6: EY2
BIT7: EY3

235
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

BIT8: EY4
BIT9: ERLY1
BIT10: ERLY2
Communication 1D09H BIT0:CX1
virtual input terminal read-write …
given value BIT7: CX8
Positive toque 1D0AH Range: 0～60000(60000 represents
read-write
limited frequency 600.00Hz)
Negative torque 1D0BH Range: 0～60000(60000 represents
read-write
limited frequency 600.00Hz)
Reserved 1D0CH /
Reserved 1D0DH /
A.7 Communication error processing
Inverter receiving data packet detection error, it finds reading&writing parameter
address or parameter value invalid, so reply to the host with communication error
response packet. Communication error response packet (host command code
+80H) as command code, with 1 byte error code.
Format for communication error response packet as follows:
ADR 01H
CMD 83H/86H
01H~06H (for details, please check below
Communication error code
table)
Low byte of CRC checksum Obtain by calculating
High byte of CRC checksum Obtain by calculating

Meaning for each communication error code value as follows:

Communication error
Communication error type Priority
code value
0x01 CRC checksum error 1
0x02 Command code illegal 2
0x03 Register address visited illegal 3
0x04 Value to register illegal 4
0x05 Not allow to modify parameters 5
0x06 Register number read illegal 6
A.8 Data frames examples
A.8.1 RTU Mode

236
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

237
CRC CRC CRC CRC
E1

E1

E2
E0

E0

74

74

84
high bit High bit high bit high bit
CRC CRC CRC CRC
4F

4F

D3

D3
0F

0F

23

79
low bit Low bit low bit low bit
Data Low Data Low Data low Data low
05

05

06

06

88

88

01

01
byte byte byte byte
Data Data Data Data
00

00

00

00

13

13

00

00
High byte High byte High byte High byte
Register Register Register Register

(Respond value
address
00

00

byte quantity)
address address

00

00

01

01
address

02
Low byte Low byte Low byte Low byte

3. Set #1 inverter given value to 50.00Hz

02
Register Register Register Register
1E

1E

address

1E

1E

1E

1E
address address

1E
address
High byte

4. Read #1 inverter running state

High byte High byte High byte
1. Start #1 inverter running

Order code Order

06

06
Order

2. Stop #1 inverter running

Order code

06

06

06

06

03
03
code code
Slave Slave Slave Slave
01

01
Inverter Inverter

01

01

01

01
Inverter

01

01
Address
Address Address Address

command

command

command

command
respond

respond

respond

respond
frames

frames

frames

frames

frames

frames

frames

frames
Slave

Slave

Slave

Slave
Data

host

host

host

host
Data Field Data Field Data Field
Field
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

A.8.2 ACSII Mode

Host read Slave，command code: 03
The host frame
The host frame format
Slave address

Slave address
Frame begin

Command

Command

Checkout

checkout
Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register

Register
number

number

number

number
address

address

address

address
symbol

symbol
Ending
code

code

Send
1 2 2 4 4 2 2
byte
Remark:
¾ Begin symbol:
The lower computer judge the frame header of ASCII based on this.
It is:’:’
¾ Slave address:
Single inverter ID code，range:0~247.
Thereinto, 0 is broadcast address. Broadcast address can control all
the lined Slave simultaneously，and the Slave will not send back
any Data to the host. That means the Slave only accept and do not
send.
Modbus protocol without host address.
¾ Command code:
Reading the command of parameter or data from inverter ，the
value is:’0’’3’.
¾ Register address:
The internal memory address of inverter function parameter is of 4
byte, which is ASCII mode transformed from Hexadecimal.
Corresponding relation between specific parameters and
memory address can be seen in the later table.
¾ Register number:
The number of parameters read by a frame, it is 4 byte. It is ASCII
mode transformed from Hexadecimal.
¾ Checksum:
From “slave address” to the character before checksum, the LRC
checksum of the character string. Function terminal can be seen on
the end of the text.
238
 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

¾ Ending code: enter，line break. is:0x0D,0x0A

Response frame
Frame begin Response frame format

Ending code
Data string
Command

Command

checksum

checksum
Data byte

Data byte
address

address
symbol

Slave

Slave

value
code

code
Send
1 2 2 2 N*2 2 2
byte
remark:
¾ Begin code:
The lower computer judge the frame of ASCII frame. This is :’:’
¾ Slave address:
Single inverter ID code，range:0～247.
Thereinto, address 0 is broadcast address. Broadcast address can
control all the lined Slave simultaneously，and the Slave will not
send back any Data to the host. That means the Slave only accept
and do not send.
Modbus protocol is without host address.
¾ Command code:
The command of reading parameter or data from inverter, the value
is:’0’’3’.
¾ Data byte:
The number of parameters read by a frame. It is 4 byte, which is
ASCII mode transformed from hexadecimal.
¾ Data string value:
The detail return Data，the length of Data string is the register
address “Data byte”, which is ASCII mode transformed from
hexadecimal. Range: 4~40 byte
¾ Checksum:
From “slave address” to the character before checksum, the LRC
checksum of the character string.
The function terminal can be seen in the later text.
¾ Ending symbol: enter, line break. Is 0x0D,0x0A
The followings are the example of command frame and return frame,
all the Data are ASCII character.

239
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

¾ Inquiry frame:
: 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 F A \n\r
(The detail introduction of every byte)
“:”: beginning symbol
0 1: Slave address
0 3:read the command
0 0 0 1:storage address of reading parameter
0 0 0 1:the number of reading the parameter
F A:{ 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1} for LRC checksum.
0xFA = 0x100 - (0x01 + 0x03 + 0x00 + 0x01 + 0x00 + 0x01)
¾ Response frame:
: 0 1 0 3 0 2 0 0 3 3 C 7 \n\r
(The detail introduction of every byte)
“:”: beginning symbol
0 1: Slave address
0 3:read the command
0 2:The byte length of return parameter Data.
0 0 3 3:return parameter，current storage value
C 7:{ 0 1 0 3 0 2 0 0 3 3} for LRC checksum.
0xC7 = 0x100 – (0x01 + 0x03 + 0x02 + 0x00 + 0x33)
The main frame writes slave address single register, command code: 06
The host frame
The host frame format
Slave address

Slave address

Slave address
Frame begin

Command

Checkout

checkout
Register

Register

Register

Register
address

address

address

address
symbol

symbol
Ending
code

Data

Data

Data

Data

Send
1 2 2 4 4 2 2
byte
Remark:
¾ Slave address:
Single inverter ID code，range:0～247.
Thereinto, address 00 is broadcast address.
¾ Command code:
Read parameter from inverter or command of Data, the value is:06
¾ Register address:
The storage address of inverter function parameter, is double byte.
240
 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

The high byte is in the front and the low byte is in the back.
The detail relation between parameter and storage address can be
seen in the later excel.
¾ Data:
The new value of revised parameter.
¾ Checksum:
From “slave address” to the character before checksum, the LRC
checksum of the character string.
Response frame
Response frame format
Slave address

Slave address
Frame begin

Command

Command

Checkout
Register

Register

Register

Register

Checkout
address

address

address

address
symbol

symbol
Ending
code

code

Data

Data

Data

Data
Send
1 2 21 4 4 2 2
byte
Remark:
¾ Slave address:
Single inverter ID code，range:0～247.
Thereinto, address 00 is broadcast address.
¾ Command code:
Read parameter from inverter or command of Data, the value is:06
¾ Register address:
The storage address of inverter function parameter, is double byte.
The high byte is in the front and the low byte is in the back.
The detail relation between parameter and storage address can be
seen in the later excel.
¾ Data:
The new value of revised parameter.
¾ Checksum:
From “slave address” to the character before checksum, the LRC
checksum of the character string.
The followings are the example of command frame and return frame, all the
Data are ASCII character.
¾ Inquiry frame:
: 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8 5 C \n\r

241
 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

(The detail introduction of every byte)

“:”: beginning symbol
0 1: Slave address
0 6:write command
0 1 0 1:storage address of writing parameter
1 3 8 8:the value of writing parameter
5 C:{ 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8} for LRC checksum.
0x5C = 0x100 - (0x01 + 0x06 + 0x01 + 0x01 + 0x13 + 0x88)
¾ Response frame:
: 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8 5 C \n\r
(Detail introduction of every byte)
“:”: beginning symbol
0 1: Slave address
0 6:write command
0 1 0 1:storage address of writing parameter
1 3 8 8:the value of writing parameter
5 C:{ 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8} for LRC checksum.
0x5C = 0x100 - (0x01 + 0x06 + 0x01 + 0x01 + 0x13 + 0x88)

1. ASCII frame realizes transform by that 8Bit hexadecimal is

divided as different 2 character of 4, and then grouped ashexadecimal
of one 8Bit when reaching the destination.
2. Frame header, add“:”, frame footer adds“\n\r” the enter line
break character.
3. The valid character in the protocol is: :, 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,
>
D,E,F and hexadecimal 0DH, lower case ASCII letter a, b, c, d, e, f is
Note invalid
4. The subject data volume is the 2 times as RTU, checksum adopt
LRC check.
5.For the other information, please refer to the official standard
protocol when need.

242
 Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

A.9 CRC checkout mode

CRC checkout value calculating function written by C language is as follows:
unsigned int cal_crc_value (unsigned char *pval, unsigned char len)
{
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
unsigned int i;

while(len--)
{
crc_value ^= *pval++;
for(i=0; i<8; i++)
{
if(crc_value & 0x0001)
{
crc_value >>= 1;
crc_value ^= 0xA001;
}
else
{
crc_value >>= 1;
}
}
}
return(crc_value);
}

243
Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

B. 1 Summarization
We provide the customer with general RS485/RS232 communication interface in
our EN500/EN600 series frequency inverter. For the users, through the
communication interface upper device (such as PC, PLC controller etc.) can
perform centralized monitor to the inverter (such as setting inverter parameter,
controlling run of inverter, reading work state of the inverter) and also
long-distance control keypad can be connected to realize diverse operating
requirement of the user.
This communication protocol is interface criterion file designed for realizing
above-mentioned function, please read it earnestly and program according to it so
that realize long-distance and network control to the inverter.
B. 2 Protocol content andor description
B.2.1 Communication net buildup mode

Mainframe is PC or Mainframe is PC or EN500/EN600 mainframe

RS232

232-485
conversion module

RS485

EN600 EN600 EN500 EN500

Fig.B-1 net buildup graph

B.2.2 Communication mode
At present, EN500/EN600 inverter can be used as not only auxiliary device but
also mainframe device in RS485, if the inverter is used as auxiliary device,
master device can be completed by PC, PLC or human interface, and if used as
mainframe device, the main- auxiliary control of the inverter can be complement
by it, Specific communication mode is as mentioned below:
(1) PC or PLC as mainframe, inverter as auxiliary device, point-to-point
communication between mainframe and auxiliary device.
(2) Auxiliary device don’t response when mainframe send out command by
broadcast address.
(3) User can set local address, baud rate and data format of the inverter through
auxiliary device keypad.

244
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

(4) Auxiliary device report current failure information to mainframe in the last
response frame.
(5) EN500/EN600 provides RS485 interface.
B.2.3 Transport mode
Asynchronous serial, semiduplex transport mode. Default format and transport
rate: 8-N-1, 9600bps.For specific parameter setting please see description for F05
group function code.
(Remark: The definition for this parameter is only effective under free –port
communication mode, and definition for other parameters are the same as
original)
F05.00 Protocol 0:Modbus protocol 1 0 ×
selection 1:reserved
2:Profibus protocol(extension effective)
3:CanLink protocol(extension effective)
4:CANopen protocol(extension effective)
5:freedom protocol 1(can modify all function
parameters of EN500/EN600)
6:freedom protocol 2 (can only modify part of
function parameter of EN500/EN600)
Remark: expansion card is needed if select protocol
2, 3, 4
F05.01 Baud rate Units digit: freedom protocol and Modbus baud rate 1 005 ×
configuration selection
0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
4:4800BPS
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
F05.02 Data format Units digit: freedom protocol and Modbus protocol 00 ×
data format
0:1-8-1 format, no checkout, RTU
1:1-8-1 format, even checkout, RTU
2:1-8-1 format, odd checkout, RTU
3:1-7-1 format, no checkout, ASCII
4:1-7-1 format, even checkout, ASCII
5:1-7-1 format, odd checkout, ASCII

F05.03 Local address 0～247, 00 is master station address 1 1 ×

245
 frame end end
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

frame end end

18
1

1
checkout sum checkout sum
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
checkout sum checkout checkout sum Checkout
4

4
checkout sum area area
checkout sum
checkout sum checkout sum

Fig.B-2 command/response frame format

set data run data

Auxiliary device response frame format

Main device command frame format

set data Setting run data Run data

4

4
set data data area area
run data
set data run data
command index
9

command index

9
command index
8

Index command index

8
Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

4
area Index area

4
B.2.4 Data command frame format

assistant index
7

failure index

7
assistant index
6

failure index

6
main device command
5

command auxiliary device response

5
response

2
2
main device command area area
4

auxiliary device response

4
auxiliary device address
3

auxiliary device address

3
address

2
address

2
auxiliary device address
2
auxiliary device address

2
frame head head
1

1
frame head head

1
Sending

Sending

Sending

Sending
order

byte

order
Definition

byte
Definition

246
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Remark:
(1) “Setting data area” and “run data area” may not be existent in some
command/data frame format, so in protocol command list it’s marked with
“nothing”.
(2) In protocol effective character set is: ~, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
A, B, C, D, E, F and hex data 0DH, ASCII lowercase a, b, c, d,
e, f are invalid.
(3) Effective command frame length is 14 or 18 byte.
B.2.5 Explanation and description for format
(1) Frame head
It’s character“~” (namely hex 7E), single byte.
(2) Auxiliary device address
Data meanings: local address of auxiliary device, double byte. ASCII format.
Inverter factory default is 01.
(3) Mainframe command/auxiliary device respond
Data meanings: mainframe send out command and auxiliary device respond to the
command. Double byte, ASCII format.
Response code function classification:
Species 1>: command code=“10”, mainframe ask auxiliary device to report
current preparation state and control situation.
Table B-1 Command code meanings for response frame response area
Response Meanings
code Preparation state of Control from mainframe To set frequency is
ASCII auxiliary device is allowed allowed
10 Haven’t get ready No meaning
11 Get ready Allow Allow
12 Get ready Allow Allow
13 Get ready Don’t allow Don’t allow
14 Get ready Don’t allow Don’t allow
20 Frame error

Species 2>: command code=“11”~“15”, 5 kinds of function command which

mainframe send to auxiliary device, for detail please see protocol command list.

247
Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Table B-2 Response code meanings for response frame command index area
Response
code Meanings of response code Description
ASCII
Auxiliary device communication and
control is normal ； function code
00
modification is effective；password is
correct.
(1) frame checkout error；
(2)“command area” data overrun； When this response code is reported,
(3)“index area” data overrun； data of “command area”, “index area”
20
(4)frame length error/non ASCII byte and “running data area” are not
exist in area except frame head, frame reported.
end.
(1) control to auxiliary device is
Whether report this response code relate
ineffective；
to current set state of auxiliary device.
(2) ineffective function code parameter
When report data of area”, “index
30 modification；
area” and “run data area” are reported
(3)“setting/running data” area data
according to protocol
overrun.
requirement.
(4) password error.
(4) Auxiliary index/command index/failure index
Data meanings: include auxiliary index byte and command index byte.
For mainframe, auxiliary index, command index are used for cooperating
mainframe command in realizing specific function.
For auxiliary device, auxiliary index, command index are used for reporting
failure state code, command index are reported without modification
Data type: hex, 4 byte, ASCII format.
Command index occupy 2 low byte, data range: “00”~“FF”.
Auxiliary index occupy 2 high byte, data range: “00”~“FF”.
Auxiliary device failure state occupy “auxiliary index’’ byte, see table B-3.
Table B-3 Free-port1 failure type description
Failure Failure
Description Description
code(decimal) code(decimal)
Overcurrent during Current detecting circuit
1 19
accelerating process failure
Overcurrent during External interference
2 20
decelerating process failure
Overcurrent during Internal interference
3 21
constant speed process failure
Overvoltage during
4 22 PID provision loss
accelerating process
Overvoltage during
5 23 PID feedback loss
decelerating process
Overvoltage during PID error amount
6 24
constant speed process exception

248
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

7 Overvoltage while halting 25 Startup terminal protection

Under voltage during RS485 communication
8 26
running process failure
Inverter overload
9 27 Reserved
protection
10 Motor overload protection 28 Reserved
Motor underload
11 29 Reserved
protection
E2PROM read and write
12 Input phase missing 30
wrongly
Temperature detection
13 Output phase missing 31
breakage
Inverting module
14 32 Self-tuning failure
protection
Short circuit to earth
15 33 Contactor exception
during running process
Short circuit to earth
16 34 Interior failure 1
during electrifying process
17 Inverter over heating

18 External device failure

Free-port 2 failure type description

Failure Failure
Description Description
code(decimal) code(decimal)
Overcurrent during Inverting module
1 13
accelerating process protection
Overcurrent during
2 14 External device failure
decelerating process
Overcurrent during Current detecting circuit
3 15
constant speed process failure
Overvoltage during RS485 communication
4 16
accelerating process failure
Overvoltage during
5 17 Reserved
decelerating process
Overvoltage during
6 18 Reserved
constant speed process
Control power supply
7 19 Under voltage
overvoltage
8 Inverter overload 20 System interference

9 Motor overload 21 Reserved

10 Inverter over heating 22 Reserved

249
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

E2PROM read and write

11 Reserved 23
wrongly
12 Reserved

(5) Checkout sum

Data meanings: frame checkout, 4 byte, ASCII.
Calculation method: accumulative sum of ASCII code value of all byte from
“auxiliary device address ”to“ run data”.
(6) Frame end
Hex 0D, single byte.

B.2.6 Protocol command list

Frame 7E and frame end 0D, address, checkout sum, ASCII character format
are omitted in following description.
Table B-4 Free-port 1 protocol command table

example, such as PC control

(C language cluster format ,
auxiliary device is set to 01)
Run data setting range
Auxiliary index

operation of inverter

Mainframe sending

Run data precision

Mainframe order

Order index

Description
Decimal
Name

Hex
Hex
Hex

Look up auxiliary motor state 10 00 00 no ~010A00000192\r 1

Main setting frequency 11 00 00 no ~010B00000193\r 0.01Hz
Auxiliary setting
11 00 01 no ~010B00010194\r 0.01Hz
frequency
Setting frequency 11 00 02 no ~010B00020195\r 0.01Hz
Output frequency 11 00 03 no ~010B00030196\r 0.01Hz
Read parameter of auxiliary motor

Output current 11 00 04 no ~010B00040197\r 0.1A

Output voltage 11 00 05 no ~010B00050198\r 1V
DC bus-bar voltage 11 00 06 no ~010B00060199\r 0.1V
Load motor revolving
11 00 07 no ~010B0007019A\r 1RPM
speed
Load motor linear speed 11 00 08 no ~010B0008019B\r no
Inverter temperature 11 00 09 no ~010B0009019C\r 1℃
Runtime 11 00 0A no ~010B000A01A4\r 0.1min
Current accumulative
11 00 0B no ~010B000B01A5\r 1h
runtime
Current accumulative
11 00 0C no ~010B000C01A6\r 1h
power-on time
Inverter state 11 00 0D no ~010B000D01A7\r no
Input terminal state 11 00 0E no ~010B000E01A8\r no

250
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Output terminal state 11 00 0F no ~010B000F01A9\r no

Expand output terminal state 11 00 10 no ~010B00100194\r no
Expanding input terminal state 11 00 11 no ~010B00110195\r no
Communicational virtual input
11 00 12 no ~010B00120196\r no
terminal state
Internal virtual input node state 11 00 13 no ~010B00130197\r no
Analog input AI1 11 00 14 no ~010B00140198\r no
Analog input AI2 11 00 15 no ~010B00150199\r no
Expanding analog input
11 00 16 no ~010B0016019A\r no
EAI1
Expanding analog input
11 00 17 no ~010B0017019B\r no
EAI2
Analog AO1
11 00 18 no ~010B0018019C\r no
output
Analog AO2 output 11 00 19 no ~010B0019019D\r no
Expanding analog EAO1
11 00 1A no ~010B001A01A5\r no
output
Expanding analog EAO2
11 00 1B no ~010B001B01A6\r no
output
External pulse input
11 00 1C no ~010B001C01A7\r 1Hz
frequency
Reserved
Process PID provision 11 00 1E no ~010B001E01A9\r 0.01V
Process PID feedback 11 00 1F no ~010B001F02AA\r 0.01V
Process PID error 11 00 20 no ~010B00200195\r 0.01V
Process PID output 11 00 21 no ~010B00210196\r 0.01Hz
Simple PLC current
11 00 22 no ~010B00220197\r no
segments
External multi-section
11 00 23 no ~010B00230198\r no
speed current segments
Provision pressure for 0.001Mp
11 00 24 no ~010B00240199\r
constant pressure water a
Feedback pressure for 0.001Mp
11 00 25 no ~010B0025019A\r
constant pressure water a
Relay state for constant
11 00 26 no ~010B0026019B\r no
pressure water
Current length 11 00 27 no ~010B0027019C\r no
Accumulative length 11 00 28 no ~010B0028019D\r no
Current internal count 11 00 29 no ~010B0029019E\r no
Current internal time 11 00 2A no ~010B002A01A6\r no
Setting channel for run
11 00 2B no ~010B002B01A7\r no
command
Main frequency provision
11 00 2C no ~010B002C01A8\r no
channel
Auxiliary frequency
11 00 2D no ~010B002D01A9\r no
provision channel
Inverter rated current 11 00 2E no ~010B002E01AA\r 0.1A
Inverter rated voltage 11 00 2F no ~010B002F01AB\r 1V
Inverter rated power 11 00 30 no ~010B00300196\r 0.1KW

251
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Reserved
Reserved
Frequency after
acceleration and 11 00 33 no ~010B00330199\r 0.01Hz
deceleration
Motor rotor frequency 11 00 34 no ~010B0034019A\r 0.01Hz
Current provision torque 11 00 35 no ~010B0035019B\r 0.1%
Current output torque 11 00 36 no ~010B0036019C\r 0.1%
Current torque current 11 00 37 no ~010B0037019D\r 0.1A
Current flux current 11 00 38 no ~010B0038019E\r 0.1A
Auxiliary device run
12 00 00 no ~010C00000194\r no
command
Set current run frequency Set freq.
0Hz~high ~010C00010FA002
provision of auxiliary 12 00 01 0.01Hz =40.00Hz
limit freq 7C\r
device
Auxiliary
Auxiliary device run with 0Hz~high ~010C00020FA002 device run
12 00 02 0.01Hz
run frequency provision limit freq 7D\r Set freq.
=40.00Hz
Auxiliary device forward
12 00 03 no ~010C00030197\r no
run
Run control and adjusting function

Auxiliary device reverse

12 00 04 no ~010C00040198\r no
run
Forward run
Auxiliary device forward
0Hz~ high ~010C00050FA002 boot-strap
run with run frequency 12 00 05 0.01Hz
limit freq 80\r Set freq.
provision
=40.00Hz
Reverse run
Auxiliary device reverse
0Hz~ high ~010C00060FA002 boot-strap
run with run frequency 12 00 06 0.01Hz
limit freq 81\r Set freq.
provision
=40.00Hz
Auxiliary device stop 12 00 07 no ~010C0007019B\r no

Auxiliary device jog run 12 00 08 no ~010C0008019C\r no

Auxiliary device forward
12 00 09 no ~010C0009019D\r no
jog run
Auxiliary device reverse
12 00 0A no ~010C000A01A5\r no
jog run
Auxiliary device stop run 12 00 0B no ~010C000B01A6\r no
Auxiliary device failure
12 00 0C no ~010C000C01A7\r no
restoration
version query
Software

Query auxiliary device

order

15 00 00 no ~010F00000197\r 1
software version

252
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Free-Port 2 protocol command table

inverter (C language cluster

Run data setting range hex

format , auxiliary device is

Mainframe order decimal

example, such as PC
control operation of
Auxiliary index hex

Mainframe sending

Run data precision

Order index Hex

Description
set to 01)
Name

look up auxiliary motor state 10 00 00 no ~010A00000192\r 1

Auxiliary device run
command 12 00 00 no ~010C00000194\r no

Set current run freq. of 0Hz~

auxiliary device 12 00 01 high limit ~010C00010FA0027C\r 0.01Hz
freq
Auxiliary device run 0Hz~
with run frequency 12 00 02 high limit ~010C00020FA0027D\r 0.01Hz
provision freq
Auxiliary device
12 00 03 no ~010C00030197\r no
forward run
Auxiliary device reverse
12 00 04 no ~010C00040198\r no
run
Run
Auxiliary device 0Hz~
control
forward run with run 12 00 05 high limit ~010C00050FA00280\r 0.01Hz
and
frequency provision freq
adjusting
Auxiliary device reverse 0Hz~
function
run with run frequency 12 00 06 high limit ~010C00060FA00281\r 0.01Hz
provision freq
Auxiliary device stop 12 00 07 no ~010C0007019B\r no
Auxiliary device jog run 12 00 08 no ~010C0008019C\r no
Auxiliary device
12 00 09 no ~010C0009019D\r no
forward jog run
Auxiliary device reverse
12 00 0A no ~010C000A01A5\r no
jog run
Auxiliary device stop
12 00 0B no ~010C000B01A6\r no
run
Auxiliary device failure
12 00 0C no ~010C000C01A7\r no
restoration
version query
Software

Query auxiliary device

order

15 00 00 no ~010F00000197\r 1
software version

253
Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Table B-5 read auxiliary device function code parameter

Read auxiliary device function code parameter: all function code parameter except user
Function
password and manufacturer password
definition
except user password and manufacturer password

Frame Order Checkout Frame

Meanings Address Order Run data
head index sum end
Mainframe See
7EH ADDR 13 4 BCC 0DH
order remark
Byte quantity 1 2 2 4 0 4 1
Auxiliary Function
See
device 7EH ADDR 06 code BCC 0DH
remark
respond parameter
Byte quantity 1 2 2 4 4 4 1
Command index=combination of function code group number and hex code of function
code number. For instance:
If want to read parameter of F0.05 function code, order index=0005；
If want to read parameter of F2.11 function code, order index =020B；
If want to read parameter of F2.15 function code, order index =020F；
If want to read parameter of F2.13 function code, order index =020D；

Corresponding relation between decimal and hex value of function code group No.

Function code Function code

Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
group No group No
F00 0 00H F0E 14 0EH

F01 1 01H F0F 15 0FH

F02 2 02H F10 16 10H

remark F03 3 03H F11 17 11H

F04 4 04H F12 18 12H

F05 5 05H F13 19 13H

F06 6 06H F14 20 14H

F07 7 07H F15 21 15H

F08 8 08H F16 22 16H

F09 9 09H F17 23 17H

F0A 10 0AH F18 24 18H

F0B 11 0BH F19 25 19H

F0C 12 0CH F1A 26 1AH

F0D 13 0DH F1B 27 1BH

Virtual data 0~FFFF (namely 0~65535)

Please input correct “user password” before you set user function code parameter.

254
 Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

Table B-6 set auxiliary device function code parameter

Function Set auxiliary device function code parameter: all function code parameter except user password
definition and manufacturer password

Frame Order Checkout

Meanings Address Order Run data Frame end
head index sum
Mainframe
7EH ADDR 14 See remark 4 BCC 0DH
order

Byte quantity 1 2 2 4 4 4 1
Auxiliary Function
device 7EH ADDR 06 See remark code BCC 0DH
respond parameter
Byte quantity 1 2 2 4 4 4 1
Command index=combination of function code group number and hex code of function code
number. For instance:
If want to read parameter of F00.05 function code, order index=0005；
If want to read parameter of F02.11 function code, order index =020B；
If want to read parameter of F02.15 function code, order index =020F；
If want to read parameter of F02.13 function code, order index =020D；
Corresponding relation between decimal and hex value of function code group No.
Function code Function code
Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
group No group No
F00 0 00H F0E 14 0EH

F01 1 01H F0F 15 0FH

F02 2 02H F10 16 10H

Remark F03 3 03H F11 17 11H

F04 4 04H F12 18 12H

F05 5 05H F13 19 13H
F06 6 06H F14 20 14H
F07 7 07H F15 21 15H
F08 8 08H F16 22 16H

F09 9 09H F17 23 17H

F0A 10 0AH F18 24 18H

F0B 11 0BH F19 25 19H

F0C 12 0CH F1A 26 1AH

F0D 13 0DH F1B 27 1BH

Virtual data 0～FFFF(namely 0～65535)

255
 Appendix C Keyboard

Appendix C Keyboard
C.1 Keyboard selection:
NO. Type Details Remark
Local LED single-display digital potentiometer
1 EN-LED3-D Standard
keyboard（with the function of parameter copy）
Local LED double-display digital potentiometer
2 EN-LED4-D Optional
keyboard（with the function of parameter copy）
Local LCD Keyboard（with the function of parameter
3 EN-LCD1 Optional
copy）
Remote Control LCD Keyboard（with the function of
4 EN-LCD2 Optional
parameter copy）
5 EN-LED1 Local LED single-display keyboard Optional
At present, Our has 4 kinds of optional keyboards for our customers’ selection,
they are EN-LED4-D,EN-LCD1,EN-LCD2 and EN-LED1. Their outer dimension
and installation size are the same as the standard keyboard EN-LED3-D. For more
detailed dimension, please refer to “Keyboard Operation and Outer Size of
Keyboard installing box” in Chapter 2.
Z' \
1. EN-LED3-D, EN-LED4-D,EN-LCD1,EN-LCD2 are four kinds of i
d
Note
» keyboard that with the function of parameter copy.
2. Using the function of parameter copy could through operating
parameter F00.27

C.2 LED double-display digital potentiometer keyboard

Local LED double-display digital potentiometer keyboard type: EN-LED4-D
C.2.1 Keyboard Layout
LED1显示电压指示单位（V）
Voltage indicator light(LED1)
LED1显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light(LED1) LED1显示频率指示单位（Hz）
Frequency indicator light(LED1)
变频器故障报警指示灯
Failure alarm indicator light 变频器正转指示灯
Forward run indicator light
模式指示灯
Mode indicator light 变频器反转指示灯
Reverse run indicator light
MOO ALM A Hz RID REV

cJzLi UiLliL - 数码显示（LED1）

Digital display(LED1)
"
On— Digital display(LED2)
数码显示（LED2）
" "
/ / / / / /
Voltage indicator light(LED2)
LED2显示电压指示单位（V） 参数百分比（%）
Parameter percent(%)
LED2显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light(LED2)
递增键
Increase key
— =3 A
o
V
o
%
ö— —
r/mln(Hz)
LED2显示每分钟转速指示单位（r/min）
Speed(r/min)/Freq(Hz)indicator light LED2
（LED2显示频率指示单位（Hz））
编程/退出键
Exit/Program key #) ( A) (O -
数字电位器
Digital potentiometer

移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision key {§) (V) (
fl 确认/数据键 key
Confirm/Data
递减键
Decrease key
{§) 0
反转/点动键
Reverse/Jog key

Fig.C-1 EN-LED4-D Operating Keyboard Layout

^ 停止/复位键
Stop/Reset key
正转运行键
Forward run key

256
 Appendix C Keyboard

C.2.2 Description for keyboard functions, LED digital tubes and indicator
lights
LED double -display digital potentiometer keyboard consists of two 5-digit digital
tube screens,8 buttons, a digital potentiometer and 10 indicator lights.
If need more details about function definition of the 8 buttons, LED digital tubes,
digital potentiometer and specification of the indicator lights, then please refer to
“Keyboard Function Specifications” in Chapter 5.

LED2 digital tube supervision is set by parameter F00.25.

Note

C.3 LCD keyboard

C.3.1 LCD keyboard series:
(1) Local LCD keyboard type: EN-LCD1
(2) Remote control LCD keyboard type: EN-LCD2
C.3.2 Keyboard Layout

Failure alarm indicator light

变频器故障报警指示灯 Forward run indicator light
变频器正转指示灯
Mode indicator
模式指示灯 light o
FWD
Reverse run indicator light
变频器反转指示灯
MOO ALM REV

LCD显示屏
LCD screen

Increase key
递增键
Exit/Program
编程/退出键 key §r)
( (A ) ( fè -
Confirm/Data key
确认/数据键

Multiple function
多功能键 key
'
§) ( V) 0 移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision key
Decrease key
递减键
Reverse/Jog
反转/点动键 key (§ )
0 Stop/Reset key
停止/复位键
正转运行键
Forward run key

Fig.C-2 Keyboard Layout Sketch (EN-LCD1, EN-LCD2)

C.3.3 Keyboard Function, LCD Display and Spec. of Indicator Lights
LCD keyboard consists of a LCD screen, 9 buttons and 4 indicator lights
LCD screen: To display Function Setting, Running Supervision, Failure
Supervision Code and Parameter.
Multi-function key: The specific function keys decided by tens digit of F00.15 see
F00.15 parameter descriptions.
For more details about function definition of the 8 buttons and specification of the
indicator lights, please refer to “Keyboard Function Specifications” in Chapter 5.
257
Appendix C Keyboard

C.3.4 Operating Spec. of LCD Display Keyboard

⑴ Initialization status of LCD keyboard when power on
When the keyboard is power on, “Key Board” is displayed in the form of
animation:

Keyboard

Fig.C-3 Initialization Display when Power On

⑵ Operation of switching to firstly menu (Fig. C-4):

F00:System Parameter Group F00:System Parameter Group

F01:Basic Running Group F01:Basic Running Group

F02:Start Stop Brake Group F02: Start Stop Brake Group

F03: V/F Control Group F03: V/F Control Group

Press © Press ©

F00:System Parameter Group F26:Fault Record Group

F01:Basic Running Group

F02: Start Stop Brake Group

F03: V/F Control Group

Press <2! Press ©

F00:System Parameter Group F00:System Parameter Group

F01:Basic Running Group Press (2 F01:Basic Running Group

w
F02:Start Stop Brake Group F02: Start Stop Brake Group

F03: V/F Control Group F03: V/F Control Group

Fig.C-4 Power on initialized display

258
 Appendix C Keyboard

When set F00.00=2, Senior Menu parameters F00~F27 can be displayed, 28

groups in total. Operation methods are shown as Fig. C-4.

⑶ Display and operation of secondary menu:

When you are in the Firstly Menu, choose a parameter group, then press
“ENTER/DATA” key and you will enter into the Secondary Menu. Take
Parameter F00.00 for example:

F00:System Parameter Group Parameter Group Display

F01:Basic Running Group F0000=2

F02:Start Stop Brake Group 2：Senior List Mode

F03: V/F Control Group Range 0~3

ENTER/DATA Press increase button

F00:System Parameter Group T Parameter Group Display

00: Parameter Group Display ENTER/DATA F0000=0

01:C00 display when operation 0：Basic List Mode

02: C01 display when operation Range 0~3

Fig.C-5 Example of Secondary Menu Operation

259
Appendix C Keyboard

⑷ Function Parameter Operation

Function parameter operation includes the parameter checking, revise and storage
of parameters. Before the operating the inverter, parameters should be set
correctly. Operation methods are shown as Fig. C-6:

Frequency Setting Motor Control Mode

C00 050.00 Hz F0024=1

Frequency Setting 1:Speedless Vector Control

050.00 Hz Range： 0～2

ESC/MENU Press increase button

F00:System Parameter Group Motor Control Mode

F01:Basic Running Group F0024= 0

F02:Start Stop Brake Group 0:V/F Control

F03: V/F Control Group Range： 0～2

ENTER/DATA ENTER/DATA

F00:System Parameter Group F00:System Parameter Group

00: Parameter Group Display Press 24: Motor Control Mode

01:C00 display when operation 25:Supervision 2 selection

02:C01 display when operation 26:Busbar voltage coefficient

Fig.C-6 Example of function parameter editing

260
 Appendix C Keyboard

⑸ Fault query status

When fault alarm occurs, customers can enter the fault query status:

Fault Alarm！

E13

Output Phase Loss

ESC/MENU

F26:Fault Record Parameter

00:The Last Fault Record

01:The Last Two Fault Record

02: The Last Three Fault Record

ENTER/DATA

T The Last Fault Record

F2600＝13

13：Output Phase Loss

Range 00～50

Fig.C-7 Fault query status

261
Appendix C Keyboard

C.4 LED single-display keyboard

The type of local single-display keyboard：EN-LED1。
C.4.1 Keyboard Layout
显示电压指示单位（V）
Voltage indicator light
显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light 显示频率指示单位（Hz）
Frequency indicator light
变频器故障报警指示灯
Failure alarm indicator light _i 变频器正转指示灯
Forward run indicator light
rv
模式指示灯
Mode indicator light -o ó -o CH Ó o 变频器反转指示灯
Reverse run indicator light
MOD ALM A Hz FWD REV

___
/ / / / / / f l / I _

递增键
Increase key
编程/退出键
Exit/Program key MENU,
ry\/ y ) (mà)
\ DATA / 确认/数据键
Confirm/Data key

多功能键
Multiple function key <8> V » 移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision key
递减键
Decrease key
REV STOP
反转/点动键
Reverse/Jog key JOG RESET, 停止/复位键
Stop/Reset key
正转运行键
Forward run key

Fig.C-8 EN-LED1 Operation keyboard layout

C.4.2 Keyboard function, LED Nixie tube and indicator light description
LED single-display keyboard is composed of a 5-digit nixie tube display、9 keys
and 6 indicator lights.
Multi-function key: The specific function keys decided by tens digit of F00.15 see
F00.15 parameter descriptions.
For more details about function definition of the 8 buttons and specification of the
indicator lights, please refer to “Keyboard Function Specifications” in Chapter 5.

1.Key position of EN-LED1, EL-LCD1, EN-LCD2 is different

from those standard keyboard, please note the key position of

d> these three keyboards.

2.For EN-LED1, EN-LCD1, EN-LCD2 these keyboards, the
Note deblocking way is different from the standard keyboards, the
HSC
deblocking way is to press or press MENU for more than 2
seconds.

262
 Appendix C Keyboard

C.5 Communication Component

The maximum electric distance between keyboard EN-LED3-D, EN-LED4-D,
EN-LCD1, EN-LED1 and local inverter is 2m.
RS485 communication mode is adopted between inverter and remote keyboard
EN-LCD2, only an ordinary cable is needed to connect each other, and their
maximum electric distance can be 1000m. When the communication with each
other is main-auxiliary mode, namely take remote keyboard as main device and
inverter as auxiliary device. The terminals of the connection cable are made by
crystal ends, so it is easy to maintain. Power needs customers’ outer leading，the
voltage range is from 10V to 24V，the demand current is 150mA，1mm2 of PVC
insulate copper wire is suggested to connect.
Following function can be realized by remote keyboard:
(1) Can control run, stop, jog, failure reset, change setting frequency, modify
function parameter and run direction of auxiliary device.
(2) Can identify the type of auxiliary device. Can monitor the running frequency,
setting frequency, output voltage, output current, analog closed loop feedback,
analog closed loop setting and exterior counting value of auxiliary device.

263
Appendix D Communication extension card

Appendix D Communication extension card

D.1 Communication card selection:
At the present, there are four kinds of communication card can be selected for.
Serial
Type Description Remark
No.
PROFIBUS-DP communication card (use
1 EN-PR01 Optional
in 15KW and the below )
PROFIBUS-DP communication card (use
2 EN-PR02 Optional
in 15KW the above)
3 EN-CAN1 CANopen communication card Optional
4 EN-CAN2 CANlink communication card Optional
D.2 PROFIBUS-DP communication card
D.2.1 PROFIBUS introduction
(1)PROFIBUS (short for Process Field Bus ),PROFIBUS is an international and
open field bus standard independent with manufacturer. It can be support for
many equipment manufacturers, with good compatibility. It’s widely used in
Manufacturing Automation, automation of process industry, and other buildings,
transportation, electric power automation field.
(2)PROFIBUS can realize exchanging the data between all kinds of element of
automation, all of this equipment can exchange the information though the same
port. But the transmission rate is different .all the automatic equipment can
exchange the information though the same port, but with the different rates, so
PROFIBUS should offer different types for the speed rates selection. it is made up
with PROFIBUS-DP(Distributed peripheral ),
PROFIBUS-PA,PROFIBUS-FMS.
(3)PROFIBUS (RS485), the first layer realize the balanced data transmission,
wire a bus segment one Bus segment is shielded twisted pair cable, both ends of
the segments have a terminating resistor. Transmission mode to half duplex,
asynchronous, synchronous gap-free data exchange basis, the physical layer
supports fibre, the data frame 11, and the transfer rate: 9.6Kbit / sec-12Mbit / sec.
Bus length range from 100 to 1200 meters
(4)Between same-level controller and PC communications (token passing
procedure), to ensure adequate opportunity to deal with their communication tasks
in a determined time. Complex PLC and PC with a simple division formula I / O
communications, you must quickly and with minimal protocol overhead (master -
slave program)

264
 Appendix D Communication extension card

D.2.2 The external form of PROFIBUS-DP and terminal definition

description
't

<o> lllllllllllllllllllllllll

JP2
JP3 lllillllllillllllillillll
© o
o ©
G ©
O ©
G ©
G ©
© ©
G ©
<30 0D
OD ©
G ©
O ©
© ©
O ©

)
o
o
o
o
o J2
0 o o
0
o o o
\ ii

o
V.
J3
_ X\ J _

Fig D-1 PROFIBUS-DP outline dimensional drawing

Table D-1 Terminal function description
Terminal
Name Description Remark
date
Use it on 15KW
USB form adapter USB connection factory and distribution to
J2 frequency inverter or
plugs DB9 adapter cable
below
Use it on 15KW
DB9 communication signal connection
J3 frequency inverter or
communication port interface,9-pin DB9 female.
the above
Board-level When you install this plug docking with the
JP2
docking connector main control board CN2

265
Appendix D Communication extension card

(1)J3 Plug pin definition :

5 1

o
oo
o
'

Ü
0
0
0

o
9 6

PIN PIN
Definition Definition
data data
1 bit bare 6 VCC
2 bit bare 7 bit bare
3 Communication signal A 8 communication signal B
4 bit bare 9 bit bare
5 GND - -

(2)J2 Plug pin definition ：

2 4
3
3
E
E

1 3

PIN PIN
Definition Definition
data data
1 Communication signal A 3 GND
2 Communication signal B 4 VCC

(3)J2 switch wiring

Direction B
Right右端插头
plug Direction B B向
B向
左端插头
1

Direction A
o o o o/ O

A向 Direction
A向 A
Left plug
o o o o o/

1 6
VJ
@1

3 4
o

on

1 2
o

9
5
1

Table D-2 The left end plug and The right end plug PIN data
The left end plug The right end plug The left end plug The right end plug
PIN data PIN data PIN data PIN data
- 1 4 6
- 2 - 7
1 3 2 8
- 4 - 9
3 5 - -

266
 Appendix D Communication extension card

D.3 CANopen communication card

D.3.1 CANopen introduction
CANopen is an architecture in the control area network (Controller Area Network,
CAN) on the high-level communication agreements, including communication
equipment sub-sub-agreements and agreements, often used in embedded systems,
industrial control is a commonly used fieldbus. CANopen implements the network
layer and above the agreement OSI model. CANopen standard includes
addressing scheme, several small communication sub-agreements

D.3.2 Equipment model

Communication agreement on other modules communication processing and
network communication unit needed to start and reset the device has a state
machine control. State machine include: Initialization, Pre-operational,
Operational, Stopped.

D.3.3 Object Dictionary

Object Dictionary (OD: Object Dictionary) is an ordered group of objects; each
object using an index value of 16 is addressed, in order to allow access to the data
structure of a single element, while the definition of an eight sub-indexes.

D.3.4 Communication
(1)Communication objects: Management packets, Service Data Objects (SDO),
process data objects (PDO), the pre-definition packet or special function object
(2)Communication model: master/slave model, client/server model,
producer/consumer model

D.3.5 Agreement
(1) NMT Agreement (network management, network management): Status
Agreement definition of the state machine change commands (such as starting or
stopping the equipment), to detect remote device bootup and failure scenarios.
(2) Heartbeat Agreement: nodes in the network to monitor and confirm it is
working properly.
(3) SDO agreement: between devices used to transfer large low-priority data,
typically used to configure devices on the CANopen network.
(4) PDO Agreement: 8 bytes or less used to transmit data, no other agreement
preset (which means data has been pre-definition).

267
Appendix D Communication extension card

D.3.6 CANopen form and terminal definition description

J1

e e
e e
e e
e e
e e
e e
e e
e e
e oo
e e
e ®e
e ®
e e
e e

:
CN1 2

o
O o o
J2
CANL ICANH I CONI

Fig D-2 CANopen outline dimensional drawing

Table D-3 Terminal function description
Terminal
Name Description Remark
number
Communication By the client device connected to the CAN
CN1
wiring terminal bus communication
When you install this plug docking with
J1 Signal port
the main control board CN2
Terminal resistor Connect J2, then terminal resistor connect
J2
access entry to bus
(1)CN1 pin definition
PIN data Definition PIN data Definition
1 signal CANL 3 COM
2 signal CANH - -

268
 Appendix D Communication extension card

D.4 CANlink communication card

D.4.1 CANlink introduction
The physical layer CANlink card is CAN bus, only supports CAN2.0B extended
frame. Since the control signal CANlink card connected directly to the main board,
compared with CANOPEN card, with high transmission efficiency, real-time,
stability and other characteristics, the maximum transfer rate of 1Mbps. CAN bus
data transmission using a differential signal, with strong anti-interference,
transmission distance and other characteristics, the communication rate 5Kbps
below, the farthest reach 10Km, at 1Mbps baud rate up to 30m.
CANlink protocol is self-definition protocols, support for modifications and
inverter terminal parameters monitoring.
D.4.2 CANlink card figure and terminal definition description

(o

Jl
©
© ©
e ©
© 0
© ©
© ©
© ©
© ©
© ©
© 00
© Q
© Q©

© ®
© ©
© Q

1
r

1 2 3

o O O

CANL 1 CANH CDM

© j

Fig D-3 CANlink Dimensions

269
Appendix D Communication extension card

Table D-4 Terminal function description

Terminal
Name Description Remark
Number
Communication wiring By the client device connected to the
CN1
terminal CAN bus communication
When you install this plug docking with
J1 Signal port
the main control board CN2
Terminal resistor access Connect J2, then terminal resistor
J2
entry connect to bus
(1) The definition of CN1 pin.
PIN data Definition PIN data Definition

1 Signal CANL 3 COM

2 Signal CANH - -

270
 Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card

Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card

E.1 The selection of encoder expansion card：
Universal encoder expansion card (PG card), As an option to use, it is the
necessary option for closed loop vector control inverter.
No. Model Description Remark
Differentiator input PG card, encoder
1 EN-PG01 input signal not isolated (suitable for all Optional
series machine)
Differentiator input PG card, encoder
input signal through the optocoupler
2 EN-PG02 Optional
isolation, stronger anti-interference ability
(suitable for all series machine)
Oc input PG card, encoder input signal
3 EN-PG03 Optional
through the optocoupler isolation
E.2 EN-PG01,EN-PG02 shape and terminal definitions

© A

CN1
°o m
o
oo

oo
oo

o o
OD O
OD OD
OD O
O O
O O
O O
o o

©
CN2
2 4 6 8 10
8 8 3 8 8

8 8 8 8
1 3 5 7 9
PE IVCfl A + I B + I Z + l
I PE |GND I A - I B - I Z -

Fig.E-1 EN-PG01, EN-PG02 Outline dimension drawing

271
Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card

Table E-1 Terminal function description

Terminal
Name Description Remark
number
Board and board When installing the plug and the main
CN1
Butt socket control board CN2 docking
CN2 The user interface The encoder uses

(1) CN2 Terminal definitions

Terminal
PIN data Description
labeling
1 PE Shielding terminal
2 PE Shielding terminal
Power supply (GND of EN-PG01 and GND of control panel
3 GND is connect. GND of EN-PG02 and GND of control panel
isolation)
4 VCC Provide 5V/300mA current toward outside

5 A- Encoder output signal A negative

6 A+ Encoder output signal A positive

7 B- Encoder output signal B negative

8 B+ Encoder output signal B positive

9 Z- Encoder output signal Z negative

10 Z+ Encoder output signal Z positive

(2) PG card specification：

The user interface Terminal table

Spacing 3.81mm

The maximum rate 500kHz

Differentiator input signal amplitude ≤7V

272
 Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card

E.3 EN-PG03 shape and terminal definitions

¡
<500000000000000
ö OOOOO üOOOOOOO
MD o
CU

CO
•M"
o
o
o
5
CU
I

Ol r
-lgVlg
-VlCDMr
4
£

Fig.E-2 EN-PG03 Outline dimension drawing

Table E-2 Terminal function description
Terminal
Name Description Remark
number
Board and board When installing the plug and the main
CN1
Butt socket control board CN2 docking
CN2 The user interface The encoder uses

(1) CN2 Terminal definitions

Terminal
PIN data Description
labeling
1 PE Shielding terminal
2 PE Shielding terminal
3 A Encoder output signal A
Provide voltage of 12V externally(Only supply power for
4 12V
12V encoder)
5 B Encoder output signal B
6 24V Provide 24V/100mA current
7 Z Encoder output signal Z
8 COM Power ground

273
 Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance

Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance

F.1 Braking unit and braking resistance
The motor’s electric potential energy will charge inverter’s capacitance up
reversely if speed of the motor descends too quickly or load of the motor wobbles
too quickly while the inverter is running, which will increase the voltage upon
power modules suddenly and is easy to make the inverter damaged. The inverter
will control it according to load size and performance. You only need to connect
external braking resistance to realize timely energy discharge when the braking
function is needed. To connect external resistance is a kind of energy consumption
braking mode, as all the energy is consumed by the braking resistance.
EN600-2S0037, EN600-4T0007G/0015P ～ EN600-4T0150G/0185P has been
configured the built-in braking unit for EN600-2S0004 ～ EN600-2S0022,
EN600-4T0185G/0220P～EN600-4T0550G/0750P, the built-in braking unit is
optional.
When braking function needed, please connect external braking resistance
according to below table.
Configuration table of braking unit and braking resistor configuration as
well as circumscribed braking resistor
Built-in Built-in Add Power of braking Power of braking
Frequency inverter type braking braking braking Quantity resistor（50% resistor（10%
unit resistor resistor braking rate） braking rate）
EN600-2S0004 Optional 无 ≥150Ω 1PCS ≥1KW ≥200W
EN600-2S0007 Optional 无 ≥100Ω 1PCS ≥1.5KW ≥250W
EN600-2S0015 Optional 无 ≥70Ω 1PCS ≥2KW ≥400W
EN600-2S0022 Optional 无 ≥50Ω 1PCS ≥3KW ≥600W
EN600-2S0037 Built-in 无 ≥30Ω 1PCS ≥5KW ≥1KW
EN600-4T0007G/0015P Built-in No ≥300Ω 1PCS ≥1KW ≥250W
EN600-4T0015G/0022P Built-in No ≥300Ω 1PCS ≥1KW ≥250W
EN600-4T0022G/0037P Built-in No ≥300Ω 1PCS ≥1KW ≥250W
EN600-4T0037G Built-in No ≥125Ω 1PCS ≥2KW ≥400W
EN600-4T0055P Built-in No ≥125Ω 1PCS ≥2KW ≥400W
EN600-4T0055G/0075P Built-in No ≥80Ω 1PCS ≥3.8KW ≥750W
EN600-4T0075G/0110P Built-in No ≥80Ω 1PCS ≥3.8KW ≥750W
EN600-4T0110G/0150P Built-in No ≥50Ω 1PCS ≥5KW ≥1KW
EN600-4T0150G/0185P Built-in No ≥40Ω 1PCS ≥7.5KW ≥1.5KW
EN600-4T0185G/0220P Optional No ≥27Ω 1PCS ≥9KW ≥1.8KW

274
 Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance

EN600-4T0220G/0300P Optional No ≥22Ω 1PCS ≥11KW ≥2.2KW

EN600-4T0300G/0370P Optional No ≥19Ω 1PCS ≥15KW ≥3KW
EN600-4T0370G/0450P Optional No ≥16.8Ω 1PCS ≥18.5KW ≥3.7KW
EN600-4T0450G/0550P Optional No ≥13Ω 1PCS ≥22KW ≥4.5KW
EN600-4T0550G/0750P Optional No ≥11Ω 1PCS ≥28KW ≥5.5KW

275